Skip to main content

Full text of "Discourses on Radhasoami faith"

See other formats


DISCOURSES 

ON 

RADHASOAMI    FAITH 


REGISTERED  UNDER  SECTIONS  18  AND  19, 
ACT  XXV  OF  1867 


ir 


I 


SOAMIJI     MAHARAJ 


. 


DISCOURSES 

ON 

RADHASOAMI  FAITH 


BY 

MAHARAJ  SAHEB 

PANDIT  BRAHM  SANKAR  MISEA,.M.  A. 


PUBLISHED  UNDER  THE  AUTHORITY  OF  THE  PROPRIETORS 

BY 

B.   P.  DEY,   DAYAL  SAHA1,   R.  S.  SATSANG, 
BENARES 

1909 

(.All  rights  reserved) 


PRINTED    BY   A.    C.    PAUL,   AT   THE    UNIVERSAL    PRESS. 
27,   RAMKRISHNAPUR   GHAT   ROAD,    HOWRAH 


RADHASOAAU 
SAHAI 


PREFATORY    NOTE 

HI  AT  there  is  HO  conflict  between  true 
j. ..  science  and  true  religion, and  that 
the  onward  and  systematic  researches  of 
the  former  only  go  to  confirm  and  establish 
all  the  esoteric  and  occult  principles  of 
the  latter,  has  been  very  clearly  and  * 

forcibly  set  down  in  these  spiritual  Dis-  I 

•courses.     The  object  of  science  is  to  ascer-  t 

tain  the   laws   of   nature,    including    the  I, 

form    and   characteristics    of    the    prime  .s 

force  in  creation,  and  that  of  religion  is  h 

to  become  happy  and  immortal  by  bhakti,  .e 

*.  <?.,  by  being  ever  grateful  to,  and  falling 
pnMrute    at,    the  most  exalted  and  ever  ie 

merciful    Feet    of   the    eternal    Supreme  >n 

Being.     Both  these  analogous  objects,  one  4£ 

viewed  from  the  point  of  intelligence  and 


VI  PREFATORY    NOTE 

the  other  from  that  of  subjective  pheno 
mena,  can  easily  and  properly  be  attained 
by  the  performance  of  the  devotional 
practices  prescribed  by  Sant  Sat  guru, 
Who  is  the  incarnation  of  the  all-knowing 
Supreme  Being.  In  essence  and  substance 
He  is  the  same  as  the  First  Manifesting 
Cause. 

In  conformity  to  the  innate  law  of  the 
universe,  where  the  real  controlling  power 
remains  ever  enveloped  in  the  innermost 
recess  of  a  system,  the  nij a  nip  (real  form) 
of  the  Sant  Satguru  similarly  remains 
hidden  inside  the  spiritual  chamber  of  the 
human  form,  which  He  mercifully  assumes 
when  the  Triloki,  in  which  our  earth  is 
included,  comes  nearest  to  Satyalok,  i.  e., 
in  conjunction  with  the  first  grand  division 
of  creation.  With  a  view  to  gain  access  to 
the  Sant  Satguru  and  to  mark  and  follow 
the  path  of  progress  and  ascension 
from  the  objective  to  the  subjective 
systems,  the  Radhasoami  religion, 
otherwise  known  as  Santmat,  enjoins  on  its 


PREFATORY    NOTE  VII 

followers  the  necessity  of  placing  implicit 
faith  and  trust  in  the  mercy  and  grace  of 
the  Sant  Satguru,  in  precisely  the  same 
way  as  a  two  or  three  year  old  child  gives 
itself  up  cheerfully  to  the  affectionate 
care  and  protection  of  its  parents.  First 
in  human  form,  then  in  the  forms  of 
Devatas,  Brahm,  Para  Brahm,  Sohang 
Punish,  and  finally  in  nija  rup,  Sant 
Satguru  has  to  associate  Himself  object 
ively  and  subjectively  with  His  followers 
in  all  these  forms  of  their  transformation 
and  development,  with  a  view  to  render 
to  them  every  kind  of  help,  both  when  in 
and  out  of  the  flesh,  and  to  elevate  and 
redeem  them.  Satsangis  find  in  Sant 
Satguru  their  true  guardian,  friend, 
instructor,  and  redeemer.  The  Sat  sang  is 
a  sort  of  spiritual  institution  of  which 
the  principal  presiding  authority  is  the 

Sant  Satguru  Himself. 
/    f  '  /  / 

Soamiji   Maharaj,  the   founder  of  the 

f      /     i    / 
Radhasoami  religion  and  an  incarnation 

of  the  Supreme  Being,  manifested  Himself 


Vl  PREFATORY    NOTE 


in  an  old  and  ^ respectable  "  family  of 
Khat  tries  at  Agra  IB  August.,1818.  From 
early  childhood,  He  began  to  expound  the 
highest  principles  of  religion  to  the  gifted 
few,  and  His  extraordinary  powers  had  a 
great  effect  upon  all  who  came  in  contact 
with  Him.  Soamiji  Maharaj  had  no  Guru 
and  as  such  was  a  Swata  Sant.  He 
dictated  two  books  in  Hindi,  viz. : 

(1)  Sar  Bachan,  in  verse, 

(2)  Sar  Bachan,  in  prose. 
He  departed  from  this  world  k* 

Huzoor  Maharaj,  Rai  Saligram  Saheb 
Bahadoor,  was  the  second  Leader  and 
Guru  of  the  Radhasoami  religion.  He 
manifested  Himself  in  a  highly  reputed 
family  of  Kayasthas  at  Agra  on  the  14th 
March ?  1828^ and  joined  the  /Satsang  of  ^ 
Soamiji  Maharaj  in  1858.  He  was  th<e 
chief  disciple  and  Gurumukh  of  His  time, 
and  after  the  demise  of  Soamiji  Mah'araj 

e  presidediover  the  ,Satsang   for  over 
weptv  years  f rom  June^KvOo  December. 

I*  *  7     A 

He    published     the'   two    books 


PREFATORY    NOTE  IX 

mentioned   above     and    also    wrote    and 
published  the  following  works  :— 

1.  Prem   Bam,  in  verse,   4  vols.,   in 
Hindi, 

2.  Prem    Patra,    in    prose,    6    vols, 
in  Hindi. 

3.  Radhasoami     Mat     Prakash,     in 
prose — in  English,  and 

4.  Several  small  treatises    in    Hindi 
and  Urdu. 

Mahanij  Saheb,  Pandit  Brahm  Sankar 
Misra,  the  thircLXeadeii  mid  Guru,  mani 
fested  Himself  onffi'e  28tli  March^l861^ 
in  one  of  the  most  renowned  families  of 
Srahmans  at  Benares,  in  Mahalla  Peary, 
close  to  Kabir  Chowrali,  where  Kabir 
Saheb  appeared  a  few  hundred  years  ago. 
Shortly  after  completing  His  educational 

y^W  »    Ct-  i 

career  and  obtaininsr  the  degree  of  IT.  A-. 

A 

of  the  Calcutta  University,  He  ioined  the 

*   «5/V-^4*n,i^<jlcj 

Satsansr  of  Hu/oor/Malmrai  on  tlie/28th 

^iuJK^.ZJLR  ^CfltL' 
JNovember^lStto^     He  in  His  turn  became 

the  Gurumukh  of  His  true  spiritual  Eather, 
Huzoor  Maharaj,  and  when  HI  J?ecember5 


X  PREFATORY    NOTE 

18989Huzoor  Maharaj  departed  from  this 

world,  He  became  the  Head  of  the  Satsang 

t  i       f 
Maharaj  Saheb  resided  in  Allahabad  for  a 

considerable  number  of  years  and  after  a 
few  months'  sojourn  in  Karachi'  and 
Hyderabad  (Sind)  during  the  winter  of 

1906,  He  came,  to,  Benares  and  departed 

i  .          ,  ,5^vwv^v^A 
trom  this  world  on  the  12th\October.l907.V%' 

These  Discourses,  which  Maharaj  Saheb 
had  dictated  extempore,  have  by  His  mauj 
been  left  unfinished.  The  universal  law, 
so  to  say,  is  that  recreation  is  creation  and 
that  rest  implies  action,  and  in  accordance 
with  this  proposition  this  temporary 
objective  cessation  in  the  course  of  mauj 
appears  to  be  in  harmony  with  the  mission 
of  redemption,  to  which  an  impetus  in 
the  fulness  of  time  is  evidently  meant,  i.  e., 
the  Satsang,  which  was  very  graciously 
inaugurated  by  Soamiji  Maharaj  in  18i 
and  was  in  operation  generally  in  an  object 
ive  form  for  about  50  years,  has  to  be 
further  widened  and  developed  by  turning 
its  course  to  meet  karma-  and  its  effects 


PREFATORY    NOTE  XI 

by   a  consolidation  of  the  work   already 
done  and  by  infusion  of  fresh  spirituality 
into  humanity.     It  will  be  seen  that  Part 
IV  of  the  book  relating  to  karma  was  just 
commenced  and  that,  it  is  presumed,  other 
cognate  matters  were  left  untouched.     It 
is  also  a  fact  that  with  the  exception  of 
the  first  Part,  Maharaj  Saheb  did  not  even 
revise  what  in  Parts  II   and  III    He   had 
dictated  from  time  to  time  without  consult 
ing  the  previous  portions.     It   might    be 
asked   whether    it  would  be    worthwhile^ 
under    such    circumstances  9 to    bring  out 
these  Discourses  in  print,  as  of  course  He 
had  intended  to  daand  often  expressed  His 
intention  of  doing  in  a  complete  form.    To 
this  question,  there  can  be  but  one  answer 
from    the    point  of   view  of    a  satsangi, 
for  whose  benefit  the  book  is  really  pub 
lished.     To    him,    irrespective    of    other 
considerations,  it  must   be   taken   as  an 
inspired  writing,  and  at  the  present  critical 
time,  there  is  no  doubt  that  even  in  its 
unfinished  condition  the  book  would  be  a 


Xll  PREFATORY    NOTE 

solace,  an  inestimable  boon,  and  a  blessing. 
To  the  English-speaking  persons  who  now- 

/  /  ft 

a-days  join  the  lladhasoami  Sats"ang,  it 
will  also  be  a  very  great  help  in  under 
standing  the  true  principles  of  the  lladha 
soami  religion. 

The  manuscript  has  been  ready  for  the 
press  since  December,  1907,  but  still  there 
has  been  considerable  delay  and  unforeseen 
difficulty  in  its  due  publication.  With  a 
view,  however,  to  meet  the  wishes  of  sat- 
sangis,  some  of  whom  are  very  anxious  for 
its  speedy  issue,  this  book  is  now  presented 
in  as  good  a  form  as  is  possible  under  the 
existing  circumstances.  What  name  Maha- 
raj  Saheb  intended  to  give  to  the  book  is  not 
known,  and  the  present  name  is  a  simple 
transcript  of  the  name  of  the  first  book 
issued  on  the  lladhasoami  religion. 

In  1901  and  1902,  Mah'araj  Saheb  for 
warded  two  brief  reports  on  the  lladha 
soami  Faith  to  the  Census  officers  of  the 
Punjab  and  the  tlnited  Provinces,  which 
are  attached  to  this  book  as  Appendices 


PREFATORY    NOTE  XVII 

localities,  where  the  Sant  Satgurus- 
appeared  and  where  Their  holy  ashe& 
have  heen  preserved,  are  places  of  unique 
importance. 

The  holy  ashes  of  the  three  incarnations 
have  been  preserved  in  the  sammUis  at  the 
following  places  :— 

1.  Soamiii  Maharaj's — at  Soami  Bag)v, 
(lladhasoami  Garden),  Agra, 

2.  Huzoor  Maharaj's — at  Peepalmandi, 

Affra,  and 

/    /        /  ,    / 

3.  Maharaj    Saheh's — at    Soami   Bag^ 
Benares. 

The  above  places  and  the  tombs  in 
which  the  holy  ashes  have  been  preserved 
are  regarded  as  the  holiest  shrines,  sancta 
sanctorum,  quite  free  from  the  atmosphere 
of  worldly  pursuits  and  vanities.  Sant 
Sat  guru  while  in  human  form  held  Satsang 
at  these  places.  They  have  thereby  been 
sanctified,  and  naturally  therefore  an 
association  of  purity  and  holiness  is 
attached  to  them.  The  particular  sites 
from  which  the  Sant  Satguru  departed 


XV111  PREFATORY    NOTE 

from  this  world,  the  holy  ashes,  the  hall 
where  He  used  to  preside  and  where  His 
photographs  or  painted  pictures  have  been 
kept  up,  and  the  articles  or  furniture 
used  by  Him — all  harmoniously  combine 
to  concentrate  attention  and  elevate  the 
spirit  to  a  point  at  which  satsangis  practise 
their  spiritual  devotion.  They  have  thus 
become  the  most  holy  places  of  worship 
and  parikarmd  (an  imitation  of  the 
devotee's  movements  while  traversing  in 
wardly)  for  the  members  of  the  Radha- 
soami  Faith.  There  the  annual  vdnddrds 
of  Soamiji  Maharaj,  Huzoor  Maharaj,  and 
Maharaj  Saheb  take  place  in  June, 
December,  and  October  respectively. 

The  unusual  length  of  this  note  is  due  to 
the  very  great  importance  of  the  subject, 
and  as  to  any  defect  in  the  get-up,  &c.,  of 
this  edition,  it  is  due  to  the  peculiarly  un 
fortunate  circumstances  under  which  this 
great  and  holy  book  is  at  last  published, 
and  the  reader  may  accordingly  be  pleased 
to  take  an  indulgent  view  of  the  matter. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


PART  I 

True  Religion,  its  Object  and  the  Condition 
under  which  that  Object  is  attainable 

ART.  PAGE 

1.  Preliminary  Remarks                   ...                 ...  1 

2.  The  Object  of  Religion                ...                 ...  2 

3.  Pleasure  and  Pain                         ...                 ...  3 

4.  The  Sensory  Current                   ...                ...  4 

5.  Definition  of  Pain                         ...                ...  6 

6.  Definition  of  Pleasure                  ...                 ...  10 

7.  The  State  of  Supreme  Bliss        ...            '    ...  13 

8.  Development  of  Spirit-force       ...                t...  14 

9.  Differentiation  of  Mind  and  Spirit               ...  15 

10.  Disembodied  Spirits                     ...                 ...  16 

11.  Spirit-force  distinguished  from  the  so-called 

Forces  of  Nature                ...                ...  19 

12.  The  five  Elements  of  the  Ancients                ...  27 

13.  Spirit,  the  Prime  Force               ...                 ...  28 

14.  The  Supreme  Source  of  Spirit    ...                 ...  32 

15.  The  Object  of  Religion  in  View...                ...  34 

16.  Spirit  and  its  Source                   ...                ...  34 

17.  Three  main  Factors  of  Human  Existence    ...  36 

18.  Six  Subdivisions  of  Human  Frame              ...  38 
J9.     The  Sensory  and  the  Motor  Currents          ...  41 


XX  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS 

ART.  PAGE 

20.  The    Region    of    Universal    Mind  and    its 

six  Subdivisions                    ...  •••       44 

21.  The  Region  of  Pure  Spirit           ...  ...       53 

22.  Communion     of    the    Microcosm  with    the 

Macrocosm        ...                 ...  •••       56 

23.  The  Brain  and  its  Functions      ...  ...       60 

24.  The  Brain  and  its  Apertures       ...  ...       65 

25.  Practice    of   Devotional    Methods  attended 

by  increased  Vital  Energy  ...       67 


PART  II 

Methods  of  Spiritual  Development  and 
of  the  Elevation  of  the  Spirit 

26.  Spiritual  Development  ...  ...       69 

27.  Sound,       Sight,       and      Speech— Essential 

Factors  of  Existence  ...  ...       70 

28.  The    three      Dimensions    not     affected     by 

Creational  Forces  ...  ...       73 

29.  Sound,     an     Expression      of     the      Force 

producing  it       ...  ...  •••       74 

30.  The   Course   of    Spiritual  Sound  is    always 

inward  ...  ««•  ...       76 

31.  Ordinary     Methods    of    Contemplation    not 

purely  spiritual  ...  ...       78 

32.  All  Feelings  reflected  on  Face    ...  ...       79 

33.  Responsive    Action    evoked    by     means    of 

Facial  Expression  ...  ..,       80 


TAfcLfi    OF   CONTENTS 


ART.  I>A<;K 

34.  Different  (trades  of  Adepts         ...  ...       81 

35.  Spiritual  Contemplation 

36.  The  four  Grades  of  each  Class  of  Adepts  ...       87 

37.  Supernatural  Powers  of  Adepts 

38.  Miracles  and  their  Character      ...  ...       89 

39.  Laws    regulating    the    Exercise     of    higher 

Spiritual  Powers                   ...  •••  90 

40.  Miracles  distinguished 

41.  Reverses  of  Prophets  and  Adepts  •••  95 

42.  More  common  forms  of  Miracles  ...  96 

43.  Adepts  and  Incarnations  distinguished        ...  99 

44.  Incarnations  explained                •••  —  100 

45.  An      Incarnation—  a      Source     of  immense 

Benefit  ....  ...  •••     101 

46.  Gifted  Spirits—  the  Source  of  all  Knowledge 

and  Blessings    ...  ...  ...      103 

47.  Prophets    and    Incarnations  —  Source   of    all 

Spiritual  Knowledge  ...  ...     104 

48.  The     Awakening     of     a     New     Spirit     of 

Research  ...  ...  ...     105 

49.  Incarnations      and       Prophets       of      extant 

religions  —  their  Origin        ...  ...      107 

50.  Incarnations      and      Prophets       of     extant 

religions  —  Proof  of  their  Origin  ...  110 

51.  Spiritual  Regeneration  ...  ...  112 

52.  Partial  Revelation  preceding  Incarnations  113 

53.  Uniform      Nature      of    Teachings     of     the 

Saints  ...  ...  ...     115 

54.  Advent  of  Radhasoami  Dayal    ...  ...     117 

55.  Necessity    of    a  Living  Adept   for    Spiritual 

Training  ...  ...  ...     119 

56.  The  Holy  Service      ...  ...  ...     124 


XXII  tABlE    O!1    CONTENTS 

ART.  PAGE 

57.  Distribution  of  Articles  sanctified  by  Touch  129 

58.  Parshadi,  Charanamrit,  Arati,  and  Obeisance  130 

59.  Articulation  of  Spiritual  Name  ...  ...  135 

60.  Theory    of  the  Repetition    of   Holy  Names 

explained  ...  ...  ...     137 

61.  Main    Object    of  the  Methods  of   Practice 

identical  ...  ...  ...     143 

62.  Holy    Spiritual   Name     distinguished    from 

so-called  Mantras  ...  ...     144 

63.  Characteristics  of  Spirit-force    ...  ...     145 

64.  Distinctive    Character    of     Sounds    emana 

ting  from   Spiritual    Source    and   from 
Spiritual  Currents  ...  ...     147 

65.  Explanation       of       the      Supreme       Name 

Radhasoa'mi       ...  ...  ...     151 

66.  Sequence    of     sounds    Radha    and     Soami 

explained  ...  ...  ...     153 

67.  Component    parts    of    the     name    Ra'dha- 

soami'  explained  ...                 ...  154 

68.  The  Origin  of  Forms  ...                ...  158 

69.  The  Primeval  Form  ...                 ...  159 

70.  Sound    accompanying  first    Commotion    in 

Spirit-source      ...  ...  ...     159 

71.  Kabir    Saheb's    Reference   to    the   Supreme 

Name  Radha/soami/  ...  ...     \Q\ 

72.  Distinctive    Features  of  the  Efficacy  of   the 

three  Methods  of  Practice  ...     163 

73.  Contemplation   of  Form  during   periods    of 

Interregnum       ...  ...  ...     ^55 

74.  Exact     Processes    of    Devotional    Methods 

confidential        ...  ...  \QQ 

75.  Influence  of  Temporal  Conditions,  Inclina 

tions,  and  Desires  on  Practice  167 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS  XXIII 


PART  III 

Evolution  of  Creation,  /.  e.,  True  Order, 
Economy,  and  Object  of  Creation 

ART.  PAGE 

76.  Condition  before  Creation          ...  ...     169 

77.  Polarisation  of  the  Prime  Energy  ...     171 

78.  Eternal      Polarisation       in      the     Supreme 

Being  ...  ...  ...     172 

79.  The  Two  Poles          ...  ...  ...     172 

80.  The    Ineffable    Refulgence    of    the    Infinite 

Pole                    ...                ...  ...  174 

81.  The  Nether  Pole,  Source  of  Creation  ...  175 

82.  Subjective  Knowledge— no  Illusion  ...  177 

83.  The  Positive  distinguished  from  the  Nega 

tive  Pole  ...  ...  ...     180 

84.  Original  Spirit-entities  as  constituted  ...     181 

85.  The  Prime  Current  preceded  by  Commotion 

in  the  Supreme  Source       ...  ...     184 

86.  The  Sound  and  Spirit  Currents  ...     186 

87.  The  purely    Spiritual    Region    and   its    six 

Subdivisions      ...  ...  ...     187 

88.  The     Denizens     of    the     purely     Spiritual 

Regions  ...  ...  ...     189 

89.  Again     Punish,    the     First     Focus     of    the 

Prime  Current,   and  the  Origin  of  lunar 
and  solar  Orbs  ...  ...  ...     192 

90.  Creation     of    the     remaining   four   Spheres 

of  the  purely  Spiritual  Region  ...     196 

91.  Mahasunna— its   six  subtle  Subdivisions     ...     196 


XXIV  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS 

ART.  PAGE 

92.  The  Emanation  of  Ka"l  Purush  and  Adya   ...     198 

93.  Evolution     of     the    Constituents     and     six 

Subdivisions  of  Brahmand...  ...     201 

94.  The      Spirituality     of     Brahmand     and   its 

Denizens  ...  ...  ...     209 

95.  The  Denizens  of  the  Spiritual  Creation        ...     211 

96.  The   Tanmatras — the    subtlest    Particles    of 

Matter  ...  ...  ...     212 

97.  The   Tanmatras    of    Elements— the    Consti 

tution    of  Forms  and  Functions   of  the 
Senses  ...  ...  «••     213 

98.  The  Cause  of  some  Gases   and    Substances 

being  odourless  and  tasteless  ...     216 

99.  The     Sense    of     Hearing    subtler   than   the 

Sense  of  Sight  ...  ...  ...     219 

100.  Gradual  Development  of  the  Senses  ...     223 

101.  The  Field  below  Brahmand  and  the  Orbital 

Motions  of  Brahmand  and  Pind  ...     224 

102.  The  Combination  of  Qualities    with   Prakri- 

tis  forming  eighty-four  currents  ...     226 

103.  The  Four  Classes  of  Existence  in  Pind       ...     227 

104.  The  Six     Subdivisions    of    Pind   and   their 

Presiding  Deities  ...  ...  230 

105.  The  Denizens  of  Pind  ...  ...  234 

106.  The  Region  of  Hell  and  its  Denizens          ...  237 

107.  General    Economy     of    the   three     grand 

Divisions  ...  ...     239 

108.  Mahapralaya  and  Pralaya  ...  ...     242 

109      The    Constitution    of     the     Denizens  other 

than  Man  ...  ...  ...     244 

110.     Incarnations    of    Brahm   and   the    Supreme 

Being  ...  —  •••     24G 


TABLE    OF   CONTENTS  XXV 

ART.  PAGE 

111.  The   Constitution  of  Man— a   perfect  Micro 

cosm  fit  for  Spiritual  Progress  ...  249 

112.  The     Recruitment     of     Human    and    other 

Species  on  this  Earth  ...  ...  254 

113.  Prenatal  State  of  Spirit-entities  ...  257 

114.  Death  of  Man— its  Order  and  Process         ...  -261 

115.  The  Death-process  of  Lower  Entities  ...  266 
11G.     The   Death-process    of    Entities    entitled    to 

assume  Human  Form          ...  ...  267 

117.  Conflict  between  Spirit-force  and  the  Forces 

of  Nature  ...  ...  ...  207 

118.  Metempsychosis — its  Character  and  Scope  ..  268 

119.  The  four  Stages  of  Life  ...  ...  272 

120.  Parallel  of  four  Stages  of  Life  in  Creation  ...  275 

121.  Four    Yugas— Charming    Condition    of  Life 

and  Nature  in  three  of  Them  ...  276 

122.  Kfiliyuga  — its    Troubles — a  Time  for  Eman 

cipation  ...  ...  ...  279 

123.  The  Origin  of  Varieties  in  Creation  ...  284 

124.  The  Gracious  Object  of  Creation  ...  291 

PART  IV 

Karma,  /.  e.,  the  Actions  performed  by  Human 
Entities  and  their  Effects  on  Them 

125.  The   Penal   Law     of    Creation— its     Advan 

tages  ...  ...  ...  298 

126.  The    Impressions   on    a  Human  Entity  and 

the  Mode  of  their  Preservation  ...  300 

127.  Manakash— its  Functions  ...  ...  302 

128.  Laws  for  the  Reproduction  of  Impressions    ...  303 


XXVI  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS 


APPENDICES 

APP.  PAGE 

A.  A  Brief  View  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith       ...  305 

B.  A     Brief    Exposition     of     the   Radhasoami 

Faith  ...                  ...                ...                ...  311 

C.  Constitution    and   Bye-Laws   of  the   Central 

Council  Radhasoami  Satsang                ...  318 

D.  A  Brief  Report  on   the    Radhasoami    Faith  333 

E.  Hindi  Verses  337 


'  V          *  / 

IJadbasoa'mi  Dayal  Ki  Daya 


l{adbasoami  Sabai 


f     .  /  / 


GRANT 

Merciful  Radhasoami 

THY 
GRACE  AND  PROTECTION 


DISCOURSES 

ON 

RADHASOAMI  FAITH 


PART  I 

True  Religion,  its  Object  and  the  Condition 
under  which  that  Object  is  attainable 

IMIELIMINAKV    liKMAKKS 

§1 1  K  apathy  which  manifests  itself 
amongst  the  most  intelligent  classes, 
specially  amongst  scientific  men,  in  res 
pect  of  religion,  is  due  to  the  fact  that 
religious  matters  are  more  or  less  shrouded 
in  sentimentality,  mysticism,  arid  dogmatic 
faith,  and  are  void  of  that  practical  and 
matter-of-fact  research  which  distin 
guishes  a  scientific  study.  To  endow 
religion  with  practical  and  scientific 
interest,  it  is  ? therefore  >  essential  that 
religious  research  should  he  conducted  on 
the  same  lines  as  those  employed  in 


2  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

scientific  research,  that  is  to  say,  the 
object  in  view  should  be  clearly  defined, 
and  practical  measures  prescribed  and 
adopted  for  the  attainment  of  that  object. 
The  principles  and  experimentations,  or 
the  practical  uovotioiial  methods,  of  such 
a  scientific  religion,  are  described  in  the 
following  pages. 

2 — THE    OBJECT    OF    RELIGION 

A  desire  to  acquire  pleasure  or  to  avoid 
pain  appears  to  be  the  motive  of  all 
animate  volition  and  acts.  Involuntary 
actions  and  thoughts  of  animate  existence 
also  *  to  some  extent  partake  of  this  ten- 


;  partake 


dency,  that  is  to  say,  there  is  co-opera 
tion,  assimilation,  or  acceptance  of  the 
condition  helpful  or  conducive  to  well- 
being,  and  there  is  resistance  or  receding 
in  the  case  of  a  contrary  condition.  The 
terms,  '  pleasure '  and  '  pain,'  have  been 
used,  here  and  elsewhere,  in  their  most 
comprehensive  sense,  including  all  prospec 
tive  and  retrospective  conditions,  whether 


LET.  .*>          ITS    OBJECT    AND    KM) 


appertaining  to  self    or   connected 
others. 

It  is  clear  that  a  motive;,  actuated  by 
the  impulse  described  above,  can  find  a 
final  resting  place  in  such  a  state  alone  as 
is  entirely  Tree  from  pain  and  opposition 
of  every  description  and  is  one  of  supreme 
bliss.  This  is  the  object  of  religion  in  its 
extreme  analytical  aspect.  A  study  of 
the  laws  of  spirit-force,  a  clear  and  posi 
tive  knowledge  of  the  Supreme,  Creator, 

% L  *  .     CCSVvSVlXw  • 

and  01     the    i*conomv«    genesis,    and  the  (r 

A 

object  of  creation,  and  of  the  true  duty  of 
the  sentient  entity  in  the  universe,  are 
other  ends  in  view  in  a  scientific  study  of 


religion. 


3 — PLEASURE  AND  PAIN 


As  the  final  object  of  religion,  as 
referred  to,  is  the  acquisition  of  supreme 
bliss  and  the  complete  elimination  of 
pain,  a  detailed  enquiry  into  the 
phenomena  of  pleasure  and  pain  would 
appear  to  be  essential  for  their  correct 


4  TRVE    RELIGION'  PART  I 

comprehension  and  for  the  selection  and 
adoption  of  such  suitable  means  as  won  Id 
result  in  the  attainment  of  the  end  in 
view. 

4 THE    SENSORY    CURRENT 

It  is  a  matter  of  every -day  experience- 
that  pleasure  and  pain  are  felt  only  when 
a  sentient  entity  is  in  the  normal  condi 
tion  of  wakefulness.  The  moment  the 
entity  passes  into  the  condition  of  dream 
or  deep  slumber,  or  into  a  condition  of 
trance,  or  that  brought  about  by  the 
administration  of  chloroform,  there  is  no- 
perception  of  pleasure  or  pain.  It  is- 
therefore. clear  that  the  main  factor  in  the- 
perception  of  pleasure  and  pain  is  thai 
something,  which  recedes  or  becomes 
inoperative  at  the  time  the  transmuta 
tion  of  the  wakeful  condition  into  the 
other  conditions,  referred  to,  takes  place. 
That  something  is  technically  known  as 
the  sensory  current.  A  comprehension 
of  the  nature  of  this  current,  and  the 


ART.    I  IIS    OK.JKCT    AND    END  5 

form  in  wliicli  it  manifests  itself,  con 
stitutes^  theivfoiv  , the  initial  step  in  the 
study  of  the  phenomena  of  pleasure  and 
pain. 

An  examination  and  analysis  of  the 
following-  case  of  sensory  action,  which  is 
-one  of  every-day  occurrence,  would  show 
the  true  nature  of  the  sensory  current,  and 
would,  it  is  hoped,  remove  to  some  exten^ 
the  vaguenessywhich  appertains  to  its  true 
nature  and  to  its  subjective  functions.  A 
person  is  deeply  engaged  in  the  solution 
*of  an  intricate  mathematical  problem ; 
hours  pass  by;  the  clock  strikes*  and  yet 
he  does  not  become  cognizant  of  the  time 
that  has  elapsed,  or  of  the  striking  of  the 
•clock.  The  cause  of  this  non-cognizance 
is  not  far  to  seek  and  can  readily  be  stated. 
The  attention,  by  its  engrossment  in  the 
solution  of  the  problem,  was  diverted  from 
other  sides,  and  this  resulted  in  the  ces 
sation  of  other  perceptions,  which,  under 
•ordinary  circumstances,  would  have  duly 
produced  their  subjective  effects.  Yet 


6  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

the  great  truth  and  the  laws,  that  under 
lie  the  explanation  given  above,  have  not 
been  reduced  to  definite  shapes,  nor  worked 
up  to  other  conditions  and  formula?. 
The  fundamental  law  of  sensory  action 
would  appear  to  be  that  it  manifests  itself 
in  the  form  of  attention,  and  that  its 
strength  varies  directly  as  the  intensity  of 
attention,  disappearing  entirely  when 
there  is  a  complete  diversion  of  attention. 
There  are  innumerable  shades  and  degrees 
of  attention,  and  in  accordance  with  them, 
the  intensity  of  perception  varies.  The 
law  enunciated  above  appertains  to  the 
phenomenon  of  perceptions'  of  all  classes 
as  a  whole.  The  following  exposition 
differentiates  the  main  features  of  the  two 
great  classes,  viz.,  pleasure  and  pain,  into 
which  all  perceptions  may  be  broadly 
divided. 

5— DEFINITION    OF    PAIN 

Pain   is  of   two    classes,    physical   and 
mental.      TTo    shall    in    the    first    place: 


ART.  5  ITS    OBJECT    AND    END 


proceed  with  an  examination  of  physical 
pain.  A  person  in  normal  condition 
receives  a  sword-cut  or  any  other  physical 
injury.  The  part  injured  is  contused  or 
severed,  and  the  nerves  occupying  that 
part,  which  are  the  vehicles  or  the  con 
ductors  of  the  sensory  current,  are  similarly 
affected.  This  condition,  if  analysed,  shows 
that  a  forcible  ejectment  of  some  portion 
of  the  sensory  current  has  taken  place,  and 
the  transmission  of  this  condition  to  the 
sentient  entity  by  the  unaffected  sensory 
currents  adjoining  the  part  injured  pro 
duces  the  sensation  known  as  physical 
pain.  If,  by  means  of  hypnotic  passes,  or 
by  the  administration  of  chloroform,  the- 
sensory  action  be  stopped,  which  will 
always  be  accompanied  by  a  forgetfulness 
of  the  physical  self,  i.e.,  by  a  complete 
withdrawal  of  attention  from  the  physical 
plane,  the  injury  will  no  longer  be  com 
municated  to  the  entity  and  will  not, 
therefore,  be  perceived.  In  the  case  of 
mental  pain  that  condition  is  produced  by 


O  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

shocks  to  mental  associations.  In  all 
these  associations,  however,  the  sensory 
•current  takes  as  great  a  part  in  the  per 
ception  of  mental  pain  as  it  does  in  the 
case  of  physical  pain.  It  has  already 
been  stated  ahove  that  the  sensory  current 
manifests  itself,  and  acts,  by  attention. 
It  may  be  mentioned  here  that,  even  in 
dreams^  where  the  scenes  are  changing  so 
rapidly,  it  is  the  diversion  of  attention  to 
the  various  subjective  impressions  that 
brings  about  these  transmutations.  In 
some  cases,  external  sounds,  etc.,  produce  a 
sudden  diversion,  and  new  and  sometimes 
extremely  queer  or  terrifying  features  are 
introduced.  If  a  careful  analysis  of  all 
conditions  be  made,  the  great  importance 
of  attention  in  all  subjective  effects  will 
be  established  beyond  doubt.  It  may  be 
stated  that  the  conductors  of  sensory  action, 
in  the  case  of  physical  pain,  are  the  nerves, 
while  in  the  case  of  mental  pain,  due  to 
shocks  to  associations,  the  communion  is 
entirely  by  means  of  thoughts,  which 


MIT.  5       JTS  on.JKrr  AND   KND 

represent  the  various  subjective  forms 
assumed  by  attention  with  reference  to  the 
dilTerent  impressions  with  which  it  is  asso 
ciated.  The  two  states  may  be  aptly  des 
cribed  as  analogous  to  telegraphy  by  wire 
and  wireless  telegraphy.  When  there  is  a 
mental  shock  or  injury,  there  is  always  a 
feeling  of  non-fulfilment  of  something  one 
wished  for  or  cherished,  a  separation  from 
an  object  one  was  attached  to  by  natural 
affinities  or  otherwise,  or  an  injury  to  or 
loss  of  objects  of  the  kind  mentioned 
above.  In  all  these  conditions,  a  forcible 
severance  or  shock  occurs  to  the  associa 
tion  ;  and  the  attention,  diverted  from  the 
groove  through  which  it  used  to  act, 
reacts  upon  the  mental  plane  and  pro 
duces  the  phenomenon  known  as  mental 
pain. 

With  reference  to  the  analysis,  we 
have  presented  above,  which  shows  that 
the  main  factor  in  the  phenomena  of  pain 
of  both  classes  is  the  forcible  ejectment  of 
attention,  the  definition  of  pain  in  its  most 


TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

comprehensive    form    would   be    as    fol 
lows  :— 

The  perception  by  a  sentient  entity 
of  the  forcible  ejectment  of  its  sensory 
currents  from  the  physical  or  mental 
planes  that  they  are  occupying  constitutes- 
the  phenomenon  of  pain. 

6 — DEFINITION    OF    PLEASURE 

As  pleasure  appears  to  be  a  condition 
opposite  to  that  of  pain,  it  would  follow 
that  instead  of  the  forcible  ejectment  of 
the  sensory  current,  which  takes  place  in 
pain,  there  should  be  a  concentration 
thereof.  We  proceed  to  test  the  ac 
curacy  of  this  conclusion  by  an  examina 
tion  of  the  following  concrete  cases. 

The  charming  effect  of  music,  which 
absorbs  all  attention,  and  which  may  in 
extreme  cases  produce  an  ecstatic  state 
devoid  of  all  other  thoughts,  is  at  once 
dispelled,  if  a  message  is  brought  in  of  the 
sudden  and  serious  illness  of  a  friend  or 
near  relative,  or  if  some  extraordinary 


\i:i.  G  ITS    OBJECT    AND    KND  H 

occurrence,  which  would  immediately 
divert  attention,  takes  place.  If  tin- 
message  cannot  be  attended  to  i  in  me 
diately,  the  same  music,  which  was  a 
source  of  such  exquisite  delight,  becomes  a 
source  of  oppression  and  pain.  Instances 
can  be  multiplied  which  would  show 
beyond  doubt  that  in  all  cases  of  pleasure, 
it  is  the  concentration  of  attention  which 
is  the  real  source  of  delight.  In  further- 
illustration  of  this  truth  the  following 
observation  may  be  made.  The  attention 
of  a  chilcLin  his  simplicity  and  inexperi 
ence^  is  not  subject  to  the  distractions  of 
grown-up  manhood « and  of  the  varied 
experiences  of  mundane  affairs.  Any 
thing  is5therefore,sufficient  to  rivet  atten 
tion,  and  it  is  this  riveting  or  concentra 
tion  of  attention  that  produces  the  simple 
and  innocent  delight  of  childhood.  The 
various  mental  games,  which  have  nothing 
attractive  in  themselves,  afford  great 
pleasure  by  the  exercise  they  give  to 
the  concentration  of  attention.  This  is 


TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

•another  illustration  in  support  of  the  truth 
we  have  been  advancing.  The  concen 
tration  of  attention,  besides  being  attended 
with  joy,  is  also  refulgent,  at  times, 
with  the  light  of  intuition,  and  many 
hidden  things  flash  forth  and  are  perceived 
in  such  a  state.  The  pleasures  which 
have  been  described  above  are  the  various 
aspects  of  concentration  of  attention, 
giving  rise  to  physical  and  mental  happi 
ness.  But  the  analyses  of  pain  and 
pleasure  have  not  yet  thrown  any  light  on 
the  inherent  nature  and  essence  of  that 
something  which  sends  forth  sensory 
currents.  We  have  dealt  with  this  sub- 
(\  }  ject  at  length  below.  Meanwhile,  it  will 
be  sufficient  to  mention  here  that  the 
-essence  of  the  spirit-force  is  joy,  energy, 
.and  intelligence,  that  sensory  currents 
.are  the  rays  of  that  force,  and  that  it  is 
by  the  association  of  the  spirit-current 
with  matter  and  mind  that  the  entire 
phenomena  of  pleasure  and  pain  of  this 
world  take  place. 


Airr.  7  ITS  OIJ.IKCT  AND   i:xi> 

The  definition  of  pleasure,  as  derived 
from  the  observations  made  above,  would 
l>e  as  follows  : 

The  perception  l>y  a  sentient  entity 
of  the  concentration  of  its  sensory  cur 
rents  in  a  mental  or  a  material  plane 
which  they  are  occupying  constitutes  the 

VpvW  £*!» 

pleasure  of  this  Avorld. 

7 — THE  STATE  OF    SI  I'KK.Mi:    IliJSS 

om    the  qoiKfu^misiof  pleasure  and 
pain  defined  above,  it  is  clear  that  a  state 
of   supreme  bliss,  free  from  pain  of  everv 
description,  is    possible  in    such    circum 
stances  only^as  are  entirely  void  of  mental 
and   physical  associations,  and  are  of  tin- 
essence  of  the  spirit-force.     For  the   pur 
pose  of    determining    whether  the    state 
of  supreme  bliss,  referred  to,  is   possible 
and  does   exist,   and  for  finding  out  tin- 
necessary  means  to  attain  such   a   state,. 
it   is    necessary     to    study     the     essence 
of    the    spirit-force     and    to    define    its, 
laws. 


11  TllUE    RELIGION'  PART  I 

8 — DEVELOPMENT  OF    SPIRIT-FORCE 

It  is  a  matter  of  observation  that  in 
whatever  direction  the  spirit  or  vital 
force,  which  imparts  vitality  to  all  animal 
and  vegetable  existence,  is  subjected  to 
frequent  and  regular  exercise,  develop 
ment  takes  place.  On  the  other  hand,  if 
its  action  decreases  or  stops  in  any  part 
of  the  vehicle  or  frame,  through  which 
the  spirit-force  is  acting,  that  part 
withers  or  becomes  inoperative.  This 
vital  action  is  natural  exercise  and  is  not 
an  unnatural  process  imposed  upon  spirit, 
It  is  an  inherent  function  which  the 
spirit  is  called  upon  to  perform  in  various 
directions  since  its  manifestation  in 
creation.  The  physical  frame  and  the 
senses  appended  to  it,  and  its  mental 
Faculties,  all  require  exercise  for  their 
development  and  healthy  existence.  The 
forms  of  this  exercise  are  not  the  special 
modes  prescribed  in  the  gymnasium  or  in 
a  training  educational  institution.  The 
responsive  functions  and  actions  evoked 


ART.  1)  ITS    OBJJ-XT    AM)    KM)  15 

)>y  the  surroundings  of  nature,  the 
inherent  cravings  and  the  needs  of  life, 
constitute  the  natural  exorcise  imposed 
ujxm  tlic  spirit  for  the  development  of 
its  physical  Irani e  and  mental  faculties. 
All  these  functions  and  actions,  however, 
result  in  the  association  of  spirit  with 
mind  and  matter.  The  development  of 
the  functions  and  the  faculties,  re  I  erred 
to,  does  not,  however,  indicate  in  any  way 
that  a  concomitant  development  of  the 
essence  of  the  spirit  itself  is  also  taking 
place.  In  other  words,  in  all  the  experi 
ences  we  ordinarily  gain  and  the  connected 
actions,  there  is  nothing  which  will  enable 
us  to  find  out  and  understand  what  the  self, 
vi/.,  the  sentient  entity^ is,  and  where  it  is 
located,  and  how  it  acts  through  the 
physical  and  mental  planes.  We  proceed 
now  to  make  an  enquiry  into  this  subject. 

9 — DIFFERENTIATION  OF    MIND  AND  SPIRIT 

It   may   he    mentioned    here    that    the 
instrument    of    thinking  is  the  mind,  and 


16  TIU'E    RELIGION 

that  this  is  as  much  dependent  upon  the 
spirit-current  for  its  action  as  the  senses 
are  for  the  performance  of  their  func 
tions,  as  like  the  senses,  the  mind  becomes- 
inoperative  when  the  spirit-currents  are 
withdrawn  from  the  mental  plane  in  deep 
slumber  or  coma,  The  spirit-entity  should, 
therefore,never  be  confounded  with  mind. 
That  entity  is  the  focus  of  vital  energy 
which  sends  forth  currents  to  the  mental 
and  physical  planes. 

10 — DISEMBODIED    SPIRITS 

Prom  the  various  extraordinary  cases- 
which  are  recorded  by  investigators  into 
spiritualism,  it  appears  that  after  the 
spirit  has  quitted  the  physical  frame,  it 
is  not  lost  or  dissipated,  but  that  it 
assumes  other  conditions  about  which  we 
shall  speak  presently.  The  importance 
of  these  conditions,  if  they  really  exist, 
is  supreme  in  a  scientific  study  of  the 
essence  and  laws  of  the  spirit-force.  AVe 
would  7  therefore  ?  suggest  that  the  extra- 


AKT.  10          ITS    OIUI-XT    AXD    END  17 

ordinary  occurrences,  referred  to  above, 
be  subjected  to  sucb  tests  as  would 
establish  tliem  once  for  all  or  disprove' 
their  accuracy.  These  extraordinary  con 
ditions,  if  established,  would  throw  consi 
derable  light  on  the  question  of  the 
essence  and  laws  of  the  spirit-force,  and 
would  contribute  in  no  small  measure  to 
an  advance  in  the  study  of  the  spirit  - 
force.  Assuming  for  the  present  the 
accuracy  of  the  reports  of  the  more 
accomplished  investigators  into  the  pheno 
mena  of  spiritualism,  our  enquiry  leads- 
to  the  following  results: — 

The  first  condition,  after  separation  of 
the  spirit  from  the  physical  frame,  is 
the  assumption  of  a  subtle  form  known 
as  the  astral  body.  The  prejudices  and 
predilections  of  the  spirit  in  this  body  are 
more  or  less  akin  to  those  possessed  by  it 
during  life.  In  shape  and  colour  also  the 
astral  form  resembles  the  original  physi 
cal  form.  From  what  we  have  mentioned 
above,  it  would  follow  that  the  condition 

B 


18  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

of     disembodiedness,     referred    to,     does 
not    liberate     spirit    from     that    mental 
association   which  constitutes  a  source   of 
pain.     The  causes   which   brought  about 
the  mental  associations,  and  the'  eventual 
assumption  of  the  physical  frame,  are  not 
therefore  eliminated  by  the    spirit  becom 
ing  merely  disembodied.     We   shall  have 
later     on   occasion    to   show    that   these 
mundane   prejudices,     predilections,    and 
desires  are  the  causes  of   the  descent  of 
spirit  into  the  physical  world. and  of   the 
assumption     of     the      physical      frame. 
Unless  these  causes  are  eradicated^and,  in 
lieu  of  them,   communion   is   established 
with  higher  spiritual  sources,  the   associa 
tions  with  mind  and  matter  will  continue, 
and   the   spirit   will   remain    subject    to 
mundane  pains  and   pleasures.     The   pro 
positions  so  far  established  are,   therefore, 
that   in     cases    of    disembodied     spirits, 
referred   to,    (1)    they   remain  subject  to 
pleasure   and   pain    similar   to  ours,   and 
(2)  they  are  not  dissipated  after  death. 


ART.  11          ITS    OBJKCT    AM)    KM)  19 

11  — SIM  KIT-FORCE  DISTINGUISHED  FROM 
THE  SO-CALLED  FORCES  OF  XATl'KK 

It  is  hardly  necessary  to  observe  that 
the  spirit-force  is  not  the  result  of  a 
combination  of  the  forces  of  nature. 
From  a  theoretical  point  of  view  such  a 
conclusion  appears  to  be  inconsistent  with 
the  existing  condition  of  the  forces  of 
nature,  as  there  is  not  a  single  force  in 
this  universe  which  manifests  itself  in  its 
various  recognised  forms  without  a  sub 
stratum  of  the  same  force  in  the  creation, 
and  the  same  remarks  should  apply  to  the 
spirit-force.  The  following  illustration 
will  establish  the  proposition  we  have 
enunciated  above.  A  candle  is  ignited  and 
bursts  forth  into  a  flame.  If  one  were  to 
look  at  combustion  alon^  which  produces 
the  flame,  the  inference  would  be  that 
combustion,  independent  of  every  thing  ? 
is  the  cause  of  the  flame.  But  such  is 
•not  the  case.  It  is  the  specific  heat  of 
tlie  constituents  of  combustion  that  is 


20  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

manifesting  itself  in  an  accentuated  form. 
This  specific  heat  is  the  substratum  with 
out  which  no  manifestation  of  heat  is 
possible,  and  the  same  remarks  apply  to 
all  the  forces  of  nature.  Applying  the- 
analogy  to  the  spirit-force,  the  inference 
is,  that  there  is  a  substratum  and  reservoir 
or  source  of  the  spirit-force  in  the  crea 
tion.  Argumentation  by  analogy  is  not, 
however,  always  conclusive,  and  concrete 
facts  should  therefore  be  always  sought 
in  a  scientific  research.  "\Ve  have  already 
emphasised  in  Article  10,  the  necessity  for 
a  scientific  recognition  or  repudiation  of" 
the  many  extraordinary  facts  reported- 
about  spirits  by  investigators  into  the- 
phenomena  of  spiritualism,  one  of  which 
is  that  there  are  disembodied  spirits.  If 
this  fact  be  recognised  by  science,  it  will 
constitute  a  proof  of  the  most  positive 
character  that  the  spirit-force  is  not 
dependent  upon  the  physical  environment 
for  its  existence.  Furthermore,  if  it  he- 
recognised  that  disembodied  spirits  can 


Airr.   11          ITS    OIUECT    AND    EXJ)  21 

have  access  to  placesywhere  access  would 
fiot  be  possible  by  ordinary  actions  in  the 
three  dimensions,  the  fact  of  disembodied 

spirits  brinu  endowed  with  subtle  func 
tions,  Avhicli  are  more  or  less  akin  to  those 
of  ether,  is  also  established.  Instances 
are  not  wanting,  which  show  that  disem 
bodied  spirits  enjoy  an  immunity  from 
beat  and  coldyvhich  is  not  to  be  found  in 
the  physical  frame.  This  would  corrobo 
rate  the  statement  that  the  spirits  pos- 
.sess  ethereal  or  astral  bodies,  for  heat  has 
very  little  effect,  if  any,  on  the  ethereal 
frame,  as  the  temperature  of  ether  is  said 
to  be  not  subject  to  any  appreciable 
variations  by  the  passage  of  heat-rays. 
In  these  circumstances,  the  existing  germ 
theory,  which  assumes  it  as  an  axiom 
that  beyond  a  certain  degree  of  heat- 
teniperature  the  existence  of  germs  is 
impossible,  Avill  require  modification.  We 
shall  have  to  limit  the  theory  to  physical 
germs,  but  it  cannot  universally  be 
•extended  to  ethereal  and  other  subtler 


22  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

germs  of  life.  A  further  inference  may  not 
be  improperly  drawn  that  the  coarser  forms 
of  physical  life  found  on  this  earth  have 
been,  derived  from  the  subtler  planes, 
which  are  not  within  the  scope  of  the 
physical  senses,  and  which  are  as  full  of 
vital  activity  and  manifestations  as  our 
own  planet.  This  view,  if  accepted,, 
upsets  the  present  germ  theory,  and  physi 
cal  germs  should  no  longer  be  held  to  be 
the  initial  seeds  giving  rise  to  higher 
conditions  of  life.  On  the  contrary,  they 
would  have  to  be  treated  as  extremely 
feeble  and  diffused  emanations  from 
higher  sources  and  planes  of  spirituality. 
Such  a  theory  would  also  correspond  with 
the  facts  found  about  the  other  forces  of 
nature  in  this  world,  as  heat,  light,  etc., 
are  emanations  from  higher  sources. 

It  is  a  matter  of  further  observation, 
drawn  from  many  authenticated  cases, 
that  the  spiritual  functions,  including  the 
intellectual  faculties,  are  immensely 
enhanced  during  conditions  of  trance 
when  the  physical  functions  are  not 


ART.  11          ITS    015.1  K(T    AND    EN'l)  23 

working.  In  such  conditions,  coming 
events,  and  occurrences  taking  place  at  ^ 
great  distances,  are  correctly  stated.  The 
inference,  which  we  may  naturally  draw 
from  the  above  observation,  is  that  a 
Farther  liberation  of  the  spirit  from  the 
subtler  frames  may  result  in  the  mani 
festation  of  higher  functions  still,  and  j) 

eventually    in   the   manifestation  of  the 

fc> 

essence  of  the  spirit    itself.     In   such   a    • 
condition,  the  spirit-entity  wouTd^becohie' 
a  focus    and  source  of  pure  intelligence, 
energy,  and  bliss. 

If  we  look  at  the  various  forces  of 
nature,  leaving  out  for  the  present  the 
spirit-force,  we  find  that  they  are  depen 
dent  for  their  existence  upon  the  media 
through  which  they  manifest  themselves. 
On  the  elimination  of  the  medium,  peculiar 
to  each,  the  energy  of  course  remains,  but 
the  previous  form  in  which  it  was  present 
disappears.  Take  for  instance  the  case  of 
chemical  action.  It  is  due,  as  is  well 
knoAvn,  to  the  exchange  of  molecules, 


1  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

atoms,    or  ions.     If    there  be    a    region 

o 

beyond  the  atomic  and  the  ionic  spheres 
of  creation,  chemical  action  in  the  form 
in  which  it  is  found  here  will  not  be 
possible.  Again,  take  the  case  of  elec 
tricity.  If  electric  force  acts  through  a 
medium,  this  implies  that  there  is  a  plane 
from  which  the  force  acts,  and  that  there 
is  another  plane  upon  which  it  acts. 
These  two  planes  cannot  be  treated  as  one 
and  the  same,  inasmuch  as  the  electric 
force  would  then  be  always  acting  in  the 
plane  it  resides  in,  and  there  should  not 
be  a  latent  condition  of  it.  If  the  pro 
position  we  have  enunciated  above  be 
correct,  the  two  planes  in  question  would 
be  distinct  from  each  other,  and  would  be 
similar  to  two  different  planes  of  the 
-dimensions  Ave  are  familiar  with.  Like 
any  two  of  the  ordinary  dimensions,  they 
would,  for  example,  be  separate  and  yet 
allied  with  each  other.  The  lower  plane 
would  be  in  a  state  either  of  kinetic 
action,  or  of  quiescence,  in  accordance 


ART.  11       JTS  on.JiX'T  AND   KM>  *2~> 

with  the  presence  in,  or  absence  from,  it 
•of  the  force  from  the  higher  plane.  If 
tliis  lower  plane  he,  in  the  case  of  electri 
city,  that  subtle  substance  known  as  ether, 
•the  inference  is  irresistible  that  it  does  not 
pervade  all  space,  but  that  it  is  confined  to 
a  sphere  of  its  own.  It  appears  to  be 
necessary  to  observe  here  that  we  should 
not  fix  the  limits  of  the  space  of  creation 
to  the  three  dimensions  we  are  familiar 
with.  There  are  other  dimensions  besides 
these  three,  and  AVC  should,  we  think, 
modify  our  conception  of  the  universe  as  it 
presents  itself  to  us  accordingly.  Spheres 
of  far  greater  expanse  and  subtlety  than 
those  within  our  observation,  which  per 
meate  and  envelop  everything  presented  to 
our  vision,  exist  unperceived  and  unknown. 
There  are  numerous  cases  which  show 
that  action  has  taken  place  through 
them,  as  it  was  not  through  the  three 
known  dimensions.  We  shall  speak  more 
•ubout  this  in  the  Part  dealing  with  the 
•evolution  of  Creation  (Rachcuid). 


26  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

If  we  analyse  the  other  forces  of 
nature^it  will  not  be  difficult  to  show  that 
their  existing  forms  vary  with  the  change 
of  media.  As  a  further  illustration,  we 
will  take  up  the  case  of  heat.  It  is  a 
more  or  less  recognised  fact  that  the 
passage  of  heat  through  the  ethereal 
medium  hardly  affects  the  temperature 
of  the  latter.  The  inference  from  this 
fact  may  not  be  unfairly  drawn  that  the 
constituents  of  the  heat-condition  are 
different  from  those  of  ether,  and  that 
they  have  very  little,  if  any,  affinity  with 
each  other,  so  far  as  the  heat-condition  is- 
concerned.  This  clearly  proves  that  heat 
is  not  an  ethereal  phenomenon,  and  that 
the  ethereal  ion  does  not  take  part  in  it. 
But  other  forms  of  matter  known  to  us 
are  affected  by  heat.  Our  theory  is, 
that  heat  represents  the  disintegrated 
particles  of  matter  midway  between  ions 
and  ordinary  elemental  matter.  What 
ever  disintegrates  atoms  produces  the 
phenomenon  known  as  heat,  although 


ART.  12         ITS    OBJECT   AND    END  27 

the  disintegrating  cause  may    not  be  heat 
itself.     Energy    in    all    its    aspects    can 
produce     such     disintegration,    and     its- 
passage  through  atomic   regions  is  there 
fore  accompanied  by  a    manifestation  of 
heat.       Electricity,     which       is     highly 
charged  with  energy,  is  void  of  heat,  but 
it  produces  heat  when   it    manifests  itself 
on  the  atomic  plane.     Xow^  eliminate  the 
disintegrated    condition  of  matter y which 
we  have  spoken  of,  and    the  phenomenon 
of  heat  is  gone.     The  line  of   argumenta 
tion  indicated  above    establishes,   we  ven 
ture  to   think,    the  proposition— that    thr 
various    forces    of    nature   are    entirely 
dependent  for  their  existing  forms  on  the- 
media  they  act  through. 

12 — THE    FIVE    ELEMENTS    OF    THE 
ANCIENTS 

This  disintegrated  condition  of  atom 
was  the  fire  element  of  the  ancients.  The- 
other  four  elements  also  were  not  the 
crude  and  rudimentary  forms  of  matter, 


•28 


TRUE    HELIGION  PART  I 


-as  they  are  commonly  understood  to  be, 
•but  were  the  four  other  conditions  of 
matter,  viz.,  solid,  liquid,  gaseous,  and 
ethereal.  Thus  the  five  elements  of  the 
ancients  represent  the  five  conditions  of 
I  .matter  in  a  highly  scientific  series. 


13  -  SPIRIT,    THE    PRIME    FORCE 

We  now  commence  an  examination  of 
the  spirit-force.  Applying  the  process  of 
•elimination  of  media,  which  has  already 
been  applied  to  the  forces  of  nature,  to 
the  spirit-force,  let  us  ascertain  as  to  what 
happens  to  the  latter  force.  For  this 
purpose,  an  examination  of  the  conditions, 
which  take  place  at  the  time  of  death  and 
that  of  trance  or  coma,  etc.,  appears  to 
be  suitable,  as  in  the  case  of  death  there 
is  a  complete  elimination  of  the  physical 
body,  and  in  the  other  cases,  the  physical 
form  is  inoperative. 

The    ordinary     characteristics     of    the 
•spirit,  as  observable  by  us,  are— 
(1)   intelligence, 


ART.  L°>         ITS    on.JKTT    AM)     KM) 

(2)  J'rrlmgs     of     pain    and     pleasure*, 
which   are     parts    of  the    sensory 
action  by  which   perception  take- 
place  ?and    which   gives    rise    to 
volition     and     motor     action     in 
many    instances, 

(3)  thoughts     and     other     subjective 
phenomena,  and 

( !•)  vital  energy,  which  causes  that 
process  of  assimilation  ^  which 
results  in  the  construction  of  the 
physical  frame. 

Now,  all  these  characteristics  are  pos 
sessed  by  disembodied  spirits  .when  they 
manifest  themselves  as  guardian  spi 
rits,  ghosts,  hobgoblins,  etc.  The  same 
remarks  apply  to  the  case  of  trance. 
Over  and  above  these  characteristics,  the 
elimination  or  the  cessation  of  the  func 
tions  of  the  physical  medium  results  in 
spirits  being  endowed  with  higher  powers 
of  senses,  foresight,  access  to  a  plaiu^ 
which  is  different  from  the  planes  of  the 
three  dimensions,  etc.  This  leads  to  the 


;30  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

irresistible  conclusion  that,  contrary  to 
the  case  of  natural  forces,  the  entire 
functions  of  the  spirit-force  remain 
unaltered  by  the  elimination  of  media. 
Prom  what  we  have  stated  above,  it  should 
not  be  inferred  that  all  spirits  on  their 
death  are  relegated  to  the  species  of 
disembodied  spirits.  AVe  shall  later  on 
dwell  at  length  upon  the  conditions  which 
take  place  at  the  time  of  death  (vide 
Part  III,  Art.  11  J±),  and  explain  the  laws 
which  determine  the  future  states  of 
-  spirit-entities  of  the  innumerable  classes 
found  in  creation.  The  object  of  our 
argument  is  merely  to  show  that  the 
elimination  of  the  lower  media  of  spirit 
does  not  produce  a  change  in  the  inherent 
functions  of  the  spirit-force.  On  the 
contrary,  such  an  elimination  adds  to  their 
potentiality.  We  have  already  stated  in 
Article  9,  that  mind  is  an  instrument 
through  which  the  spirit  performs  its 
subjective  functions.  It  is,  accordingly, 
also  one  of  its  media  of  action.  Later  on 


ART.  13  ITS    OBJKCT    AND    KM)  31 

• 

we  sliall  show  (vide  Article  21),  how  the 
spirit-force  can  perform  its  inherent 
functions  without  the  aid  of  mind. 
Meanwhile,  it  will  serve  our  purpose  to 
push  our  argument  a  step  further,  and  to 
state  that  at  each  step  of  elimination  of 
the  media,  that  surround  the  spirit,  its 
inherent  functions  manifest  themselves 
in  a  highly  increasing  progression,  and 
that  eventually  the  spirit-force  comes  out 
unalloyed  as  the  source  of  prime  energy, 
intelligence,  and  hliss. 

If  this  reasoning  is  correct,  the  infer 
ence  is  that  all  the  forces  of  nature  are 
dependent  upon  the  spirit-force  for  their 
existence.  The  accuracy  of  our  argument 
is  corroborated  by  an  observation  of  the 
process  of  germination  and  development 
of  animal  and  vegetable  seeds.  So  long 
as  the  spirit-force  is  present,  the  various 
forces  and  the  elements  of  nature  act  in 
harmony^and  are  helpful  to  the  groAvth 
and  sustenance  of  the  body,  but  the 
moment  the  spirit  makes  its  exit,  a 


32  T1U  K    RELIGION  PART  I 

contrary  state  supervenes,  and  the  same 
forces  and  elements  act  for  disintegration 
and  eventually  go  back  into  their  old 
condition.  If  this  be  true  in  the  case  of 
a  spirit-entity,  d  fortiori,  it  holds  good  in 
the  case  of  the  Universal  Source  of  Spirit 
Who  is  the  True  Supreme  Creator.  The- 
entire  creation  has  been  brought  into  the 
condition  of  cosmos  by  the  impact  and 
action  of  His  spiritual  currents,  and  the 
immutable  and  all-wise  laws  have  been 
fixed  for  the  sustenance  and  economy  of 
the  creation  by  the  same  cause. 

14 — THE    SUPREME    SOURCE    OF    SPIRIT 

We  have  explained  in  the  preceding 
portion  of  this  treatise  that  the  spirit- 
entity  is  endowed  with  bliss,  intelligence^, 
and  energy.  We  propose  now  to  depict 
a  hypothetical  case  of  an  extreme  condi 
tion  of  bliss,  etc.,  of  a  spirit- entity.  This> 
will  enable  us  to  form  some  idea,  though 
it  may  be  very  insignificant  and  rough,  of 
the  condition  of  the  Prime  and  Supreme* 


ART.  11  ITS    OBJECT    AND    END  33 

Source  of  Spirit,  the  True  and  August 
Supreme  Creator.  It  is  possible  to  con- 
crive  of  conditions  of  enrapturing  ima 
gery,  of  penetrating  and  refulgent  intel 
ligence,  of  intensely  charming  music,  of 
glorious  beauty,  and  of  the  exquisite  joys 
of  other  senses,  which  may  produce 
extreme  states  of  ecstasy  in  individual 
cases.  Now,  if  the  human  entity,  which 
is  a  most  insignificant  ray  of  spirit  and 
almost  a  non-entity,  possesses  the  poten 
tiality  of  the  various  kinds  of  enrapture- 
ment  we  have  depicted  above,  what  must 
be  the  inconceivable  state  of  bliss, 
intelligence,  and  energy  of  the  Supreme 
Spiritual  Source.  It  is  His  region  which 
is  entirely  one  of  energy,  joy,  and  bliss, 
all  mutation  and  dissolution, 
and  h  immortal.  The  relation  of  the 
Supreme  Source  of  Spirit  and  His  region, 
with  the  other  regions  of  creation  and 
their  denizens,  is  discussed  later  on. 
Meanwhile,  it  would  bo  sufficient  to  men 
tion  that  His  spiritual  rays  arc  present 
c 


oreeg 

and 


TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

everywhere,  but  that  His  region  is  dis 
tinct  and  away  from  the  region  of  matter 
and  mind.  This  demarcation  does  not 
introduce  an  element  of  the  finite  in  the 
Supreme  Creator,  just  as  the  presence  of 
a  cloud  in  the  sky  does  not  produce  a 
limitation  in  the  latter.  (This  is  dis 
cussed  at  length  in  Part  III,  Art.  79). 

15 — THE  OBJECT  OF  RELIGION  IN  VIEW 

We  find  now,  where  and  when  it  is 
possible  to  attain  the  object  of  religion 
stated  in  the  opening  pages  of  this  volume. 
When  the  spirit  gains  admission  into  the 
purely  spiritual  regions  of  the  Supreme 
Creator,  then  it  becomes  immortal,  freed 
from  pain  and  opposition  of  every  descrip 
tion,  and  remains  absorbed  in  everlasting 
rapture,  in  the  Supreme  Bliss  of  the 
majestic  vision  of  the  Supreme  Creator. 

16 — SPIRIT  AND  ITS  SOURCE 

We  have  now  reached  the  stage  where 
it  becomes  necessary  to  determine  the 


AKT.   10  ITS    OBJECT    AM)    KNU  o.") 

region  of  the  Supreme  Creator,  and  also 
(he  present  location  of  the  traveller,  (lie 
spirit  -entity,  (o  that  region,  as  unless 
these  (\vo  matters  are  settled,  there  can 
be  no  deliniteness  and  practicability  in 
the  means  undertaken  for  the  perform 
ance  of  the  journey.  As  we  have  stated 
that  the  spirit -force  is  the  source  of  prime 
energy,  and  .that  the  forces  of  nature  are 
dependent  for  their  existence  upon  it,  it 
would  not  be  incorrect  to  infer  that  many 
common  features  of  similarity  would  be 
found  in  the  spirit-force  and  in  the 
natural  forces.  We  shall  not ^ therefore^ 
be  unjustified  further  to  infer  that  the 
spirit-force,  like  the  forces  of  nature, 
partakes  of  the  influences  of  its  original 
-source,  and  that  whenever  it  converges 
and  forms  its  focus,  the  conditions 
brought  about  are,  to  some  extent,  similar 
to  those  present  in  the  original  source, 
the  similarity  being  complete  when  the 
converging  lens  or  mirror  does  not 

O        o 

introduce  an  element  of   obstruction.     In 


36  TRI7E    RELIGION  PART  I 

the  physical  universe,  such  a  complete 
likeness  is  very  rarely  met  with,  A  very 
near  approach,  however,  is  to  he  found 
in  the  human  form  which  is  the  most 
developed  condition  of  sentient  entity  on 
this  earth.  In  short,  the  study  of  the 
human  cosmos  would  he  the  most  practi 
cal  and  convenient  method  for  a  compre 
hension  of  the  universal  cosnios,  and  for 
determining  roughly  the  various  parts 
into  which  the  creation  has  heen  divided, 
and  for  finding  out  the  region  of  Supreme 
Bliss.  The  study  of  the  vast  expanse  of 
objective  creation,  even  with  the  aid  of 
the  hest  appliances,  would  he  futile,  as 
the  scope  of  the  physical  senses  does  not 
extend  even  to  many  of  the  lower  suhtle 
planes  that  exist  in  creation.  A  proper 
examination  of  the  spiritual  emanations 
is,  therefore,  the  only  practical  course  of 
research  for  the  ohject  we  have  in  view. 

17 — THREE  MAIN  FACTORS  OF  HUMAN 
EXISTENCE 

An  analysis  of  the  human  hody  and  its 


AKT.  17        ITS    OBJECT   AND    END  37 

subjective  functions  discloses  three  main 
factors  in  the  economy  of  human  exis 
tence  :— 

I.  The  human  frame  and  the  ap 
pended  senses,  composed  of  solid, 
liquid,  gaseous,  calorific,  and  ethe 
real  conditions  of  matter  together 
with  the  non-intelligent  forces  of 
nature,  generated  l)y  the  action  of 
energy  through  the  medium  pecu 
liar  to  each. 

II.  The  mind  associated  with  antahka- 
rcui  (internal  constitution)  consist 
ing  of  four  functions,  viz.,  (a)  res 
ponses  at  the  mental  plane  which 
give  rise  to  thought  :  (1))  the 
spiritual  or  the  attention-currents, 
by  means  of  which  thoughts  are 
projected  to  their  objectives  and 
are  associated  with  them  :  (c)  in 
telligence,  which  is  the  source  of 
comprehension  and  which  is  the 
lustre  shed  by  the  convergence  of 
the  spiritual  current :  and  (d)  the 


38  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

ego,  which  differentiates  its  com 
prehension  from  that  of  others. 
III.  The  spirit-force,  which  gives  vita 
lity  to  the  other  two  main  factors^ 
and  without  the  help  of  which  the 
other   two    factors    would  remain 
dormant  and  inoperative. 

18 — SIX  SUBDIVISIONS  OF  HUMAN  FRAME 

Besides  the  three  main  factors  referred 
to  in  the  preceding  Article,  which  repre 
sent  three  grand  divisions,  as  it  were,  of" 
the  microcosm,   six  subdivisions  are  fur 
ther  observable  in  the  physical  frame  :— 

(1)  The    ganglion  at   the    rectum — it 
performs  the  function  of  ejecting 
effete  matter. 

(2)  The  ganglion  at  the  organ  of   re 
production — its    main  function  is 
that    of  reproduction,    that  is    to 
say,    the    formation   of    the    seed 
which  will  eventually  develop  into 
the  physical  frame. 

(3)  The  nervous  centre  at  the  navel— 


ART.  18         ITS   OBJECT   AND   END  39 

it  regulates  digestion  and  fur 
nishes  physical  material  for  the 
whole  frame. 

(4)  The   ganglion  known  as  the  solar 
plexus^  which    is  situated  at   the 
lower  end  of  the  sternum — it  regu 
lates  the  economy   of  the  entire 
human  frame^and  is  the  region  of 
feeling.      Cases  are   not  unknown 
where  the  collapse  of  the  action  of 
the  heart  and  the  cessation  of  the 
pulse    did   not   affect    the    func 
tions  of  this  centre.     The  feelings 
and  the    sensory    and   the   motor 
actions  continued  in  such  cases  for 
some  time,  although  the  action  of 
the  heart  had  stopped.     A  shock 
to  this  centre  resulting  in  a  cessa 
tion  of  its  functions  would,  how 
ever,  lead  to  a  complete  collapse 
of    the     physical   frame    and    of 
its  subjective  functions. 

(5)  The    ganglion    at   the   throat — it 
regulates  subtle  respiration. 


*     I 

^ 


40  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

(6)  The  ganglion  situated  midway 
between  the  two  eyes,  three 
quarters  to  one  inch  from  the  root 
of  the  nose  inwards  —  it  is  the 
seat  of  the  spirit. 

The  functions  of  the  four  lower  ganglia 
are  more  or  less  manifest;  those  of  the 
other  two  can  only  be  verified  and  rea 
lized  by  the  performance  of  th^spiritual 
experimentations  and  methods  prescribed 
later  on.  In  the  course  of  performance 
of  these  processes,  the  various  stages  of 
spiritual  withdrawal  preceding  and  attend 
ing  the  phenomenon  of  death  are  gra 
dually  undergone  in  a  fully  conscious 
condition,  and  the  experiences  gained 
during  such  training  furnish  ample  practi 
cal  tests  of  the  accuracy  of  our  statement. 
If,  hereafter,  some  scientific  methods  be 
discovered,  by  means  of  which  the  lifeless 
and  the  living  portions  of  the  body  of  a 
dying  person  could  be  distinguished,  the 
application  of  such  a  test  to  the  state 
ment  made  above,  would  corroborate  our 


ART.  19  ITS    OBJECT    AND    KM)  41 

• 

statement  9  and  would  perhaps,  be  more 
satisfactory  from  a  scientific  point  of 
view. 

19 — THE  SENSORY  AND  THE  MOTOR 
CURRENTS 

There  are  two  main  currents  for  the 
working  of  the  physical  frame,  the  senses, 
and  the  sy|  ganglia  referred  to. 

I.  The  current  which  conveys  the 
impressions  within,  and  which  im 
parts  vitality  for  necessary  assimi 
lation  and  growth.  This  is  the 
current  of  the  spirit.  Its  tendency 
is  in  ward  and  attractive.  It  mani 
fests  itself  into  two  main  forms, 
(a)  sensory  and  (h)  structural. 
The  first  form  is  found  in  ani 
mate  creation,  endowed  Avith  sub 
jective  functions.  These  functions 
work  by  means  of  nerves  and  other 
subtler  vehicles.  This  is  the  higher 
form  of  the  spirit-current  and  we 
shall  discuss  the  conditions  of  this 


TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

form  at  length  in  the  Part  dealing 
with  the  evolution  of  creation 
(rachand).  The  second  form, 
though  of  a  lower  order,  is  in 
dispensable  for  the  purposes  of 
creation.  The  co-relation  of  these 
two  forms  will  be  found  fully 
explained  in  the  Part  referred  to, 
In  animate  existence,  the  second 
form  is  subordinate  to,  and  depend 
ent  upon,  the  first  form  for  the 
performance  of  its  functions,  as  a 
complete  disappearance  of  the- 
sensory  form  from  the  physical 
and  subtler  planes  would  result  in 
a  cessation  of  the  structural  func 
tion,  and  thus  eventually  lead  to 
a  collapse  of  the  structural  frame. 
II.  The  other  current  is  the  current 
of  reaction,  giving  rise  to  volitional, 
motor,  ejective,  and  destructive 
actions.  It  regulates  the  outward 
economy  both  objective  and 
subjective  of  the  human  frame  ;. 


AIIT.  10  ITS    OBJECT    AM)    KM)  \:> 

and  the  mind  is  the  centre  from 
which  this  current  springs  up.  In 
vegetable  existence,  the  volitional 
function  is  entirely  absent,  and  the 
motor,  too,  is  mainly  found  only  in 
the  form  of  growth ;  the  last  two 
functions,  however,  are  as  strong, 
if  not  stronger,  as  in  animal 
existence.  The  mind-centre,  which 
in  its  kinetic  form  is  associated 
with  subjective  function,  is  latent 
in  vegetable  life — so,  too,  the 
spirit -cent  re,  so  far  as  subjective 
actions  are  concerned.  Like  the 
structural  form  of  the  spirit- 
current,  the  mind  or  the  outward 
current  is  also  dependent  for  its. 
action  upon  the  spirit-force,  as  all 
work  performed  by  the  outward 
current  comes  to  a  standstill^when 
the  spirit-current  is  wholly  with 
drawn. 

It  is  clear,  from  what  we  have  stated 
above,   that    the    mind    and     the    spirit- 


TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

currents  have,  by  their  joint  action, 
produced  the  physical  frame  and  the  six 
ganglia,  the  spirit  furnishing  the  energy, 
vitality,  and  subjective  functions  through 
the  mental  plane. 

20 — THE  REGION  OF  UNIVERSAL  MIND 
AND  ITS  SIX  SUBDIVISIONS 

How  the  feelings  and  predilections  and 
prejudices  of  the  mind  affect  the  corporeal 
frame  may  be  explained  by  the  following 
illustration.  A  person  is  short-tempered 
and  flies  into  rage^iii  and  out  of  season,  at 
trifles.  The  muscles  of  his  face,  by  being 
constantly  worked  into  a  particular  groove 
during  fits  of  anger,  permanently  retain 
that  formf  so  much  so  that  they  are 
carried  to  his  progeny.  This  illustration, 
when  reduced  to  a  proposition,  implies 
that  the  prevalent  impulse  of  mind  is 
reflected  upon  the  physical  frame,  and  that 
it  is  further  carried  forward  in  the  process 
of  procreation.  If  this  proposition  holds 
good  in  the  case  of  temporary  conditions 


ART.  20        ITS    OBJECT    AND    END  45 

all'ecting  the  individual,  mental,  and  spiri 
tual  planes,  a  fortiori,  it  applies  to  the 
universal  creational  planes  and  centres  of 
mind  and  spirit.  From  the  line  of  argu 
ment  \vr  have  adopted  above,  it  would 
follow  that  beyond  the  regions  of  creation 
corresponding  to  the  regions  of  the  six 
ganglia  in  the  human  microcosm,  there 
must  be  a  vast  region  of  Universal  Mind 
associated  Avith  spirit,  and  that  it  com 
prises  six  subdivisions  similar  to  those 
found  in  its  emanations  in  the  corporeal 
frame. 

The  region,  referred  to,  is  technically 
known  as  '  Brahmand,'  which  in  its  literal 
sense  means  the  egg-shaped  sphere  of 
3^ rail m  (Universal  ]\Iind).  The  region 
of  Brahmand  also  includes  the  region 
known  as  Para-Srahm  Pad  (region 
beyond  that  of  Brahm).  Without  the 
inclusion  of  this  latter  region  in  Brahmand 
the  series  of  the  six  subdivisions  of 
Brahmand  would  be  incomplete,  and  the 
correspondence  of  the  six  subdivisions 


16  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

in  the  individual  frame  with  those  in 
Brahmand,  of  which  the  former  are  reflex 
images,  would  no  longer  be  possible. 

We  have  stated  in  Article  18  that  the 
spirit-centre  is  situated  in  the  sixth  gang 
lion  and  that  the  fifth  and  fourth  ganglia 
are  the  seats  of  subtle  respiration  and  mind 
respectively.  The  nerve-centres  obser 
vable  by  us  in  them  and  other  ganglia  are 
made  up  of  physical  constituents,  while 
the  respective  force-centres  which  are 
associated  with  them  are  subtle.  These 
force-centres  hold  communion  with  their 
respective  subtle  planes  in  creation.  It  is 
also  observable  that  the  spirit  or  vital 
-energy  has  been  supplied  to  these  nerve- 
centres  through  the  mental  plane,  as  a 
complete  stoppage  of  the  functions  of  the 
fourth  or  mind  ganglion  will  result  in  a 
collapse  of  the  physical  frame.  The  six 
ganglia  are  accordingly  worked  by  the 
spirit-centre  in  conjunction  with  mind. 
The  same  remarks  apply  to  the  six  sub 
divisions  of  Brahmaiid.  In  accordance 


\KT.   20  US    oll.lKCT    AND    KND  1-7 

with  tin's  \  iew,  there1  must  be  a  vast  spirit- 
centre  associated  with  mind  in  the  region 
of  Brahmand.  Beyond  its  existence, 
nothing  positive  is,  however,  known  about 
this  ft Mit re  to  the  Yedic  religion  or  rather 
to  the  Vedanta  philosophy.  Allusion  has 
accordingly  been  made  about  it  by  a 
negation  only.  This  is  known  to  the  Vedas 
as  the  neti  (not  this),  and  is  the  same 
as  the  Para-Brahm  region.  It  is,  however, 
as  separate  from  Brahm  as  our  spirit- 
centre  is  separate  from  mind.  But  they 
are  both  associated  with  each  other  like 
individual  spirit  and  mind.  The  apparent 
•contradiction  involved  in  the  above  state 
ment  may  be  removed  to  some  extent  by 
applying  to  it  the  analogy  of  the  concomi 
tant  association  and  separation  of  the 
various  dimensions.  The  third  dimension, 
for  example,  is  associated  with  the  second 
dimension,  and  is  yet  away  from  the  latter. 
The  association  takes  place  at  the  j  tincture 
•of  the  two  dimensions  ;  but  the  association 
alone  is  not  sufficient  tor  a  comprehension 


48  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

of  the  higher  dimension.  This  is  the 
reason,  why  the  manifestation  of  actions 
from  a  higher  dimension  upon  those 
known  to  us  is  not  sufficient  for  a  study 
of  the  higher  dimension,  although  such 
manifestations  prove  the  existence  thereof 
A  similar  cause  led  to  the  non-comprehen 
sion  by  the  Vedic  religion  of  the  spirit- 
centre  we  have  referred  to,  as  from  what 
we  gather  of  the  esoteric  teachings  of  that 
religion,  its  knowledge  does  not  extend 
beyond  the  sphere  of  Brahm  (Universal 
Mind).  We  have  discussed  at  great 
length  the  conditions  and  details  of  the 
spirit-centre  in  question  in  the  Part 
devoted  to  creation.  Our  object  in  refer 
ring  here  to  the  Vedic  and  Vedantic  allu 
sion  to  the  centre  in  question  is  to  remove 
the  misconception,  which  would  otherwise 
arise  in  comprehending  the  term  '  Brah- 
mand,'  as  used  by  us.  We  use  it  in  a  more 
comprehensive  sense  than  that  accorded 
to  it  by  the  Vedic  religion,  and  the  term 
includes  Para-Brahm  Pad.  The  Yedic 


ART.  20         ITS    OBJECT    AND    END  11) 

expression  docs  not  include  this  region. 
The  three  higher  spheres  of  Brahmand 
in  accordance4  with  our  religion,  which 

corresponds    to    the    esoteric    religion  of 

/  / 

Saints,  such  as  Kabir  Saheh,  Jagjivari 
Sahcb,  etc.,  are  'Sunna*  (spirit-sphere), 
'Trikuti'  (the  place  of  three  promi 
nences),  and  the  '  Sahasdal  Kamal '  (the 
thousand-pedalled  lotus).  The  presiding 
power  of  the  first  sphere  is  '  Akshar  '  (the 
Imperishable).  He  is  associated  here 
with  the  highest  form  of  the  Universal 
Mind  (Brahm),  technically  known  as 
'  Punish'  (Deity).  The  Punish  (Brahm) 
after  receiving  the  necessary  spiritual 
energy  from  '  Akshar '  here  acted  upon 
Prakriti  (Nature)  and  produced  the  sphere 
of  Brahmand.  As  we  have,  at  great  length, 
descrihed  these  spheres  and  the  functions 
of  these  deities,  etc.,  in  the  Part  dealing 
with  creation,  we  shall  merely  mention 
the  names  of  the  presiding  deities  of 
the  remaining  two  of  the  higher  set  of 
the  spheres  referred  to,  and  also  the 


50  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

correspondence  of  those  spheres  with  the 
ganglia  in  the  human    microcosm.     The 
presiding  deity  of  Trikuti  is  '  Brahm '  and 
that  of  the  next  lower  sphere,  '  Niranjan.' 
Thus,  there  are  three  forms  of  Brahm  and 
they  are  technically  known  as,  abyakrita, 
(unmanifested),    Idranyagarva    (gold-becj, 
i.  £.,  manifested  source),  and  birdt  (mani 
fested  mass).     This  corresponds   with*the  \jl 
three  forms   of  our  mental  ego  found  in 
-deep    slumber    (trance),   dream,    and.  the 
wakeful  conditions.     As  the  form  of.  the 
ego  is  not  ordinarily  manifested  in  deep 
slumber,  we  have  mentioned  the  extraor 
dinary  condition  of  trance  to   prove  our 
statement,  inasmuch  as  the  manifestation 
of  the  ego  takes  place  in  that  condition, 
and  it  is  higher  than  that  of  deep  slumber. 
The  three  forms  of  the  individual  ego  are 
known    as,    prajna   (latent  consciousness 
in  deep   slumber,    i.  e.,    in  instrumental 
form),    taijas    (consciousness    in   dream, 
i.     <?.,     in      subtle     form),     and     lishwa 
(consciousness  in  the  wakeful  condition, 


ART.   20          II  s    OH.II-XT    AND    END  51 

/.  <".,  in  gross  form).  The  individual  spirit 
and  its  centre  are,  of  course,  separate 
from  these  three  forms,  although  they 
impart  vitality  to  the  entity.  The  three 
higher  ganglia  in  tlie  human  frame  are 
associated  with  the  three  forms  respec 
tively.  The  ganglia  and  the  individual 
forms  in  question  correspond  to  the 
three  higher  spheres  of  Brahmand  and 
I  lie  three  forms  of  Brahm. 

The  three  lower  spheres  of  the  region 
of  the  Universal  ^lind  are  the  centres  or 
spheres  of  destructive,  generative,  and 
preserval  i ve  Dualities.  The  destructive 
quality  removes  effete  matter,  lie  is  the 
4  Shiva  '  of  the  Shdstras,  the  centre  of  des 
tructive  activity.  The  power  of  assimila 
tion  and  subsequent  generation  is  the 
generative4  quality  known  as  'Brahma.' 
The  third,  viz.,  the  preservative  quality  or 
•  Vishnu,'  supplies  spirituality  and  energy 
to  the  two  other  qualities  and  preserves  a 
proper  equilibrium  in  their  actions.  The 
i-eilections  of  these  qualities  are  to  be 


52  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

found  Loth  in  the  animate  and  in  the 
inanimate  existence.  The  cohesive  force4, 
which  maintains  the  forms  of  the  various 
elements  and  their  compounds,  is  the  pre 
servative  quality  of  inanimate  existence. 
The  process  of  destruction  which  is  ever 
in  progress  in  demolishing  existing  struc 
ture,  and  the  ionic  How  which  reconsti 
tutes  atoms  and  molecules  of  various 
bodies,  are  the  other  two  qualities  in  the 
same  form  of  existence.  In  the  vege 
table  and  the  animal  kingdom,  the  reflex 
images  of  these  qualities  are  much  more 
marked.  The  reflections  of  the  higher 
forms  of  Brahman d  are  not  traceable 
in  inanimate  existence,  as  spirit-force 
endowed  with  subjective  functions  is 
latent  in  that  form,  and  the  higher  forms 
are  peculiar  to  the  subjective  condition  of 
the  spirit-force.  In  animal  existence,  the 
ganglia  at  the  rectum,  the  reproductive 
organ,  and  the  navel  are  the  manifest 
centres  of  the  three  qualities  referred  to, 
while  in  a  lesser  degree  they  are  found 


ART.  21        ITS    OBJECT   AND    END  53 

tis  the  llower,  loaf  and  bark-casting,  the 
«><Hl-forming,  and  the  growth-sustaining 
I'u  net  ions  in  the  vegetable  existence. 
From  what  we  have  explained  above,  it 
is  clear  that  the  correspondence  of  the  six 
subdivisions  of  Brahmand  with  those  of 
the  human  frame  is  complete,  and  we 
now  proceed  farther  with  our  enquiry  to 
iind  out  the  region  of  pure  spirit,  the 
object  of  our  religious  research. 

21 — THE    REGION    OF    PURE    SPIRIT 

We  have  seen  that  the  individual  mind 
is  subordinate  to  the  spirit-entity,  and 
i  hat  it  receives  the  necessary  energy  and 
intelligence  from  the  spirit  for  its  action, 
and  that  it  is  also  associated  with  the 
individual  spirit.  The  same  remarks  apply 
to  the  region  of  the  Universal  Mind.  The 
observations  made  above,  although  they 
throw  considerable  light  on  the  internal 
relation  between  spirit  and  mind,  are  not 
alone  sufficient  to  determine  the  position 
occupied  by  the  regions  of  pure  spirit 


54  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

in  creation.  We  accordingly  proceed  to 
investigate  the  subject  from  other  points 
of  view. 

We  have  shown  in  Article  13  that  the 
elimination  of  the  physical  frame — in 
cluding  its  various  subtle  forms — of  an 
individual  spirit-entity  results  in  the 
enhancement  of  its  various  functions  and 
also  in  the  acquisition  of  new  powers. 
We  have  further  shown  in  Article  9  that 
the  mind  is  an  instrument  through  which 
the  spirit  performs  its  various  subjective 
functions,  and  that  the  former  becomes 
inoperative  on  the  withdrawal  of  the 
spirit-current  from  it.  The  inference  from 
this  proposition  is  that  the  individual 
mind  is  a  medium  of  the  spirit,  entirely 
similar  to  the  corporeal  medium.  The 
elimination  of  the  mental  medium  from 
the  spirit-entity  would  accordingly  lead 
to  the  same  results,  as  take  place  in  the 
case  of  elimination  of  the  physical  frame. 
^Functions  of  a  purely  spiritual  order,  of 
which  the  mental  functions  are  the  reflex 


ART.  21         ITS    OBJECT   AND   END  55 

images,   would   then  manifest  themselves, 

O        ' 

and  the  scope  of  these  functions  would  he 
immensely  greater  than  that  of  the  mind. 
The  three  main  inherent  attrihutes  of  the 
spirit-force,     which    are    prime    energy, 
intelligence,  and  hliss,  would  he  the  predo 
minant   characteristics  of  all  spirit-func 
tions,  and  pain  would  he   unknown.     If 
wo   apply    the    conclusion   arrived    at    to 
Brahmand,     the    a     posteriori    inference 
would   he,    that    the    elimination    of    the 
medium  of  the  Universal  Mind  from  the 
Universal   Spirit-Centre  would  bring  out 
the  region  of  pure  spirit,  and  thus  enable 
us  to  locate  in  creation  the   goal   of  our 
research.     The  case  is,  however,    to    some 
extent,      otherwise,     as     the     inference,, 
referred  to,  does  not  indicate  why  Brahm 
was    created    and    associated     with     the 
Universal     Spirit-Centre ,  and     why     he 
should  he  at  all  disassociated  from  that 
Centre.     This  subject  is  explained  at  great 
length   in   the    Part  devoted  to    creation. 
For  the  present,  it  will  serve  our  purpose 


TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

to  state  briefly  that  the  pure  spiritual 
region,  which  is  beyond  Erahm^nd,  also 
contains  six  subdivisions.  It  was  in 
consequence  of  the  existence  of  these 
divisions  that  the  impact  of  the  pure 
spirit-force  upon  the  region  of  Brahmand 
produced  six  similar  subdivisions  in  it. 

22— COMMUNION    OF    THE    MICROCOSM 
WITH    THE    MACROCOSM 

The  correspondence  and  communion 
of  the  microcosm  with  the  macrocosm 
takes  place  by  means  of  apertures  in  the 
microcosm.  The  main  factor  of  the 
communion  is,  however,  the  spirit  or  the 
sensory  current  permeating  these  aper 
tures.  The  communion  and  the  conse 
quent  perception  are  effected  in  the 
manner  indicated  below.  We  will  take 
up  the  case  of  the  sense  of  touch  first. 
The  corporeal  constituent  of  the  physical 
frame  is  the  instrument  of  this  sense,  and 
when  it  is  affected,  the  feeling  of  touch, 
whether  it  be  agreeable  or  otherwise,  is 


A  in.  22          ITS    OBJECT    AND    END  57 

<'.\|)rrioncecl.  AYe  have  used  the  term, 
ivfrnvd  to,  in  its  most  comprehensive 
MMise,  including  flesh,  skins,  muscles, 
bones,  etc.  The  action  upon  this  instru 
ment  is  conveyed  within  by  means  of  the 
sensory  currents  present  in  its  pores 
which  are  to  be  found  everywhere.  If 
these  pores  were  shut  up,  or  if  the 
currents  were  withdrawn  from  them, 
there  would  be  no  feeling  of  touch.  A 
similar  action  takes  place  in  the  case  of 
the  other  senses.  Each  has  an  instru 
ment  peculiar  to  it,  and  also  contains  a 
constituent  similar  to  that  of  the  object 
perceived  by  it,  "\Vith  this  constituent 
the  sensory  currents  are  associated.  Take 
for  instance,  the  case  of  the  sense  of  sight. 
There  is  light  in  the  optic  nerve,  and  this 
is  the  peculiar  constituent  of  the  sense  of 
sin-lit,  by  means  of  which  a  communion 
with  the  outward  light  takes  place,  and 
the  latter  is  perceived.  To  make  the 
proposition  clearer,  we  would  analyse  the 
of  light  on  the  sense  of  sight. 


58  TRUE   RELIGION  PART  I 

After  penetrating  the  crystalline  lens, 
light  produces  the  images  of  outward 
objects  upon  the  retina.  The  perception 
of  these  images  takes  place  thereafter  by- 
means  of  the  optic  nerve  and  of  the  sen 
sory  currents  present  in  that  nerve.  The 
optic  nerve  which  is  phosphorescent  con 
tains  light,  and  by  means  of  it,  the 
communion  with  the  outward  light  is 
established.  The  process  of  perception  is 
then  completed  by  the  sensory  currents. 
The  above  remarks  hold  good,  with  the 
necessary  changes,  in  the  case  of  the  other 
senses  also  (vide  detailed  explanation  of 
this  subject  in  Part  III,  Art.  97).  The  law 
accordingly  is  that,  for  the  perception  of 
the  macrocosm,  the  spirit-current  must  be 
associated  at  the  proper  apertures  in  the 
microcosm  with  substances  and  powers 
similar  to  those  that  exist  in  the  macro 
cosm.  Communion  between  the  various 
spheres  of  creation  and  the  nervous 
centres  which  correspond  with  them  is 
established  in  accordance  with  the  law 


ART.  22         ITS    OBJECT    AND    END 

specified  above.  To  effect  such  a 
communion,  a  special  course  of  training 
is,  however,  necessary,  as  hy  means  ol 
sucli  training  alone  the  innermost  fane- 
lions  of  the  nervous  centres  (which 
ordinarily  lie  dormant)  are  developed  and 
brought  up  to  that  condition  in  which 
correspondence  is  possible.  In  the  macro 
cosm,  the  presiding  deity  of  the  lowest 
sphere  of  creation  is  '  Ganesh,'  the  son  of 
Shiva,  the  destructive  quality.  If  the 
inner  aperture  and  functions  of  the  lowest 
nervous  centre  which  corresponds  to  this 
sphere  he  developed,  communion  with  the 
sphere  of  Ganesh  and  with  him  would  he 
established,  and  the  devotee  would  acquire 
to  some  extent  the  functions  and  powers 
of  Ganesh.  Similarly,  the  remaining'  five 
nervous  centres  of  the  human  frame  can 
be  brought  into  communion  with  the  five 
spheres  of  the  macrocosm.  The  part  ol' 
the  creation,  which  is  within  our  view 
and  which  contains  the  sun  ^planets,  ±.  * 
oter,  a»d  the  stars,"contams  six  main  'j^t 


TRUE   RELIGION  PART  I 

subdivisions  or  spheres.  They  correspond 
with  the  six  nervous  centres  referred  to. 
Beyond  this  part  of  creation  is  the  region 
of  the  Universal  Mind,  which  cannot  be 
perceived  by  the  physical  senses,  or  any 
appliances  appertaining  to  them.  Details 
of  these  divisions  of  creation,  and  of  the 
purely  spiritual  region,  are  given  at  great 
length  in  Part  III.  At  present  we  shall 
merely  explain  how  communion  is  pos 
sible  with  the  regions  of  Brahmand  and 
with  those  of  the  pure  spirit. 

23 — THE  BRAIN  AND  ITS  FUNCTIONS 

In  the  structure  of  the  human  frame 
the  brain  is  the  most  extraordinary  organ. 
The  functions  of  all  its  parts  are,  how 
ever,  not  quite  understood.  Different 
parts  of  the  brain  have  no  doubt  been 
mapped  out  with  reference  to  the  parts 
they  play  in  regulating  the  lower  struc 
ture.  For  instance,  there,  is  the  speech- 
centre  in  the  braiii/me ^centre  which 
-regulates  locomotion,  etc.,  etc.,  but  the 


ART.  23         ITS    OBJECT    AND    EM)  (jl 

knowledge  we  possess  of  the  functions  o!' 
the  brain  is  of  a  most  superficial  charac 
ter  and  is  quite  incommensurate  with  the 
economy  of  this  wonderful  apparatus  In 
support  of  our  statement  we  would  make 
the  following  observation^.  A  person 
i;-oes  into  the  condition  of  trance,  or  is- 
rendered  senseless  by  the  administration 
of  chloroform.  The  substance  of  the 
brain  (both  grey  and  white),  which 
appears  to  be  the  source  from  which  all 
lower  nervous  centres  have  been  gener 
ated,  also  becomes  insensitive  and  shave- 
the  condition  of  the  rest  of  the  physical 
frame.  The  inference  from  this  observa 
tion  is  that  the  spirit-centre  is  not  in  the 
substance  of  the  brain,  and  that  its  focus 
is  situated  in  a  plane  altogether  different 
from  the  plane  of  brain-matter.  Another 
inference  from  the  same  observation  is 
that  the  plane  of  sensory  action  is 
also  other  than  that  of  the  substance  of 
the  brain.  In  the  lower  animals,  a  per 
ceptible  diminution  is  traceable  in  the 


<32  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

1  unctions  of  the     brain,    and  a  stage  is 
reached      where     the     ani&ial     becomes 
entirely  independent  of  the  brain  for   its 
existence.     If  we  go  further  down  in  the 
scale  of  creation,  all  trace^of  the  brain 
entirely  disappear/,  and  yet  the   process 
of    assimilation    and    other    concomitant 
functions  of  life  exist.     In  the  vegetable 
kingdom  the  nerves  and   the   ganglia  do 
not  exist,  and  yet  growth  and    sustenance 
of  vegetable   existence    take  place.     This 
clearly  indicates  that  the   nerves,  the  ner 
vous  centres,  and  the  brain,  which  is,  as  it 
were,  the  reservoir  of  nerve-po\ver,  have 
other     important    functions    to    perform 
which  are  distinct  from  the  functions   of 
growth   and    sustenance    of   the   physical 
frame.     Those    functions   are    subjective, 
and  perception  and  volition  are  the  two 
main  branches  thereof.     The   powers   of 
perception  and  volition  are,  however,  not 
always  dependent  upon  the  nerves,   etc., 
for   the    performance  of  their   functions. 
This  is  proved  demonstratively  in  the  case 


ART.  23         ITS    OBJECT    AND    END  63 

of  disembodied  spirits    (vide  Article  10). 
The  cessation  of  the  functions  of  nerves^ 
&d,  during  trance,  etc.,  wliich  is  attended 
at    times   by    a  manifestation    of  powers 
which    are   not    ordinarily    found    in    the 
normal  state  of  human   life,  corroborates 
the     same     truth.     These     extraordinary 
powers  clearly  indicate  that  the   human 
frame  is  possessed  of  potentialities  which 
may  by  proper  training*  endow  the  devotee 
with  ['unctions   possessed   by   disembodied 
spirits   and   by  higher  beings.     Thought- 
reading,    and    the  power   of    abstracting 
articles  from  such  places  as  do  not  admit 
of  access,  are  instance-;  which  corroborate 
our      statement.      These     instances      are 
instructive  otherwise  also,  and  show  that 
the  scope    of    the   subjective  economy  of 
humanity  is  very  much  wider  than  that 
we  assign  to  it.     As   we  shall  presently 
explain,   these  observations  give  us  a  clue 
to  the  secrets  of  the  microcosm. 

The  ordinary  functions   of  the  human 
frame,     including     the      entire      i,ervou> 


64  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

system^  consist    of    the    life-giving,    life- 
sustaining,    and    the    responsive    powers. 
This  proposition  broadly  includes  all  the 
ordinary   physical    and   subjective  condi 
tions   of   human    life.       Underlying    the 
planes  of  these  functions,  there  are  subtler 
planes  within  the  nervous  system,  and  the- 
innermost  part  of  each  nervous  centre  is 
associated  with  the  subtle  plane  peculiar 
to  it.     When  these  subtle  planes  are  acted 
upon   through   the   nervous  centres,    the? 
communion  with  the  macrocosmic  spheres 
corresponding  with  them   is    established, 
and  the  powers  of  the  presiding  deities  of 
these    spheres    are    imbibed.     The    brain 
from  which  all  the  lower  nervous  centres- 
have  been  generated  is  similarly  associated 
with   very  subtle  planes.      They  do  not 
belong  to  the  part  of  the  creation  within 
our   vision   but  to  the  higher  regions  of 
creation,  viz.,  to  those  of   the  TJriversal 
Mind^and  of  the  source  of  the  pure  spirit— 
the  true  Supreme  Being.     By  developing 
the  latent  powers  of  these  planes  in  the 


AUT,   1?  I  ITS    OBJECT    AND    KM)  (I.") 

brain,  communion  can  be  established  with 
Hralnn  and  the  true  Supreme  Creator. 
This  function  of  the  brain  constitutes  the 
supreme  importance  <>!'  the  origan  in  the 
economy  of  the  microcosm.  AVe  now 
proceed  lo  indicate  where  the  subtler  and 
hi-her  planes,  referred  to,  are  associated 
in  the  brain. 

'21      -THE     UK  MX     .VXD    ITS    AI'KIHTKKS 

In  the  fissure  between  the  two  lobes  of 
the  brain  there  are  twelve  apertures  which 
provide  the  means  for  communion  with 
the  six  subdivisions  of  Brahmand  and 
with  the*  six  subdivisions  of  the  purely 
spirit  ua-l  region.  The?  a  peri  ures  appertain- 
in- to  Hrahmand  are  to  be  found  in  the 
grey  matter,  and  those  appertaining  to 
the  purely  spiritual  region,  in  the  white 
matter.  So  far  as  the  matter  of  the  brain 
is  concerned,  whether  it  be  grey  or  white, 
it  is  of  very  little  importance.  The 
innermost  quarters  within thSlfl^means 
of  which  the  microcosm  is  associated  with 

E 


66  TRUE    RELIGION  PART  I 

Brahmand  and  the  purely  spiritual  regions, 
are  of  supreme  importance,  and  they  are 
indispensahle  in  our  research.  The  fol 
lowing  illustration,  although  it  is  rather 
of  a  rough  character,  will  make  our  pur 
port  clearer.  There  is  a  slit  in  a  wall  of 
a  dark  room  by  means  of  which  solar 
rays  find  access  within.  The  opening 
itself  is  not  composed  of  the  materials  of 
the  wall,  hut  it  is  in  it.  A  person  placed 
in  this  room  would  have  to  resort  to  the 
opening  for  holding  communion  with  the 
rays^and  for  getting  out  of  the  room,  if  he 
could  become  so  subtle  as  to  ride  on  the 
rays.  Similarly,  the  innermost  localities 
of  the  apertures  of  the  brain,  referred  to, 
will  have  to  be  sought  for  holding  com 
munion  Avith  the  higher  spheres,  and  for 
eventually  gaining  access  into  the  region^ 
of  Brahmand  and  those  beyond  them. 
The  explanations  given  above  are  neces 
sarily  in  the  nature  of  ex  cathedra  state 
ments,  but  they  can  be  fully  verified  by 
the  performance  of  the  experimentations 


fr.  :25         ns  OBJECT  AND  END  67 

ft^t^iC^C^i 
devotional  methods  prescribed  for  the 
development  of  the  brain-centres. 

:>.") — PRACTICE    OF    DEVOTIONAL    METHODS 
VI  TENDED    BY    INCREASED    VITAL    ENERGY 

Ul(l  remark  here  that  tne 
methods  or  experimentations, 
prescribed  for  holding  communion  with 
higher  spiritual  spheres,  result  in  increas 
ing  the  vital  energy,  and  also  in  infusing 
spirituality  of  the  higher  planes  into  the 
devotee.  His  physical  frame,  thus,  bene 
fits  by  the  increase  of  spirituality,  and 
eventually  the  diffused  spirituality  of  the 
devotee,  while  he  is  in  a  condition  of 
trance  during  the  devotional  practices, 
is  sufficient  for  carrying  on  the  functions 
of  the  human  body.  The  proposition  we 
have  stated  above  may  be  confirmed  by 
the  analogy  of  the  diffused  light  of  the 
sun,  which  is  stronger  than  any  ordinary 
light  we  can  produce.  The  practice,  we 
have  referred  to,  keeps  the  devotee  ever 
-conscious  of  what  is  taking  place  within 


68  TRUE    RELIGION  I'ARTI 

him,  and  also  of  outward  occurrences. 
Even  when  the  stage  of  death  is  reached. 
the  power  of  consciousness  is  not  affected. 
At  that  stage  and  thereafter,  his  connec 
tion  Avith  the  physical  frame  is  somewhat 
similar  to  that  of  a  hody  possessed  hy  a 
disembodied  spirit. 


PART  II 

Methods  of  Spiritual  Development  and 
of  the  Elevation  of  the  Spirit 

'2(>   -SPIRITUAL     DEVELOPMENT 

I"  U  survey  of  the  correspondence  of 
the  macrocosm  with  the  micro 
cosm  is  now  complete.  The  location  of 
tho  spirit  and  the  region  where  it  will 
attain  supreme  and  everlasting  bliss,  have 
also  boon  determined.  The  means  and 
methods  for  reaching  that  region  and  for 

o  o 

traversing  the  intervening  spheres  and 
space*  remain  to  be  found  out.  They  are 
explained  below. 

The  preliminary  stop  for  the  com 
mencement  of  the  journey  is  the  develop 
ment  of  the  inherent  powers  of  the  spirit. 
!  1  will  then  be  endowed  with  the  neces 
sary  energy  for  going  up  to  the  spiritual 
region.  Since  the  spirit  has  made  its 
advent  into  the  material  regions  of 


70  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

creation,  the  impressions  upon  it  and  its^ 
responsive  actions  are  those  appertaining' 
to  the  material  or  lower  worlds.  Its  out 
ward  currents,  namely,  those  associated 
with  mind  and  matter  have,  accordingly, 
derived  energy  and  strength,  while  the 
inward  spiritual  force  has  remained  latent. 
If  inward  impressions  he  produced  upon 
the  centre  of  spirit  similar  to  those 
appertaining  to  the  outward  current, 
the  latent  powers  of  the  spirit  will  be 
developed,  and  the  spirit  will  be  endowed 
with  the  necessary  impulse  and  energy  to 
commence  the  journey  to  higher  regions. 

27 — SOUND,    SIGHT,    AND    SPEECH — ESSEN 
TIAL  FACTORS  OF    EXISTENCE 

Before  we  explain  the  principles  of  the- 
methods*  prescribed  for  the  concentration 
or  the  development  of  the  spirit-force 
and  for  its  elevation  to  higher  regions, 


*  The  actual  methods  are  explained  at  the  time  of  initiation, 
after  the  conditions  imposed  for  initiation  have  been  accepted. 
These  conditions  are  specified  fully  in  Art.  74. 


ART.  27  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  71 

we  would  make  a  small  digression.  The 
object  is  to  elucidate  the  proposed  expla 
nation. 

The  main  media  for  the  experience 
of  the  physical  world  and  for  expressing 
our  experiences  are  the  senses  of  sound, 
sight,  and  speech.  These,  thus,  constitute 
the  initial  means  for  the  supply  of  the 
needs  of  the  physical  frame.  Further,  if 
these  three  functions  were  to  become 
inoperative,  the  subjective  powers  would 
either  disappear^or  they  would  undergo 
considerable  deterioration,  and  existence 
would  be  short. 

The  above  remarks  also  apply  to  the 
senses  and  the  subjective  functions  of  the 
subtler  and  higher  planes.  But  as  they 
do  not  take  an  active  part  in  the  main 
tenance  of  the  physical  frame,  their 
inoperative  condition  does  not  affect  the 
physical  existence.  As  these  functions 
are  not  subjected  to  any  regular  training- 
or  exercise  in  the  microcosm,  they  lie  dor 
mant,  and  the  purpose  for  which  they  art" 


72  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

provided  in  the  human  economy  is  not 
served.  The  methods  of  devotion  and 
training  prescribed  in  the  religious  sys 
tem  we  are  explaining,  represent,  respec 
tively,  three  different  forms  of  spiritual 
exercise  for  the  development  of  the  three 
functions  in  question.  The  three  forms 
of  the  exercise  are  :— ( 1 )  utterance  of  the 
spiritual  name  by  the  spirit-current,  (2) 
contemplation  of  the  spiritual  form,  and 
(3)  attentively  listening  to  the  spiritual 
sound. 

As  disembodied  spirits  at  the  time  of 
their  apparition  on  the  physical  plane 
perform  the  three  functions,  referred  to, 
on  that  plane,  obviously  they  are  possessed 
of  subtler  powers  of  the  same  description. 
It  is  by  means  of  these  powers  that  they 
become  cognisant  of  occurrences. which  are 
beyond  the  scope  of  the  physical  senses. 
The  functions  of  sight,  hearing,  and  ex 
pression  are  not,therefore,confiiied  to  the 
physical  planes  known  to  us ;  they  also 
exist  in  the  subtler  planes,  and  their  scope 


AKT.   L'S  SPIRIT    i:U.\  ATION  7X 

is  inuc-li  greater  than  the  scope  of  the 
same  functions  on  the  physical  plane.  The 
methods  of  spiritual  exercises,  we  propose 
to  explain,  are  not  1  herefore  imaginary,  and 
the  same  trials  should  be  accorded  to  them 
as  those  accorded  to  scientific  principles. 

1^       'HIE  THREE  DIMENSIONS  NOT  AFFECTED 
BY  CREATIONAL  FORCES 

In  the  economy  of  creation,  each  set  of 
three  dimensions  is  separated  from  each 
other  in  such  a  manner  that  the  creational 
forces  of  different  intensity  and  subtlety, 
peculiar  to  each,  do  not  affect  any  other 
set.  AVithout  an  arrangement  of  this  des 
cription,  the  gradational  arrangement  of 
cn^ition  would  not  be  possible,  and  the 
advent  of  higher  powers  on  lower  planes 
would  produce  results  similar  to  those  pro 
duced  by  electric  currents  when  resistance 
is  encountered  by  them  in  the  course  of 
their  action.  In  Part  III,,  dealing  with 
creation,  we  have  fully  described  how  the 
various  sets  of  three  different  dimensions, 


74  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

etc.,  are  related  to,  and  separated  from, 
each  other.  The  object  of  our  present 
remarks  is  merely  to  point  out  that  the 
immense  creational  powers,  acting  through 
planes  ordinarily  not  known  to  us,  should 
not  be  ignored.  These  powers,  as  shown  in 
Part  III,  are  accompanied  by  tremendous 
sounds^and  their  effect  upon  the  devotee  is 
immense,when  his  subtle  faculties  of  hear 
ing  become  sufficiently  developed  to  per 
ceive  them. 

There  are  two  classes  of  sounds:— 

(1)  the  spiritual  sound,  whose  tendency 
is  inward  and  attractive,  and 

(2)  the    material    and  mental  sound, 
whose  tendency  is  of  an  opposite 
character      (for    full    explanation 
vide  Art.  64). 

29 — SOUND,    AN    EXPRESSION    OF  THE  FORCE 
PRODUCING    IT 

We  would  observe  here  that  all  sounds 
are  more  or  less  imbued  with  the  charac 
teristics  of  the  force  which  produces 


AIM.   29  SITKIT    ELEVATION  <  •"> 

them.  Take,  for  instance,  the  case  of 
reports  produced  by  gunpowder^  or  by  any 
other  highly  explosive  substance.  When 
the  explosion  takes  place,  a  very  large 
quantity  of  gaseous  substance  is  at  once 
generated  at  one  spot.  The  result  is  a 
sudden  and  powerful  shock  to  the  sur 
rounding  media.  The  suddenness  and  the 
intensity  of  the  shock  become  a  prominent 
component  of  the  report,  and  the  peculiar 
sound  which  accompanies  it  unmistakably 
indicates  that  component.  In  the  case  of 
articulate  sounds  also,  the  proposition 
enunciated  above  holds  good.  The  subjec 
tive  conditions  which  give  rise  to  articu 
late  sounds  are  represented  in  them,  and 
the  manifestation  of  feeling  by  this  method 
varies  in  accordance  with  the  character 
and  intensity  of  the  generating  impulse. 
In  the  brute  creation,  where  the  spiritu 
ality  is  of  a  low  order,  the  sounds  denote 
only  rudimentary  feelings ;  but,  in  man, 
the  intonation  can  he  adapted  to  thr 
expression  of  highly  intellectual  thoughts 


76  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

and  of  beautiful  imagery.  The  effect  pro 
duced  by  the  utterances  of  a  man  of 
genius  is  an  illustration  of  the  truth. 
Ordinary  persons,  too,  when  they  are 
vigorously  swayed  by  passions  and 
feelings,  give  expression  to  them  in 
such  language  and  tone  as  cannot  be 
mistaken.  The  melting  utterances  of  a 
mother  to  her  infant,  the  sad  sounds  of 
lamentation  caused  by  bereavement,  tin* 
Avar-cries  of  soldiers,  are  other  illustrations 
of  the  effect  of  feelings  in  articulate 
sounds.  If  insignificant  humanity  is 
capable  of  producing  such  great  effects  by 
means  of  sound,  ho\v  immense  must  be 
the  spiritual  effect  of  that  sound  which 
accompanied  the  original  outburst  of  the 
Prime  Energy,  viz.,  the  spirit-force,  in  the 
beginning  of  creation. 

30 — THE    COURSE    OF    SPIRITUAL    SOUND 
IS    ALWAYS    INWARD 

Our  ordinary  idea  of  an  outburst  is  that 
some    outward    flow   of   force    from   the 


uT.    JJO  Sl'IKIT     I  l.K\  ATION  77 


centre  to  the  circumference  takes  place  in 
such  cases.  \Ve  have,  however,  used  the 
term  otherwise.  l>y  the  spiritual  out 
burst,  we  mean  a  manifestation  <>r  the 
Prime  Energy  which  was  latent  pre 
viously.  As  the  action  of  the  spirit-force 
is  inward  and  attractive,  the  effect  pro 
duced  hy  the  sound  which  accompanied 
its  manifestation  must  also  have  been 
inward  and  attractive.  This  original  out 
burst  lias  given  its  impress  to  all  spiritual 
sounds,  thus  endowing  them  with  the 
attributes  mentioned  above.  AVheii  they 
are  listened  to,  an  inward  stress  of  great 
intensity  is  accordingly  felt  by  the  spirit  - 
entity.  A  regular  performance  of  this 
method  of  devotion  results  in  the  spirit 
being  inwardly  attracted  or  drawn  up 
towards  the  higher  spiritual  planes  from 
which  the  spiritual  sounds  proceed.  The 
sound-practice  thus  constitutes  the  pro 
cess  for  the  elevation  of  the  spirit. 
Spiritual  sounds  are,  however,  very  subtle. 
and  they  cannot  be  properly  heard,  until 


78  SPIRIT- DEVELOPMENT          PART  II 

the  latent  forces  of  the  spirit  have  been 
developed,  to  some  extent, .by  the  other 
two  modes  of  devotion^xjnainea' below. 
The  perception  of  the  true  spiritual 
sounds  of  higher  spheres  is  an  advanced 
stage  of  spiritual  training.  The  perform 
ance  of  sound-practice  is  not,  however, 
deferred  for  a  long  time  on  this  account. 
It  is  commenced  after  the  devotee  has 
undergone  training  in  the  methods  of 
contemplation  and  name- utterance  for  a 
period  of  six  weeks  or  two  months.  An 
explanation  of  the  methods  of  spiritual 
contemplation  and  articulation  is  noted 
beloAV. 

31 — ORDINARY    METHODS    OF    CONTEMPLA 
TION    NOT    PURELY    SPIRITUAL 

The  creation  may  be  broadly  divided 
into  two  divisions,  the  animate  and  the 
"inanimate.  As  the  highest  form  of  ani 
mate  creation  in  this  world  is  man,  it  may 
be  inferred  that  the  contemplation  of  his 
form  is  the  contemplation  of  the  highest 


ART.  31  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  7!) 


spiritual  form.  Such  is  »et,  however,  the 
case.  The  intelligence  of  man  is  operative 
only  during  the  state  of  wakefulness. 
During  dream,  it  is  under  the  sway  of 
impressions  and  it  disappears  completely 
when,  the  premises  of  deep  slumber  are 
reached.  The  contemplation  of  the  form 
of  man,  would  not,  therefore,  be  the 
contemplation  of  a  purely  spiritual  form, 
but  one  of  a  physical  form,  possessed  of 
a  limited  amount  of  intelligence  and 
knowledge. 

If  we  think  of  the  Supreme  Being  as 
an  infinite  expanse,  something  like  the 
ethereal  sky,  and  contemplate  Him  in 
that  form,  it  would  be  merely  a  contem 
plation  of  a  subjective  conception  derived 
from  physical  experience.  A  contempla 
tion  of  this  description  is  not  also,  there 
fore,  a  pure  spiritual  contemplation. 

32  —  ALL  FEELINGS  REFLECTED  OX   FACE 

Before  stating  the  true  spiritual 
contemplation,  we  would,  for  the  sake  of 


80  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT          PART  U 

elucidation,  make  a  small  digression.  It 
has  already  been  stated  in  Article  20 
that  strong  feelings  are  reflected  upon 
the  face,  and  that  the  reflections  are 
engraved  thereon  if  they  are  frequent. 
This  proposition  is  not,  however,  confined 
to  strong  feelings ;  it  holds  good  in  some 
measure  in  the  case  of  all  feelings. 
Ordinarily,  the  reflections  are  noticeable 
in  the  case  of  strong  feelings  onlv^ 
but  men  of  experience  and  gifted  people 
can  read  individual  characters^  and  also 
hidden  feelings  by  means  of  facial 
peculiarities,  that  is  to  say,  by  means 
of  the  subtle  reflections  engraved  upon 
the  countenance.  This  establishes  the 
proposition  we  have  enunciated,  and  we 
now  proceed  with  the  subject  under 
explanation. 

33 — RESPONSIVE  ACTION    EVOKED  BY 
MEANS  OF    FACIAL    EXPRESSION 

Facial     peculiarities     and     expression 
evoke  responses  somewhat  similar  to  those 


ART.  34  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  81 

evoked    by    feelings     communicated    by 
means    of    sound.     There   are   abundant 
illustrations  in  support  of  this  observation. 
The     affectionate     responses     of     lovers 
towards  each  other,  the  hilarity  evoked  by 
the  features  of  comic  actors,  are  instances 
which  will  serve  our  purpose.     Thoughts, 
viz.,  recollections  of  such  expression  also, 
produce  feelings  of  the  same  description. 
A VI i en  such  thoughts  are  regularly  gener 
ated  for  the  purpose  of  evoking  spiritual 
feelings,  the  process  is  technically  known  as 
spiritual  contemplation.    It  need  hardly  be 
remarked  that  a  pure  spiritual  form  alone 
would  produce  spiritual  feelings,  and  we 
now  proceed  to  find  out  such  a  form.     A 
description  of  spiritual  adepts  of  various 
classes  and  of  their  characteristics  would 
be  helpful  in  the  research  we  have  now  in 
hand.  "VVe  accordingly  describe  them  below. 

34 — DIFFERENT    GRADES    OF    ADEPTS 

In  the  portion  of  this  volume  devoted 
to  the  correspondence  of  the  microcosm 
F 


82  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT       PART  II 

with,  the  macrocosm,  we  have  already 
explained  that  the  communion  with  the 
various  spheres  of  creation  takes  place 
by  means  of  apertures  in  the  various 
ganglia  and  in  the  brain.  A  person, 
who  has  succeeded  in  developing  the  six 
nervous  centres  of  the  physical  frame 
(technically  known  as  Pind),  is  an  adept 
of  the  third  or  the  material  division  of 
creation.  He  has  not  yet  crossed  the 
threshold  of  death,  but  has  traversed 
the  planes  of  dream,  deep  slumber,  and 
trance.  He  is  thus  acquainted  with  the 
entire  creation  we  see,  including  their 
subtle  conditions.  A  person,  who  has 
reached  the  first  sphere  of  Brahm  or 
the  Universal  Mind,  and  who  has  over 
come  death,  is  a  Yogi.  Similarly,  adepts 
who  have  access  to  the  second  and  third 
spheres  of  Brahm,  viz.,  to  Trikuti  and 
Sunna,  are  Yogeshicars  and  Sddhs  or 
Mahdtmds  respectively.  Those  who  have 
access  to  the  purely  spiritual  regions 
beyond  Brahm  and  (the  second  division  of 


ART.  35  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  83 

creation)  are  Sanfs  (Saints).  A  Saint  who 
has  reached  the  highest  sphere  of  the 
purely  spiritual  regions,  the  abode  of  the 
true  Supreme  Creator  or  Prime  Origin  of 
Spirituality,  is  known  as  Param  Saut 
(Supreme  Saint). 

35 — SPIRITUAL    CONTEMPLATION 

All  feelings  of  strong  character  are 
always  due  to  a  high  state  of  excitement, 
but  the  highest  pitch  of  frenzy  to  which 
humanity  can  be  tossed  does  not 
approach  the  perturbations  which  accom 
pany  the  passage  of  a  spirit-entity  from 
the  ordinary  plane  of  wakefulness  to 
!  hat  of  death  and  to  the  regions  beyond 
it.  As,  however,  the  passage  is  inward, 
the  outward  manifestations  do  not  appear 
to  be  so  strong  as  those  produced  by  the 
ordinary  conditions  of  excitement.  In 
the  stages  preceding  death,  the  muscles 
and  the  entire  physical  vehicle  are,  how 
ever,  gradually  twisted,  and  when  death 
supervenes,  the  effect  of  internal  torsion, 


84  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

which  is  terrible,  is  unmistakably 
impressed  upon  them.  The  same  condi 
tions  are  very  gradually  produced  by  the 
performance  of  the  internal  spiritual 
experimentations  or  devotional  practices. 
The  physical  frame  of  a  .devotee,  accord 
ingly,  undergoes  a  complete  change,  and 
the  constitution  of  his  nervous  system, 
muscles,  &c.,  is  so  altered  that  no  resis 
tance  takes  place  in  the  process  of  sepa 
rating  spiritual  currents  from  the  physi 
cal  frame,  i.  e.,  in  undergoing  the  process 
of  death.  Outward  marks  of  these  changes 
are  not  entirely  absent  from  the  physical 
frame,  and  they  are  largely  manifest  in 
the  subtler  frames.  The  outward  marks 
are  specially  noticeable  on  the  forehead 
and  in  the  eyes  of  an  adept,  and  the  effect 
of  these  marks  on  advanced  devotees  in 
producing  concentration  and  sublimation 
of  spirit  is  very  remarkable.  An  adept 
who  has  reached  Brahmand  is  beyond  the 
region  of  creation  that  we  see,  and  he 
performs  ordinary  acts  from  the  planes 


ART.  35  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  85 

of  Brahmand.  His  face  thus  reflects  the 
spirituality  of  Brahmand.  Similarly,  all 
actions  of  Saints  and  Supreme  Saints  are 
performed  by  spiritual  currents  coming 
down  from  the  pure  regions  of  spirit. 
The  contemplation  of  the  image  of  an 
adept  of  Brahmand  would,  therefore,  he  a 
contemplation  of  the  image  of  the  spiri- 
lual  form  of  Brahmand,  and  the  contem 
plation  of  the  form  of  a  Saint  would  be 
the  contemplation  of  a  form  of  pure 
spirituality.  The  contemplation  of  the 
form  of  a  Saint  or  Supreme  Saint,  or  in 
their  absence,  the  contemplation  of  the 
form  of  a  Sddh  or  Mahdtmd,  has  accord 
ingly  been  prescribed  as  the  spiritual 
contemplation  .referred  to  by  us.  The 
•effect  of  association  with  forms,  in  the 
case  of  those  for  whom  we  cherish  an 
•affection,  has  been  explained  in  Article  33. 
In  the  case  of  adepts,  this  effect  is  much 
more  intense,  as  it  is  not  the  association 
.alone  which  gives  rise  to  the  effect. 
Adepts  have  access  to  all  the  subtle 


86  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

planes  of  the  various  spheres  they  have 
traversed  and  gained  access  to.  They 
accordingly  become  cognisant  of  the  con 
templation  of  their  forms,  as  soon  as  this 
process  of  devotion  is  performed,  and 
accord  the  necessary  help  to  the  devotee. 
This  assistance  is  always  accorded  in  an 
imperceptible  form  during  the  practice  of 
contemplation,  but  a  devotee  of  some 
experience  recognises  it  in  the  spiritual 
concentration  produced  at  the  spirit-centre 
by  it.  To  strengthen  faith  and  to  stimu 
late  fresh  impulse,  an  adept,  however, 
allows  devotees  to  get  glimpses,  at  times,of 
his  astral  forms. 

The  contemplation  of  the  image  of  an 
adept  of  Erahmand,  i.  e.,  of  the  second 
division  of  creation,  is  no  doubt  highly 
spiritual  and  goes  far  towards  awakening 
spirituality,  but,  unless  the  form  of  an 
adept  of  the  purely  spiritual  or  the  first 
division  of  creation  be  contemplated,  a 
development  of  the  spirit-force,  detached 
from  the  association  of  the  Universal 


ART.  36  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  87 

Mind,  will  not  be  possible.     The  company 

of  such  an  adept  and  of  those  engaged  in 

spiritual   training  under  his  guidance  is 

also   indispensable   in   the  beginning  for 

spiritual    development,    as    the   personal 

spiritual  influence  of   an  adept   is    very 

considerable,    and    it    becomes    specially 

manifest    when    he    is    conducting     the 

service  of  spiritual  training.    During  such 

service,    devotees   begin    to     realise     his 

internal  presence,  and  a    service  of    this 

description   is,  therefore,    highly  valued. 

The    necessity    and   the    benefit    of    the 

company  of  a   Saint  are  fully  described 

later  on  (vide  Article  56). 

36— THE    FOUR    GRADES  OF   EACH  CLASS  OF 
ADEPTS 

There  are  four  subdivisions  of  each 
class  of  adepts  described  previously.  An 
adept  might  haye^  access  only  to  a  parti 
cular  sphere,  or  he  might  be  allowed  loca 
tion  close  to  the  presiding  deity  or  the 
central  power  of  that  sphere.  Further 


88  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

proficiency  in  adeptship  is,  (1)  the  assump 
tion  of  the  manifest  form  of  the  presiding 
deity,  and  (2)  a  union  with  the  deity's 
essence.  In  these  two  latter  conditions, 
however,  the  adept  has  power  to  detach 
himself  from  the  deity  at  will. 

It  is  clear  from  the  above  remarks  that 
an  adept  must  have  undergone  all  the 
four  stages,  referred  to,  in  respect  of  the 
spheres  he  has  passed  in  his  journey  to  the 
final  goal  he  has  attained.  Eor  instance,  a 
Yogi  has  passed  all  the  above  four  stages 
of  the  six  spheres  of  the  material  plane 
or  Pind  and  of  the  three  lower  spheres 
of  the  region  of  the  Universal  Mind  or 
Brahmand. 

37 — SUPERNATURAL  POWERS  OF  ADEPTS 

The  access  of  an  adept  to  any  sphere 
endows  him,  to  some  extent,  with  the 
powers  of  that  sphere.  "When  he  gains 
union  with  the  presiding  deity  thereof,  he 
becomes  possessed  of  the  same  powers  and 
functions  as  those  possessed  by  the 


ART.  38  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  80 

presiding  deity.  The  remarks,  we  have 
made  above,  naturally  give  rise  to  the 
question  as  to  why  these  powers  are  not 
exhibited  so  as  to  leave  no  doubt  as  to 
their  possession  by  adepts. 

38 — MIRACLES  AND  THEIR  CHARACTER 

Before  entering  upon  an  explanation  of 
the  question,  we  would  take  a  brief  survey 
of  the  miracles  reported  to  have  been  per 
formed  by  various  incarnations  and  pro 
phets,  etc.  Many  miracles,  which  unmis- 
takably  reveal  powers  not  ordinarily  pos 
sessed  by  humanity,  are  ascribed  to  Ramg 
Krishna,  Gautam  Buddha,  Jesus  Christ, 
Mahomed,  etc.  If  the  miracles  in  ques 
tion  be  looked  at  for  features  of  similitude, 
it  will  be  found  that  the  relief  of  suffering, 
the  protection  of  followers,  the  conversion 
of  unbelievers  or  their  vanquishment,  etc., 
are  the  characteristics  which  might  be 
traced  in  the  majority  of  the  miracles. 
No  regularity  or  law  is,  however,  discer 
nible  in  the  performance  of  the  miracles. 


90  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

They  appear  to  have  been  performed  on 
special  occasions,  and  were  not  always 
resorted  to  for  the  attainment  of  the 
objects  specified  above.  On  the  contrary, 
the  messiah,  the  prophet,  or  the  incar 
nation  not  infrequently  allowed  himself 
and  his  followers  to  be  vanquished,  or 
allowed  non-believers  to  prevail  otherwise. 
It  is  clear,  from  what  is  mentioned  above, 
that  miracles  cannot  be  the  ordinary 
means  either  for  protection^  or  cure^or 
success.  This  furnishes  us  with  an  expla 
nation  of  the  question  under  considera 
tion,  and  also  enables  us  to  explain  the 
extraordinary  powers  that  are  exhibited 
as  a  show. 

39 — LAWS   REGULATING    THE    EXERCISE  OF 
HIGHER  SPIRITUAL  POWERS 

We  have  previously  shown  that  the 
spirit-force  is  distinguished  from  other 
forces,  in  consequence  of  its  being  endowed 
with  intelligence,  bliss,  and  prime  energy. 
We  have  also  stated  that  the  source  and 


ART.   39  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  91 

origin  of  the  spirit-force,  the  Supreme 
Creator,  is  an  unbounded  ocean  of  supreme 
bliss,  supreme  intelligence,  and  supreme 
energy.  Having  thus  noted  His  main  attri 
butes,  it  is  a  truism  to  say  that  whatever 
He  has  done,  is  doing,  or  will  do,  is  fraught 
witli  supreme  intelligence,  which  can  have 
no  other  object  in  view  than  to  confer 
benefit  on  all.  His  laws,  too,  which 
embrace  the  past,  the  present,  and  the 
future,  and  from  the  scope  of  which 
nothing  can  be  left  out  in  consequence  of 
the  Omniscience  of  the  Supreme  Creator, 
are  all  perfect  and  are  not  susceptible  of 
any  change  or  deviation  like  mundane 
laws.  An  adept,  who  becomes  acquainted 
with  these  laws  or  exercises  them  to  some 
extent,  must  necessarily  be  a  conform cr  to 
those  laws^and  not  a  breaker  of  them. 
Now,  if  we  turn  to  the  action  of  the  spirit- 
force  as  it  is  observable  on  the  physical 
plane,  we  find  that  it  is  always  hidden,  so 
much  so,  that  even  human  intelligence  of 
the  highest  degree  is  not  aware  of  the 


t)2  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

working  of  the  spirit-force  within  it.  By 
the  emanation  of  spiritual  currents  from 
the  focus  of  the  spirit-force  to  different 
planes  in  animate  beings,  the  functions 
-assigned  to  those  planes  come  into,  play, 
and  a  limited  amount  of  experience  and 
knowledge  is  gained  which  is  helpful  in 
-carrying  on  the  ordinary  avocations  of  life. 
The  spiritual  power,  as  revealed  on  the 
planes  referred  to,  is  also  endowed  with  the 
faculty  of  diving,  to  some  extent,  into  the 
secrets  of  the  non-intelligent  forces  of 
nature,  which  enahle  it  to  make  discoveries 
and  inventions,  which  add  to  the  comfort 
and  convenience  of  mankind,  and  which 
possess  great  educational  value.  This  is 
the  field  assigned  to  ordinary  spirituality. 
The  spiritual  currents,  however,  act  un- 
perceived  in  the  performance  of  all  these 
functions,  and  the  inward  course  assigned 
to  them  remains  undisturbed.  There  are 
extraordinary  conditions,  e.  g.,  those  of 
trance,  hypnotism,  &c.,  in  which  some 
extraordinary  functions  of  the  inner  light. 


ART.  39  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  93 

and  of  spirit-force  arc  at  times  manifested. 
But  the  subjects  in  those  conditions  are 
unconscious^  and  have  no  control  over 
themselves.  Their  actions  are  either 
regulated  by  the  operator's  will,  or  they 
work  at  random.  Furthermore,  many 
statements  made  by  subjects  in  those  con 
ditions  turn  out  to  be  inaccurate,  and  it 
appears  as  if  the  extraordinary  powers 
xvidded  at  those  times  cannot,  to  any 
appreciable  degree,  be  utilized  for  the 
furtherance  of  worldly  objects.  From 
what  we  have  stated  above,  it  would 
appear  that  the  law  is  that  internal 
spiritual  powers  are  not  intended  for  the 
performance  of  physical  work,  which  can 
be  done  by  physical  forces,  and  that  they 
have  other  functions  assigned  to  them  in 
the  economy  of  nature.  Another  law 
associated  with  it  is  that  the  hidden  spiri 
tual  forces  can  be  possessed  and  wielded 
in  those  conditions  alone  in  which  com 
plete  pacification  of  the  physical,  and  to 
some  extent,  of  the  mental  energy  takes 


94  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

place,  and  the  will  of  the  possessor  of  the 
powers  becomes  subservient  to  that  of 
another.  Applying  these  laws  to  adepts, 
it  would  appear  that  an  indispensable 
condition  for  access  to  the  higher  regions, 
and  for  the  acquisition  of  higher  spiritual 
powers,  is  a  complete  subservience  of  the 
adept  to  the  will  of  the  presiding  deity. 
The  corollary  to  the  proposition  is  almost 
self-evident,  viz.,  that  the  adept  must 
entirely  conform  to  the  laws  in  accordance 
with  which  the  presiding  deity  acts  in 
his  sphere  ;  and  whatever  he  does  for  the 
revelation  of  the  functions  of  the  deity, 
must  be  with  the  deity's  command.  The 
adepts  cannot  at  will  and  pleasure  break 
those  laws  and  use  them  for  the  purposes 
of  this  world. 

40 — MIRACLES    DISTINGUISHED 

Persons  endowed  with  some  slight 
powers  of  spirituality,  who  are  in  no  sense 
adepts  of  any  order,  and  who  are  not 
aware  of  the  responsibilities  of  adepts, 


ART.   41  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  95 

make  a  wanton  show  of  their  powers  and 
abuse  them  for  the  exhibition  of  legerde 
main.  These  exhibitions  serve  the  object 
of  arousing  an  interest  in  religious  and 
spiritual  matters  in  sceptics,  but  they 
should  not  be  confounded  with  what  the 
true  prophets,  &c.,  manifested.  These 
inaniiVstations  were  in  the  first  place  very 
rare,  and  then  they  were  mainly  made 
with  the  object  of  corroborating  the 
existence  of  the  internal  regions  described 
by  the  prophets,  and  for  the  purpose  of 
spiritual  elevation,  the  eventual  aim  being 
that  access  should  be  gained  to  those 
regions  by  internal  devotion.  Such 
miracles  were,  hoAvever,  only  intended  for 
persons  endowed  with  some  spirituality 
that  is  to  say,  for  persons  who  were  more 
or  less  fit  for  devotion  and  access  to  the 
higher  planes. 

41 — REVERSES  OF  PROPHETS  AND  ADEPTS 

By  an  inherent  law  of  spirituality,  the 
miracles   could   not   be   extended  to   the 


96  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

ordinary  plane  of  humanity,  which  is  full 
of  desires  of  worldly  aggrandisement. 
This  is  the  reason  for  the  reverses  allowed 
to  take  place,  when  the  prophets  or  the 
incarnations,  etc.,  were  pressed  for  an 
extension  of  their  supernatural  powers 
to  the  accomplishment  of  worldly  objects. 
In  the  matter  of  conversion,  too,  the 
ordinary  means,  viz.,  reasoning,  statement, 
and  rectitude  of  conduct,  were  almost 
exclusively  employed  for  the  inculcation 
of  religious  truths,  and,  as  already  stated, 
miracles  were  very  rarely  resorted  to  for 
this  purpose. 

42 — MORE  COMMON  FORMS  OF  MIRACLES 

There  is,  however,  another  and  a 
natural  way,  by  which  the  extraordinary 
powers  were  made  known  to  true  devotees 
and  followers.  The  oft-occurring  accident, 
which  does  not  admit  of  ordinary  expla 
nation,  is  a  matter  which  produces 
extraordinary  eventualities,  and  which 
introduces  such  features  as  nobody  can 


ART.    12  Sl'IRIT    KLKVATIOX  !>7 

ordinarily    foresee.      Like    other    natural 
phenomena,    accidents    are    regulated    by 
l;i\\s,  as  we  sliall   have   occasion   to   show 
later    on,    and    they     are    not    haphazard 
incidents    void   of   all    explanation,   as  is 
commonly  believed.     As   the   application 
of  the   laws  of  accident    is  a   matter  of 
every-day    occurrence*    largely    affecting 
the  condition  of  humanity,   there  can  be 
no  contravention  of  higher  ordinances  by 
the  utili/ation  of  these  laws,  and  adepts 
often    resort    to    them   for    the    benefit, 
mainly      spiritual,      of     their      disciples. 
Impediments  and  other  matters,  which  a 
disciple   considers    to    be   insurmountable 
or  impracticable,  often,  during  the  course 
of  the  spiritual  training,  disappear,  and  are 
accompanied   by   accidental  coincidences, 
which     unmistakably    reveal    the    hand 
of    his    spiritual     master.      When    such 
experiences  are  often  repeated,  all  doubts 
about    the    extraordinary    powers    of  the 
adepts  disappear  and  a  feeling  of  grateful 
faith    is    generated.     Such    favours   are, 
G 


98  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

however,  only  shown  when  the  difficulties 
arise  directly  or  indirectly  in  connection 
with  the  spiritual  journey  of  the  disciple. 
They  are  never  extended  to  worldly  desires 
which  are  contrary  to  the  dictates  of  a 
true  spiritual  ambition.  If  any  worldly 
difficulty  is  seriously  rendering  imprac 
ticable  the  devotion  of  a  disciple,  it  Avill 
be  removed  or  mitigated,  but  no  assis 
tance  would  be  given  in  the  attainment 
of  the  objects  of  purely  worldly  desires 
for  worldly  purposes. 

The   following  saying   of   a    Persian 
ndept  might  be  aptly  quoted  here  :— 


This  rendered  into  English  is  as 
under  :— 

Seekers  of  the  world  are  doomed, 
seekers  of  paradise  are  mercenary,  and 
seekers  of  the  Supreme  Being  are  blessed. 


VKT.    !•:>  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  99 

1.°)—  ADEPTS  AND  INCARNATIONS    DISTIN 
GUISHED 


have  been  describing  the  powers 
and  functions  of  the  adepts  in  the 
preceding  paragraphs,  and  have  in  that 
connection  alluded  to  the  miracles  and 
other  extraordinary  exhibitions  manifested 
by  incarnations  and  prophets,  etc.  It 
would  appear  from  what  we  have  said 
that  there  is  hardly  any  difference  between 
-an  adept  and  an  incarnation,  «fce.  Such 
is,  however,  not  quite  the  case,  and 
although  eventually  an  adept  might 
possess  almost  the  same  powers  as  the 
incarnation  or  the  prophet  of  the  sphere 
to  which  he  has  attained,  yet  there  is  an 
•essential  difference  between  him  and  the 
latter.  Broadly  speaking  the  distinction 
consists  in  the  incarnation  or  the  prophet 
being  possessed  of  higher  powers  from 
the  time  of  birth,  while  the  adept  acquires 
~the  same  powers  after  spiritual  training 
and  access  to  higher  regions. 


100  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

44 — INCARNATIONS  EXPLAINED 

In  this  connection  it  may  not  be  out 
of  place  to  remove  a  misconception 
that  prevails  in  respect  of  incarnations. 
The  idea  of  the  finiteiiess  of  humanity 
makes  it  appear  as  preposterous,  at 
any  rate,  paradoxical,  that  a  deity  with 
infinite  or  immense  powers  should 
shut  himself  up  in  the  span  of  a  man. 
Such  an  idea  does  not,  however,  appear 
to  he  correct  for  the  reasons  set  forth 
below.  We  have  already  stated  that 
the  diffused  spirituality  of  an  adept 
is  sufficient  to  carry  on  the  ordinary 
work  of  the  human  frame,  while  his 
spirit  has  passed  the  threshold  of  death 
and  gained  access  to  the  regions  of 
the  Universal  Mind  ^  or  to  the  purely 
spiritual  regions,  as  the  case  may  he, 
and  that  his  spiritual  action  is  not  ham 
pered  in  any  manner  by  the  association 
of  spiritual  currents  with  the  physical 
body.  Now,  if  this  proposition  holds 


AUT.    I")  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  101 


in  tin*  case  of  adepts,  with  greater 
*,  it  holds  good  in  the  case  of  incar 
nations.  The  deity  remains  where  he  is> 
<n  id  carries  on  the  Avork  of  the  creation 
subordinate  to  him,  as  usual.  Direct  rays 
from  him,  however,  may  assume  the 
human  forjn,  and  then  lie  is  said  to 
tncarnatev  himself,  and  the  incarnation 
carries  on,  by  the  deity's  direct  impulse, 
the  work  appertaining  to  the  object  for 
which  the  incarnation  was  ordained.  His 
functions  mi^ht  be  likened  to  the  tidal  ehb 
and  flow  in  that  portion  of  the  river  which 
is  subject  to  tides.  The  ehb  and  flow  is 
no  doubt  limited  in  the  river  itself,  but  it 
is  part  and  parcel  of  the  tidal  impulse  of 
the  sea.  The  sea  remains  where  it  was 
before,  and  yet  the  ehb  and  flow  of  the 
tide  is  regulated  by  its  currents. 

15  —  AN  INCARNATION  —  A  SOURCE  OF 
IMMENSE  BENEFIT 

\\V  would  now  proceed  to  explain  the 
necessity  and  object  of  incarnation.     We 


102  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

have  already  said  that  in  a  creation 
(rackana)  evolved  by  an  Omniscient 
Being,  nothing  is  haphazard  or  accidental, 
and  that  beneficent  laws  govern  all 
the  conditions  of  creation  and  those 
of  the  denizens  thereof.  The  apparent 
hardships  and  miseries,  though  they 
are  painful  and,  at  times,  heart-rending, 
and  most  tyrannical  in  the  aspects 
they  present,  must  nevertheless  be 
fraught  with  eventual  benefit,  as  they 
represent  a  branch  of  the  laws  framed 
by  *  the  all-knowing  and  the  all-wise 
Supreme  Creator.  The  conception  of  a 
perpetual  doom  of  misery  is  an  obvious 
contradiction,  if  it  is  assumed  that 
the  origin  or  source  of  creation  is  all- 
knowing  and  all- wise.  Accordingly,  if 
benefit  is  intended  even  in  conditions 
which  appear  to  be  contrary  to  the  all- 
blissful  essence  of  the  Supreme  Being, 
what  immense  benefit  must  be  in  view 
when  the  advent  of  an  incarnation  is 
ordained. 


ART.  46  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  103 

46 — GIFTED  SPIRITS — THE    SOURCE  OT  ALL 
KNOWLEDGE  AND  BLESSINGS 

All  the  comforts  and  luxuries  of  civili 
zation,  all  appliances  and  aids  which 
mitigate  sufferings,  provide  protection 
from  them,  or  advance  and  develop  trade 
and  commerce*  all  discoveries  and  inven 
tions  which  allow  us  a  glimpse,  how 
soever  fractional  it  may  be,  of  the 
working  of  nature;  all  imagery,  thoughts, 
and  intellectual  productions  which  provide 
such  serene  intellectual  .happiness;  all 
laws  and  regulations  whose  main  aim^is 
to  remove  friction  and  to  provide  smooth 
and  harmonious  working — all  these  owe 
their  origin  to  the  advent  on  this  earth 
of  spirits  possessed  of  the  necessary  gifts. 
It  seems  as  if  the  rise  or  fall  of  nations, 
the  advance  or  deterioration  of  civiliza 
tion,  is  regulated  with  reference  to  such 
advents,  or  to  the  absence  of  the  same. 
In  short,  all  knowledge,  of  whatever 
description  it  may  be,  was,  or  has  been 


104  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

unfolded,  or  will  be   disclosed   by   spirits 
possessing  the  necessary  mental  calibre. 

47 — PROPHETS  AND  INCARNATIONS — 
SOURCE  OF  ALL  SPIRITUAL 


Similarly,  at  proper  times  prophets 
and  incarnations  make  their  advent  for 
the  spiritual  benefit  of  humanity  suited 
to  its  conditions  at  the  time.  They,  then, 
reveal  the  higher  regions  from  which 
they  have  come^and  impress  upon  all  the 
necessity  for  a  training  which  would 
secure  access  to  those  regions.  Burin0" 

o  o 

the  ages  of  simplicity  and  faith,  example 
and  piety  were  sufficient  to  inspire 
confidence  in  the  revelation  ;  and  esoteric 
teachings  which  constituted  the  proper 
spiritual  training  were  accepted  and 
undergone  without  question  or  doubt,  and 
the  disciples  did  derive  benefit  from  them. 
The  spiritual  training,  of  whatever  degree 
it  may  be,  was,  is,  and  will  be  in  future 
associated  with  impediments  and  diffi 
culties  as  will  be  explained  later  on.  With 


ART.    Is  SPIRIT-ELK  VAT  I  ON  105 

tin*  aid  <>!'  a  spiritual  u'uide,  who  was 
originally  the  incarnation  or  the  prophet, 
and  whose  functions  were  subsequently 
exercised  by  an  adept  trained  in  the 
prophet's  or  incarnation's  school,  there  was 
no  difficulty  in  surmounting  the  obstacles 
referred  to,  hut  when  such  adepts  became 
extinct  the  formulas  alone  were  regularly 
observed,  but  no  internal  progress  or 
very  little  was  made.  The  training,  re 
ferred  to  lien1,  means  the  internal  journey 
through  the  regions  of  dream,  deep  slum 
ber,  trance,  and  death  to  the  planes  above: 
in  this  journey  the  faculties  of  volition 
and  thought  undergo  a  collapse  at  each 
staije,  and  for  awakening  them  at  each 
higher  plane1,  a  helping  hand  is  as  much 
needed  as  for  the  rearing  up  of  an  infant. 

18 — THE  AWAKENING  OF  A  NEW 
SPIRIT  OF  RESEARCH 

With  the  inner  light  which  the  incar 
nations  and  prophets  possessed,  they  could 
have  substantiated  the  revelations  they 


106  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

made  by  means  of  arguments,  but  the 
time  was  not  ripe  for  such  a  course,  and 
beyond  the  revelations  and  statements  of 
tenets  about  the  esoteric  path  and  regions, 
no  further  attempt  was  made  to  convince 
humanity.  A  change  of  a  very  marked 
character  is,  however,  fast  spreading  now, 
and  the  universal  demand  appears  to  be 
that  everything  should  be  reduced  to  prac 
ticability  and  definiteness,  and  that 
reasons  should  be  adduced  in  support  of 
all  matters,  whether  they  be  temporal  or 
religious.  This  inquisitiveness  of  the 
present  age  is  not  antagonistic  to  spiritual 
research  or  pursuit;  on  the  contrary,  it 
requires  a  presentation  of  revelation  in 
such  a  form,  as  would  leave  no  doubt 
of  its  acceptance  at  present  and  in 
the  future.  This  universal  mood  is  not 
accidental,  but  is  the  outcome  of  a 
craving  for  a  revelation  of  the  highest 
order,  which  will  confer  permanent 
benefit  of  the  highest  degree  now  and 
hereafter. 


ART.  49  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  107 

49 — INCARNATIONS   AND  PROPHETS   OF 
EXTANT  RELIGIONS — THEIR  ORIGIN 

As  we  shall  show  later  on  in  this  vol 
ume,  the  incarnations  and  prophets,  we 
have  been  referring  to,  descended  from  tin- 
second  grand  division  of  creation,  or  that 
of  the  Universal  Mind  or  Brahm,  who  is, 
as  already  stated,  together  with  his  region, 
dependent  for  existence  and  for  action,  on 
the  true  Supreme  Creator,  the  origin  and 
source  of  spirituality,  and  who,  with  his- 
region,  undergoes  the  same  vicissitude  as 
happens  to  the  individual  mind  at  the 
time  of  death.  Access  to  his  region, 
although  it  may  he  fraught  with  spiritual 
benefit  for  a  very  long  time,  does  not  secure 
supreme  and  everlasting  bliss  and  immu 
nity  from  change  and  dissolution  of  every 
description.  Like  the  tendencies  of  the 
individual  mind,  the  tendencies  of  the 
Universal  Mind  are  outward  in  his  planes,, 
and  they  accordingly  present  inherent 
antagonism  to  the  journey  which 


108  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

place  by  means  of  the  inward  spiritual 
currents  to  the  pure  region  of  spirit  which 
is  above  Brahmand.  As  the  kinetic  mental 
ego  is  ever  engaged  upon  work  which 
would  contribute  to  its  happiness,  in  the 
same  manner,  the  Universal  Mind  is 
engaged  in  work  and  functions  which 
appertain  to  his  being,  and  like  the  indivi 
dual  mind,  he  does  not  concern  himself 
with  the  purely  spiritual  regions.  If  this 
holds  good  in  the  case  of  the  Universal 
Mind,  it  also  holds  good  in  the  case  of  in 
carnations  and  prophets  ordained  by  him. 
They,  accordingly,  only  provided  means 
for  access  to  the  regions  of  the  Universal 
Mind,  and  that,  too,  in  such  a  way  thaty/ 
only  those  who  came  in  contact  with  them 
or  with  the  adepts  trained  by  them 
received  the  practical  benefit  of  their 

teachings.      In  the  case  of  lolKwers,  who 

/» 

espoused  their  religion  after  they  and  the 
adepts  had  passed  away,  actual  progress 
during  life  was  seldom,  if  ever,  made  ;  and 
in  accordance  with  the  net  result  of  their 


AKT.   li)          si'iiMT   I:U:\ATIOX  101)' 

sinful  and  virtuous  acts,  location  AN  as 
allowed  in  higher  or  lower  regions,  but  not 
in  the  region  of  the  Universal  Mind  or 
Brahmand  ;  as,  unless  the  tendency  of  the 
currents  appertaining  to  the  individual 
mind  he  entirely  eradicated,  the  spirit  is 
not  tit  for  entrance  into  Brahmand.  And 
similarly,  unless  all  the  tendencies  of  the 
Universal  Mind  are  cut  asunder,  the  spirit 
will  not  he  tit  for  access  into  the  purely 
spiritual  region.  This  might  he  likened 
to  the  transmutations  which  take  place 
in  the  condition  of  matter/in  its  passage 
from  the  solid  to  the  ionic  state.  In  the 
first  place,  the  atom  has  to  shake  off  the 
cohcsiveness  characteristic  of  solid  sub 
stances*  then  the  slippery  hold  of  liquids 
disappears;  at  the  next  stage,  weight 
producing  gravity  has  to  be  dispelled*  the 
state  of  frictional  disintegration,  which 
is  the  form  of  atoms  in  the  condition  of 
heat,  is  then  overcome;  and  finally  the 
atom  breaks  up  into  ions,  gaining  free 
dom  and  increased  energy  at  each  step. 


110  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

50 — INCARNATIONS    AND    PROPHETS  OF 

EXTANT  RELIGIONS — PROOF 

OF  THEIR  ORIGIN 

It  lias  been  mentioned  above  that  the 
incarnations  and  prophets,  referred  to, 
descended  upon  this  earth  from  the 
regions  of  the  Universal  Mind.  The  proof 
in  support  of  this  statement  is  to  be  found 
in  the  holy  books  revealed  by  them,  as 
the  esoteric  allusions  made  therein  clearly 
indicate  to  one  trained  in  spiritual  science, 
that  the  goal  of  the  incarnations,  etc., 
was  situated  in  the  second  grand  division 
of  creation.  To  a  layman,  however,  these 
allusions  are  incomprehensible  ^  and  no 
differentiation  is  made  by  him  between 
the  goals  of  the  various  extant  religions. 

Many  things  ^  which  appear  on  their 
face  to  be  impossible  or  ridiculous^  are 
perceived  to  imply  the  various  stages  and 
means  of  the  spiritual  journey.  It  is,  for 
instance,  said  that  the  prophet  Mahomed 
-ascended  the  sky  on  his  'well-known  horse, 


ART.  50  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  111 

BuAik,  and  that  he  bifurcated  the  moon 
in  the  course  of  his  ascent.  To  the  ordi 
nary  person,  who  has  no  acquaintance 
with  esoteric  technicalities,  and  who  has 
not  received  esoteric  training,  the  inci- 
•dents,  referred  to,  would  appear  to  be  in 
the  nature  of  a  myth.  But  to  an  alum- 
y///.v  of  a  spiritual  alma  mater,  they  present 

quite  a  different  significance.     The  horse, 

\_/ 
Jjtirftk,   is  the  highest    electric     current 

*of  the  third  or  material  division  of  crea 
tion.  It  is,  as  it  were,  the  life  and  spiri 
tuality  of  everything  physical  in  that 
division,  and  it  is  only  by  a  ride  upwards 
upon  that  current  that  ascent  to  the 
higher  division  is  possible.  The  fountain 
head  of  this  current  is  in  the  moon 
(which  should  not  be  confounded  with  the 
-earth's  satellite),  the  orb  which  is  above 
our  sun  and  which  corresponds  to  the  sixth 
ganglion  of  Find,  viz.,  the  seat  of  the 
spirit.  For  further  ascension  it  is  neces 
sary  that  this  centre  should  be  penetrated. 
"When  this  entrance  was  effected  by  the 


112  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

prophet,  it  might  well  he  stated  in  spiri 
tual  technicality  that  he  broke  asunder 
the  moon  in  twain.  He  then  got  a  glimpse- 
of  the  dazzling  flame,  the  '  Jyoti '  of  the 
Yedic  religion,  the  consort  of  '  Maya  Sabal 
Brahm.'  All  commands  and  revelations 
were  made  to  Mahomed  from  this  place,, 
and  the  goal  of  his  teachings  ends  here. 

51 SPIRITUAL  REGENERATION 

As  knowledge  of  every  description  is 
gained  by  the  association  of  the  spiritual 
current  with  the  object  of  knowledge,  it  is- 
clear  that  the  essence  of  a  presiding  deity 
and  the  creation  subordinate  to  him  could 
be  known  to  him  alone  or  to  the  presiding 
deity  of  a  higher  sphere  of  creation. 
Accordingly,  when  the  presiding  deity  of 
a  sphere  considers  it  necessary  and  proper 
to  allow  access  to  his  region  to  the  spirits 
of  lower  planes,  he  has  originally  to- 
incarnate  himself  for  the  necessary  revela 
tions  and  esoteric  teachings  for  the  pur 
pose.  Such  incarnations  are  rare,  and 


AKT.   52  SPIRIT-ELEVATION' 

when  they  do  come,  the  innermost  secrets 
are  revealed,  and  great  and  rapid  progress 
is  made  by  the  disciples^  who  come  in 
personal  contact  with  them.  Later  on, 
the  work  of  spiritual  regeneration  is 
carried  on  by  adepts  trained  by  them  ; 
the  success  of  an  adept's  work  varvino* 
in  accordance  with  the  degree  of  training 
attained  by  him.  If  the  adept  is  of 
the  first  order,  that  is  to  say,  if  he 
has  acquired  the  power  of  uniting  himself 
with  the  essence  of  the  presiding  deitv, 
his  training  is  as  efficacious  as  that  by  an 
incarnation  of  that  deity. 

52 — PARTIAL    REVELATION    PRECEDING 
INCARNATIONS 

To  pave  the  way,  as  it  were,  for  the 
incarnation  of  a  deity,  it  is  sometimes 
expedient  that  a  partial  revelation  should 
be  made  in  advance,  and  for  this  purpose 
a  spirit  evolved  out  of  the  essence  of  the 
deity,  who  is  his  son  or  a  denizen  of  his 
sphere,  is  empowered  and  sent  to  this 
H 


114  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

earth  for  the  above  purpose.  Not  only  the 
secrets  of  the  second  grand  division  of 
creation,  which  is  known  as  Brahmand,  but 
also  those  of  the  purely  spiritual  regions, 
have  been  made  known  in  the  manner 
explained  above.  The  Saints  or  the  adepts 
of  the  purely  spiritual  regions  of  different 
-classes,  who  were  the  sons  of  the  presiding 
deities  of  the  different  spheres  of  the  first 
grand  division  of  creation,  thus  made  their 
advent.  Kabir  Saheb  was  the  first  to  come. 
Some  of  His  holy  pieces,  in  the  most  clear 
terms,  point  out  that  He  had  come  from 
the  highest  sphere,  the  one  beyond  the 
Alakh  and  Agam,  which  is  known  as  the 
sphere  of  Eadhasoami.  He  was  the  son  of 
the  true  Almighty,  Supreme  Creator, 
EAdhasoami^md  had  come  in  advance  to 
communicate  the  august  commands  of  the 
true  Supreme  Father.  This  is  alluded  to 
in  the  following  verse  of  Kabir  Saheb  :— 


ART.  53  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  115 


The   verse_C)jr"jKjjJnr   Sc(hcb/   referred 
M*— 

to,  renderecr  into    English   would   be  as 
follows : — 

Saith  Kabir,  the  knower  of  the  secrets 
of  the  highest  mansion,  that  He  has 
brought  the  commands  of  the  Omni 
present. 

Other  Saints  followed  Kabir  Saheb  at 
irregular  intervals.  They  were  Guru 
Nanak,  Jagjivan  Saheb,  Pali^u  Das,  Tulsi 

Saheb  of  Hathras    (who  is  not  to  be  con- 

* 

founded  with  Tulsi  Das,  the  poet,  whose 
main  compilation  is  the  Ramayan).  Other 
adepts,  too,  of  a  very  slightly  lower  order, 
made  their  advent.  They  were  Garib  Das, 
Dulam  Das,  Charan  Das,  Nabhaji^  Darya 

Saheb,  R,aidas,  Surdas,  Shums/Tabrez,  Man- 

/  M. 

sur,  Sarrnad,  Moinuddin  Chisti,  &c.,  &c. 

^ 

53 — UNIFORM  NATURE  OF  TEACHINGS 
OF  THE  SAINTS 

The  precepts  and  sayings  of  all  these 
adepts  and  Saints  are  in  unison  in  respect 
of  the  methods  prescribed  for  spiritual 


116  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

training,  which  is  in  short  Satyandm,  Saf- 
guru,  and  Sat  sang.  Satyandm  means  True 
Name,  and  it  implies  that  the  true  or  spiri 
tual  name  should  be  heard  or  articulated 
within.  Sat  guru  means  True  Guide,  i.e.,  an 
adept  who  has  access  to  the  true  and  purely 
spiritual  region,  and  who  can  lead  a  disciple 
to  that  region.  Guru  Xanak  defines  such 
a  true  guide  in  the  following  couplet  :— 


The  English  version  of  this  couplet  is  as 
under  :  — 

He  who  showeth  mansions  within 
mansions  is  the  all-knowing  true  guide. 
The  echoes  of  five  different  sounds  are 
reverberating  as  the  distinctive  features 
of  five  respective  spheres.  v  v  N  . 

Satsang  means  true  company  or  associa 
tion.  As  Satguru  is  the  living  manifesta 
tion  of  pure  spirituality,  which  alone 
is  true  or  real  in  consequence  of  its 


ART.  54  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  117 

•everlasting  nature,  his  personal  company 
is  outward  .sv/.svo//y.  Inward  satsmig  is  the 
company  of  the  spiritual  current  within, 
which  consists  in  listening  to  spiritual 
sounds  or  in  articulating  internally  spiri 
tual  names.  As  a  true  guide  has  access 

to  the  spirit ualplanes  of  his  disciples,  his 

/f&i&f^fte'? 
mamfestation^ttey  either  unsolicited  or  in 

consequence  of  earnest  and  affectionate 
contemplation  of  his  form,  or  remem 
brance  of  his  gracious  acts,  is  also  internal 
jatsang. 

- 1  /      /     /    /          / 

64 — ADVENT  OF  RADHASOAMI  DAYAL 

When  the  ground  for  spiritual  regener- 
ation,  asjhas  been  explained  above,  was 
thus  made  fit  for  further  development  by 
the  Saints  and  other  adepts  referred  to, 
then  the  incarnation  of  the  presiding 
deity  of  the  highest  spiritual  sphere,  viz., 
lladhasoami  took  place.  The  tenets  and 
teachings  and  the  practical  devotional 
methods  of  the  religion  of  Saints,  which 
had  already  been  given  out,  as  explained 


118  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

above,  were  made  manifest  in  their  simplest 
forms,  and  the  devotional  practices  ren 
dered  so  easy  of  performance,  that  they 
can  be  attended  to  without  difficulty  and 
performed  with  success  by  humanity  of 
both  sexes  and  all  ages,  subject  to  the 
observance  of  certain  simple  rules  regu 
lating  the  conduct  of  life;a**4  diet,  etc. 

The  true  order  and  object  of  creation, 
which  had  hitherto  been  an  insoluble 
mystery  ,  and  which  had  not  been 
explained  in  detail  by  Saints  even,  were 
given,  out  by  the  most  gracious  Ra'dha- 
soaSm  in  a  complete  form.  The  true 
spiritual  articulation  of  the  sound  of  the 
highest  division,  which  had  not  been  made 
known  by  Saints,  was  also  disclosed  by  Him. 
To  demonstrate  the  truth  of  all  these 
revelations,  arguments  based  on  lines  of 
pure  induction  and  deduction,  and  sup 
ported  by  illustrations  taken  from  facts^ 
which  are  within  the  access  of  ordinary 
observation  ?and  by  devotional  or  experi 
mental  experiences,  were  advanced  in 


ART.  55  SPIRIT-ELEVATION 

discourses  of  a  most  extraordinary 
character,  delivered  during  the  holy 
service  held  under  His  august  presidency 
every  day.  The  scientific  presentation 
of  the  revelations  made  by  Him,  as 
unfolded  in  this  volume,  is  based  on  those 
discourses. 

55 — NECESSITY  OF  A  LIVING  ADEPT  FOR 
SPIRITUAL  TRAINING 

The  Saints  and  other  adepts,  <j 


their  spirituality,  ^aTTthe  time  of  death} 
from  the  various  planes  with  which  it  was 
associated  in  consequence  of  their  advent 
on  this  earth,  and  regain  the  original 
place  which  they  occupied.  Departure 
from  this  earth  in  their  case  is  not  like 
that  of  ordinary  humanity.  It  is  all 
along  known  to  them,  and  it  takes  place 
when  the  purpose,  for  which  their  advent 
had  been  ordained,  has  been  served. 
Their  spirituality,  while  they  are  on  this 
plane,  is  so  great  that  whatever  object 
comes  in  contact  with  them  is  spiritualised 


120  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

to  some  extent,  and  contact  with  or  the 
use  of  such  objects  is  beneficial ;  but  the 
kinetic  energy  of  the  spiritual  force  of  the 
sphere  from  which  they  had  sprung  up 
ceases  with  their  departure.  And  as  the 
law  is  that  the  spirituality  assigned  to 
the  various  planes  in  creation,  does  not 
act  on  a  lower  plane  save  by  percolation, 
which  allows  passage  to  a  fractional 
part  alone  of  the  spirituality,  the  Saints 
or  adepts  after  departure  do  not,  in 
contravention  of  this  rule,  extend  the 
same  spiritual  assistance  as  they  afforded 
during  their  life.  Of  course  disembodied 
spirits,  who  have  been  liberated  from  the 
coarse  physical  bondage  by  death,  but 
whose  worldly  desires  and  mundane  affini 
ties  are  as  strong  as  they  were  during  life, 
often  hold  communion  from  the  astral 
plane  (which  is  associated  with  the 
earth  and  is  situated  in  the  ethereal 
plane)  with  friends  and  kindred  to 
whom  they  are  attached,  or  dabble 
otherwise  in  worldly  matters,  be 


ART.   .V)  SPIRIT-ELKVATION  121 

good  or  bad.  Tbe  religious  teachings 
of  Saints,  specially  of  the  incarnation 
of  lladhasoam'i,  therefore,  lay  special 
st  ress  upon  the  necessity  of  a  living  adept 
for  practical  spiritual  training.  The 
science  of  the  spiritual  force  is  highly 
technical  and  subtle,  requiring  regular 
daily  training  on  planes  with  which 
the  devotee  is  unacquainted.  A  perusal 
of  the  holy  books  is,  therefore,  not 
sufficient  for  spiritual  experimentations. 
The  successful  performance  of  such 
experimentations  requires  constant  aid 
from  an  adept  both  internally  and 
externally.  The  root  of  all  evil  is 
egotism,  which  word  is  used  here  in  its 
literal  significance,  and  means  and  conveys 
the  idea  of  a  consciousness  that  whatever 
is  being  done,  whether  it  be  temporal  or 
spiritual,  is  the  outcome  of  the  worth  or 
power  that  the  actor  possesses  within 
himself,  forgetting  or  ignoring  the  source 
from  Avhich  that  worth  or  power  was 
derived.  So  long  as  this  function  remains, 


122  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

a  translationjof  the  spiritual,  entity  is   im- 


poesiWecIoiigher  planesT^SSTthe  disciple 
will  revolve  round  his  mental  ego,  which 
he  considers  to  he  his  inner  self,  and  no- 
real  progress  is  possible.  The  adept  who 
acts  from  higher  planes  can  alone  over 
come  this  great  impediment.  Assistance 
of  the  description  we  have  been  speaking 
of  comes  unsolicited  at  moments  when 
the  disciple  is  in  despair  in  consequence 
of  the  futility  of  all  his  efforts.  The 
frequent  occurrence  of  such  a  condition 
during  the  course  of  spiritual  training  of 
a  devotee  gradually  introduces  a  change- 
in  his  nature  and  character.  Confidence 
gives  way  to  diffidence  and  true  humility  ; 
and  the  devotee  off  and  on  turns  his  gaze 
and  attention  to  higher  quarters  within 
himself  for  assistance.  This  exercise 
gradually  results  in  a  change  of  the  plane 
of  action.  When  the  powers  of  the  higher 
planes  are  developed  to  a  degree,  the- 
devotee  is  enraptured  by  the  freedom,. 
bliss,  and  the  enlargement  of  the  scope  of 


ART.  55  SPIRIT-ELEVATION 

vision  he  has  acquired.  He  then  becomes 
truly  conscious  by  personal  experience  of 
the  evils  concentrated  and  concealed  in 
egotism,  and  also  of  the  efficacy  and  bliss 
of  devotion.  Such  pure  and  true  devo 
tion,  which  leads  the  devotee  rapidly  on 
towards  the  object  of  his  devotion,  can  be 
generated  by  a  living  adept  alone  and  not 
otherwise.  Devotees  who  have  made  some 
advance  can  to  some  extent  render  assis 
tance  to  others,  who  have  not  made  so 
much  progress,  in  the  shape  of  strength 
ening  the  belief  and  the  motive  for  reli 
gious  devotion  of  the  latter  by  a  statement 
of  their  own  internal  experiences  and  by 
their  example  ;  but  the  ascension  of  a 
spirit  from  its  ordinary  seat  to  higher 
planes  is  possible  only  when  a  living  adept 
is  present.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the 
disciple  must  always  be  in  the  personal 
company  of  the  adept.  So  long  as  the 
adept  is  alive,  his  spirituality  is  kinetic 
on  higher  planes  and  he  can  extend  help 
(of  course  spiritual)  even  when  the  disciple- 


SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

is  away  from  him  at  a  distance.  The 
ahsence  of  adepts  has  been  the  cause  of 
deterioration  and  stoppage  of  internal  pro 
gress  in  all  religions,  whether  they  apper 
tain  to  the  second  grand  division  of  crea 
tion  or  to  the  first.  Continuous  internal 
progress  is  only  possible  when  the  succes- 
•sion  of  one  adept  after  another  is 
continuous,  or  when  it  takes  place  at  very 
frequent  intervals.  During  the  gap  the 
spirituality,  which  had  already  been 
gathered,  consolidates  as  it  were,  and  at 
the  advent  of  the  next  adept  it  is  fit  for 
further  exaltation  from  the  foundations 

alreadv  laid. 

• 

5fj — THE  HOLY  SERVICE 

It  will  not  be  out  of  place  here  to 
•describe  in  some  detail  the  holy  service 
(the  satsang  held  under  the  presidency  of 
a  living  adept).  Such  a  service  represents, 
as  it  were,  a  training  class  for  practical 
spiritual  instructions  and  for  devotional 
practice.  The  presiding  adept,  who 


ART.  T>()  SPIRIT-ELK VATIOX  125- 

conducts  the  service,  sits  on  an  elevated 
place,  so  that  no  difficulty  might  be 
experienced  by  the  audience  in  listening 
to  his  discourses.  The  audience  is  of  a 
mixed  character,  both  men  and  women 
being  present  in  it.  The  space  provided 
for  ladies  is,  however,  screened,  and  is 
quite  separate  from  the  place  where  the 
male  portion  of  the  audience  is  seated. 
Visitors  are  not  allowed  to  be  present  at 
the  time  of  the  service,  except  with 
special  permission,  which  is  given  as  a 
matter  of  course,  if  the  visitor  is  desirous 
of  acquainting  himself  with  the  principles 
of  the  religion  of  the  Saints  with  a  view 
to  practical  religious  training.  The  main 

reason  for  restricting  free  access  is  that 
•v 

not  knf requently  the  practice  of  attending 
to  the  internal  spiritual  sound  is  performed 
as  a  part  of  the  service,  and  this  practice 
cannot  be  performed  in  the  presence  of 
visitors.  The  service  commences  with 
the  recitation,  in  which  all  the  members 
of  the  congregation  can  take  part,  of 


126  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT       PART  II 

certain  holy  pieces,  which  contain  a 
grateful  expression  of  the  immense 
spiritual  benefit  conferred  by  the  gracious 
Supreme  Creator,  Radhasoami,  in  reveal 
ing  the  true  path  of  salvation^and  always 
extending  His  gracious  assistance  to  the 
devotee  in  Ms  inward  journey  to  the  region 
of  pure  spirituality,  which  is  the  abode  of 
supreme  ecstasy,  bliss,  and  immortality. 
The  service  closes  with  another  recitation 
of  the  description  given  above,  but  the 
subject  matter  of  the  holy  pieces  is  differ 
ent,  the  purport  of  the  prayer  contained 
therein  being  that  assistance  and  grace 
may  be  extended  to  frail  and  forgetful 
humanity^which  can,  unaided,  do  nothing 
towards  the  attainment  of  true  emancipa 
tion,  and  that  true  love  may  be  generated 
for  the  lotus  feet  of  the  Supreme  Being, 
as  in  their  absence  the  bliss  of  His 
gracious  and  beatific  vision,  and  location 
in  His  ever  holy  mansion,  cannot  be 
attained.  During  the  interim  of  the 
service,  the  holy  books  compiled  by  Saints 


ART.  56  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  127 

(they  are  both  in  verse  and  in  prose)  are 
regularly  read  out.  Such  portions  of 
these  books,  as  do  not  admit  of  easy 
comprehension,  are  explained  by  the 
presiding  adept,  or  made  the  text  of  a 
holy  discourse.  Other  discourses  also  are 
frequently  delivered.  They  contain  either 
an  exposition  in  a  scientific  and  logical 
form  of  the  tenets  of  the  Saints'  religion, 
or  deal  with  subjects  connected  with  the 
practice  of  spiritual  devotion.  AVhile  the 
books  are  being  read  out,  the  members  of 
the  congregation  are  simultaneously 
attending,  to  some  extent,  to  their  devo 
tional  practice,  specially  of  contempla 
tion,  which  is  rendered  easy  in  consequence 
of  the  presence  of  the  adept,  and  also  in 
consequence  of  the  inspired  subject  matter 
of  the  holy  books  they  are  listening  to. 
Concurrently  with  this,  the  process  for 
the  purification  of  mind  and  the  eradica 
tion  of  evil  desires  is  also  at  work.  The 
root  of  all  evils  is  ignorance,  which  clouds 
the  discriminating  faculties^and  conceals 


128  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

the  viciousness  of  sinful  motives  and  acts. 
In  the  presence  of  a  Saint  or  an  adept, 
this  ignorance  is  dispelled  to  some  extent, 
and  his  serene  and  sacred  company  is  at 
times  alone  sufficient  to  disclose  the  short 
comings  of  the  members  of  the  congrega 
tion,  and  to  generate  true  contrition  at  the 
condition    so     revealed.      The    discourses 
delivered  during  sat  sang,  however,  more 
frequently  effect  the  purification,  referred 
to,  and,  at  the  same  time,  provide  a  mas 
terly  training  to  the  audience  in  developing 
the  faculty  of  true  discrimination,  where 
by  they  become  gradually  capable  of  find 
ing  out  the  subtlest  motive  in  its  most 
disguised  form  which  is  contrary  to  true 
virtuous  principles  and    correct  religious 
conduct    as    prescribed    in    the    religion 
of     the     Saints.      The     surroundings    of 
satsang,  the   presence    of    the  adept  and 
his  discourses,   produce  also  great  effect 
upon  the  faculty  of  religious  emotion,  and 
as  the  devotee  makes  progress  in  his  spiri 
tual  practice,  gradually  the  satsang  affords 


AKT.  57  SPIRIT-ELEVATION 


such  exquisite  emotional  ecstasies  to  him 
that  all  pleasures  of  this  world  dwindle 
into  insignificance,  and  the  entire  service 

is  one  of  engrossing  rapture.  This  is  what 
/       j 

Kabir  Saheb  refers  to  in  the  following 
verse  :  — 


The  translation  of  this  into  English  is 
to  the  following  effect  :  — 

The  ignorant  are  not  acquainted  with 
the  secret  :  showers  of  ambrosia  fall  in 
the  s  at  sang. 

57  -  DISTRIBUTION  OF    ARTICLES 
SANCTIFIED  BY  TOUCH 

The  presiding  adept  is  sometimes  gar 
landed  before  the  commencement  of  the 
service,  and  garlands  sanctified  by  his 
touch  arc  distributed  to  the  members  of 
the  congregation.  Sweets  or  some  other 
light  articles  of  food  are  also  sometimes 


130  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

distributed  after  sanctification  by  the 
adept.  They  constitute,  as  it  were,  the 
sacrament  of  the  satsang.  The  above  two 
functions  are,  however,  being  gradually 
given  up  in  the  Radhasoami  satsang  in 
consequence  of  the  increasing  dimensions 
of  the  satsang,  and  if  the  present  expan 
sion  continues,  bringing  together  daily 

over  hundreds  and  thousands  of  the  fol- 

/      /    /   % 
lowers  of  Eadhasoami  Faith,  the  functions, 

referred  to,  may  have  to  be  abandoned  as 
a  part  of  the  satsang. 

/  /  /        ' 

58 — PARSHADI,    CHARAXAMRIT,  ARATI, 
AND  OBEISANCE 

The  benefit  of  sanctification,  which  we 
shall  presently  explain  from  a  theoretical 
point  of  view,  is  also  conferred  upon  a  very 
limited  circle  of  devotees  who  are  often 
in  attendance  on  an  adept.  Articles  of 
food  left  in  the  dishes  after  an  adept  has 
finished  his  meals,  clothes  and  garments 
worn  by  him,  and  the  water  used  for  the 
ablution  of  his  feet,  are  considered  to  be 


A  KT.    ~>s  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  131 

highly  spiritualised,  and  used  by  suJi  of 
the  disciples  as  get  an  opportunity  to 
obtain  them.  Disciples  are  also  sometimes 
allowed  to  touch  the  feet  of  an  adept  with 
their  forehead,  the  object  being  that  the 
spirituality,  which  is  more  or  less  flowing 
out  from  the  feet  of  the  adept,  might  be 
imbibed  by  them.  This  mode  of  obeisance 
is  also,  however,  confined  to  a  very  limited 
circle.  The  use  of  these  sanctified  articles 
or  the  mode  of  obeisance,  referred  to,  is, 
however,  not  a  part  of  the  holy  service. 
At  times,  disciples  are  permitted  to  gaze 
intently  at  the  eyes  of  an  adept,  and  he 
-also  directs  his  gaze  similarly  at  the  eyes 
..and  forehead  of  the  devotees  engaged  in 
this  practice.  Meanwhile,  holy  pieces 
dealing  with  the  journey  of  the  spiritual 
-entity  upwards,  towards  the  region  of 
pure  spirituality,  or  containing  a  descrip 
tion  of  the  conditions  of  deep  love  and 
yearning,  or  of  true  humility  and  resigna 
tion  to  the  will  of  the  Supreme  Creator, 
which  befall  a  devotee  during  his  course  of 


132  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

spiritual  journey,  are  recited.  During  this, 
recital,  the  practice  of  spiritual  contempla 
tion  has  to  be  performed  with  the  aid  of 
the  adept's  gaze.  The  spiritual  concen 
tration  during  such  moments  is  very 
great,  and  the  devotees  who  are  per 
forming  this  practice  are  filled  within 
themselves  with  rapturous  bliss.  When 
the  concentration  is  beyond  the  strain 
to  which  a  devotee  is  accustomed,  hi& 
eyes  involuntarily  close,  but  during  this 
condition  he  is  all  along  conscious, 
inwardly,  and  does  not  lose  his  identity 
like  a  hypnotised  subject.  The  aid 
received  in  the  course  of  this  practice, 
which  is  technically  known  as  the  Arati 
ceremony,  is  very  similar  to  the  aid 
extended  to  a  child,  who  is  just  beginning 
to  walk,  by  its  mother  or  nurse.  The  effect 
of  this  ceremony  should  in  no  way  be 
confounded  with  the  effect  produced 
by  suggestion  or  hypnotism,  the  object 
of  the  assistance  rendered  being  to 
arouse  the  potentialities  of  the  spirit-entity 


ATIT.  58  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  133 

concurrently  with  the  functions  of  freewill 
and  self-consciousness,  and  not  to  make 
the  inherent  powers  of  spirit  a  vehicle  for 
H'ivinu1  efl'ect  to  the  desires  of  the  operator, 
as  is  the  case  in  mesmerism. 

As  promised,  we  now  proceed  to 
explain  the  theory  of  the  four  modes  of 
sa  notification  mentioned  ahove,  which 
theory  also  applies  to  the  sanctifica- 
tion  of  garlands,  £c.,  by  touch.  That 
the  internal  condition  of  an  animate 
ohject  affects  those  who  touch  it,  is 
very  clearly  observed  in  the  case  of  a 
number  of  insects,  &c.,  the  contact  in 
extreme  cases  resulting  in  immediate  blis 
ters,  &c.  To  a  lesser  degree,  this  pecu 
liarity  applies  to  all  animate  beings. 
Hitherto,  we  have  been  speaking  of 
the  physical  effects,  with  the  object 
of  establishing  the  proposition  that  the 
inherent  constitutional  spirituality  is 
capable  of  producing,  by  means  of  the 
physical  frame  it  has  assumed,  effects 
peculiar  to  its  seed-power.  In  case  of 


SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PA11T  II 

sanctification,  similar  effects  are  pro 
duced,  hut  they  are  perceivahle  on  the 
spiritual  plane,  as  the  physical  effects 
are  observable  on  the  physical  plane. 
A  devotee  whose  spiritual  power  is 
developed  to  some  extent  can  realise 
the  effects  produced  by  sanctified 
objects  almost  immediately  he  uses  them, 
even  when  he  is  not  aware  that  the 
object  he  is  using  is  sanctified.  If 
this  is  a  fact  that  hypnotised  subjects 
find  it  easier  to  establish  communion 
with  a  person,  with  the  aid  of  an 
object  used  by  him,  the  theory  stated 
above  is  confirmed  by  this  fact. 
Blood-hounds  also  are  aided  in  following 
their  clue  in  a  somewhat  similar  way- 
something  left  on  the  way  by  the 
object  of  their  search  furnishing  them 
with  the  necessary  link. 

Electricity,  which  furnishes  vitality, 
as  it  were,  to  all  elements,  presents> 
the  greatest  similarity  to  the  spiritual 
force.  It  would  not,  therefore,  be 


ART.  59  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  135 

irrelevant  to  state  in  support  of  the 
theory  we  have  been  advancing  that 
if  electrified  bodies  can  impart  their 
electric  charge  to  everything  that  comes 
in  contact  with  them,  the  quantity  of 
electricity  so  imparted  varying  directly 
with  reference  to  the  electric  intensity 
of  the  electrified  body,  adepts  whose 
physical  frame  is  charged  with  spiritu 
ality  of  a  very  intense  character  of  a 
very  high  plane,  can  also  similarly  impart 
their  spirituality  to  all  objects  that  come 
in  contact  with  them.  It  may  be  per 
haps  desirable  to  observe  here  that  in  con 
sidering  the  argument  by  analogy  stated 
above,  the  similarity  in  regard  to  touch 
alone  should  be  kept  in  view.  Any  effort 
to  extend  the  similarity  in  other  direc 
tions  would  introduce  unnecessary  com 
plications  and  produce  anomalies. 

59 — ARTICULATION    OF    SPIRITUAL  NAME 

We    now   proceed  to    the  explanation 
of     the     third     method     for     spiritual 


136  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

development,  viz.,  the  articulation  of  the 
spiritual  name,  which  in  common  language 
would  mean  the  internal  repetition  of  the 
holy  name.  Prayers  offered  internally 
are  ordinarily  held  to  be  analogous 
to  repetition  of  the  holy  name.  Such 
is,  however,  not  the  case  as  will  appear 
from  the  explanations  given  below.  The 
holy  names,  we  are  referring  to,  are  not 
uttered  for  producing  the  desired  effect 
with  reference  to  the  verbal  meaning  of 
those  names.  The  articulation  of  those 
names  themselves  in  modes  peculiar  to 
each  is  supposed  to  carry  the  necessary 
effect  or  charm.  Such  holy  names  are 
technically  known  as  mantras.  The 
internal  repetition  of  some  of  these  names 
would  enable  the  disciple,  on  the  comple 
tion  of  the  prescribed  course  of  training, 
to  acquire  the  power  of  controlling  the 
feelings  and  desires  of  all  persons  who 
come  in  contact  with  him.  Such  names 
are  vashikaran  mantras,  while  there  are 
other  names  jwhich  possess  the  power  of 


ART.  GO  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  137 

destruction,  and  when  their  functions 
liuve  been  developed,  it  is  said  that  no 
diniculty  would  arise  in  destroying  any 
object  or  overcoming  opposition. 

60 — THEORY  OF  THE  REPETITION  OF 
HOLY  NAMES  EXPLAINED 

We  now  propose  to  discuss  the  nature  of 
the  efficacy  claimed  for  holy  names.  In 
previous  portions  of  this  treatise  we  have 
attempted  to  show  that  the  economy  of  the 
human  frame  is  not  accidental,  but  that 
it  is  based  upon  the  economy  of  creation. 
The  main  divisions  and  subdivisions  of 
the  microcosm  correspond  to  those  of  the 
macrocosm,  and  communications  between, 
them  exist  by  means  of  apertures  in 
the  nervous  centres  of  the  human  frame, 
the  ganglia  representing,  as  it  were,  the 
spheres  of  the  macrocosm  on  a  small 
scale.  It  would  thus  follow  that  cur 
rents  in  action  which  are  to  be  found 
in  the  universe  are  existent  in  miniature 
in  the  human  frame.  We  have  also 


138  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

shown  at  length  previously  that  all  cur 
rents,  that  is  to  say,  kinetic  force-emana 
tions  are  reverberating  with  sound,  which 
could  be  perceived  everywhere  and  on 
all  sides,  if  the  inherent  faculty  of 
hearing,  which  is  latent  in  our  spirits, 
were  developed.  According  to  the  laws 
of  harmony,  the  sounds,  we  have  referred 
to,  co-operate  with,  or  militate  against, 
those  which  are  concordant  or  dis 
cordant  respectively.  Each  sphere  is- 
maintained  by  a  central  power  or  pre 
siding  deity,  which  '  constitutes  the 
reservoir  or  focus  of  power  or  vitality 
peculiar  to  that  sphere.  The  force-cur 
rents  prevalent  in  the  sphere  take  their 
rise  from  the  presiding  deity,  and  sounds 
peculiar  to  those  currents  accompany 
them.  We  have  similar  currents  in  our 
body  in  the  nervous  centre  which  corres 
ponds  to  the  sphere.  These  currents  are, 
however,  not  active  in  the  same  way  as- 
the  currents  coming  out  from  the  presid 
ing  deity.  They  perform  certain  functions 


ART.  GO  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  139 

peculiar  to  the  sphere  in  respect  of  the 
maintenance  of  the  physical  body  ;  hut 
the  subjective  functions,  viz.,  perception, 
comprehension,  and  regulation  are  latent. 
Now,  i(?  we  were  to  repeat  internally  at 
the  nervous  centre,  corresponding  to  a 
sphere,  a  sound  which  is  an  imitation  in 
articulate  speech  of  the  sound  emanating 
from  the  focus  or  presiding  deity  of  that 
sphere,  the  vibration  set  up  therein  by 
this  process  will,  as  the  practice  advances, 
come  into  harmony  with  the  vibration  in 
sounds  already  existent  in  the  sphere,  and 
when  the  unison  or  concord  of  the  two 
acts  of  vibration  is  complete,  they  would 
commingle  and  respond  to  each  other  like 
the  response  of  a  tuning-fork  which  is  in 
harmony  with  a  musical  instrument.  The 
subjective  functions  and  powers  of  the 
deity  would  then  be  imbibed,  and  the 
great  force  wliich  he  wields  in  his  sphere 
could  be  set  in  motion  by  the  utterance- 
within  of  the  holy  name  at  the  will  of 
the  devotee.  This  is  technically  known  as- 


140  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

mantra  sicldhi,  that  is  to  say,  the  acquisi 
tion  of  the  powers  of  the  holy  name.  Eor  a 
very  long  time  the  internal  repetition  is 
more  or  less  superficial,  as  all  our  tenden 
cies  are  outward  and  the  internal  repeti 
tion  does  not  stir  up  the  true  tune-chord. 
The  outward  tendency,  we  have  referred 
to,  introduces  all  sorts  of  thoughts  and 
ideas  at  the  time  the  holy  name  is  being 
repeated.  The  diversion  of  attention  due 
to  the  ingress  of  such  thoughts  is  a  great 
impediment,  and  the  repetition  of  the  holy 
name  is,  therefore,  not  so  effective  as  it 
would  otherwise  be.  A  great  combat, 
therefore,  ensues  at  the  time  of  practice, 
and  until  the  outward  tendencies  are  more 
or  less  overcome,  the  internal  currents  of 
the  centre  at  which  the  repetition  is  being 
performed  cannot  be  properly  brought 
into  action  and  developed.  The  material 
or  the  outward  tendencies,  we  have  been 
speaking  about,  have  been  generated  and 
strengthened  by  exercise,  as  it  were, 
throughout  almost  the  twenty-four  hours 


ART.  60  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  141 

of  every  day  since  our  birth,  and  accord 
ingly  a  contrary  condition  cannot  prevail 
by  a  practice  for  a  short  time  every  day 
extending  over  a  few  months  or  even  over 
a  few  years.  The  exact  process  of  internal 
repetition  of  holy  names  is  not  often 
known  by  persons  who  practice  such 
repetition,  and  even  if  they  correctly  per 
form  the  practice,  the  necessary  guidance 
is  often  wanting.  This  is  the  reason  why 
a  notion  has  now  become  prevalent  that 
the  holy  names  do  not  possess  that  efficacy, 
at  present,  which  they  possessed  originally. 
Such  is,  however,  not  the  case.  Th& 
names  possess  the  same  efficacy  as  they 
possessed  before,  but  proper  training  or 
guidance  is  not  so  easily  accessible  as  it 
was  before.  From  what  we  have  stated 
above,  the  principle,  however,  seems  to  be 
(v>tal)lishrd  that  in  accordance  with  the 
Luvs  of  harmony,  the  repetition,  within, 
of  articulate  sounds  (without  regard  to 
their  meaning),  which  are  an  imitation  of 
the  sounds  accompanying  the  emanation 


142  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

of  a  force  out  of  the  presiding  deity  of  a 
sphere,  at  a  nervous  centre  corresponding 
to  that  sphere,  can  result  in  the  acquisi 
tion  of  the  power  of  that  deity.  This 
principle  is  enunciated  by  Moinuddin 
Chisti  in  the  following  couplet  :— 


The  translation  of  the  couplet  in 
English  is  as  follows  :  — 

There  is  no  difference  between  the 
name  of  the  deity  and  the  deity  himself, 
the  refulgence  of  that  name  showeth  the 
beatitude  of  the  object  of  worship. 

A  similar  idea  has  been  expressed  by 
Tulsi  Das,  the  famous  compiler  of  the 
Hamayan,  in  the  following  words  :  — 


The  meaning  of  this  verse  in  English  is  :  — 
Name  and   the   object    of    name    are 


ART.  Gl  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  143 

parallel  to  water  and  its  waves,  no  differ 
ence  should  he  stated  between  the  two. 

The  names,  we  are  referring  to,  are  the 
imitations  in  articulate  speech  of  the 
sounds  peculiar  to  various  spheres.  They 
should  not  be  confounded  with  ordinary 
words  used  to  denote  objects  or  thoughts 
-and  feelings. 

61 — MAIN  OBJECT  OF  THE  METHODS 
OF  PRACTICE  IDENTICAL 

It  will  be  observed  from  Article  2  that 
the  attainment  of  the  object  of  religion,  as 
denned  in  the  beginning  of  this  volume,  is 
possible  in  that  condition  alone^in  which 
the  spirit  gains  access  to  the  purely  spiri 
tual  regions.  The  two  methods  of  spiritual 
practice,  we  have  already  described  and 
discussed,  were  shown  to  have  been  pres 
cribed  specially  for  the  attainment  of  the 
object  referred  to,  and  the  third  practice 
now  under  consideration  has  also  the  same 
^nd  in  view.  In  each  of  the  two  practices, 
referred  to,  the  main  feature  is  the 


144  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

development  of  the  spiritual  current,  that 
is  to  say,  the  concentration  and  the  subse 
quent  exaltation  of  the  spirit.  In  the 
methods  of  repetition  of  the  true  holy 
name  described  below,  the  same  main 
feature  exists.  The  functions  of  that  holy 
name  are  purely  spiritual  and  attractive,, 
entirely  devoid  of  all  mental  and  mate 
rial  powers  and  tendencies. 

62 — HOLY  SPIRITUAL  NAME  DISTIN 
GUISHED  FROM  SO-CALLED  MANTRAS 

In  a  purely  spiritual  religion,  the- 
names  or  mantras ^\\\ic\\  merely  act  as 
instruments  of  destruction  or  control  and 
authority- have  no  value,  and  the  holy 
name  which  effects  liberation  of  spirit 
from  the  thraldom  of  matter  and  mind 
is  alone  used.  We  are  not,  therefore, 
advocating  in  any  sense  the  practice  of 
the  repetition  of  the  mantras  already 
referred  to.  They  have  been  mentioned 
by  way  of  illustration  -to  establish  a 
principle :  they  do  not,  however,  form 


ART.  Oo  SPIRIT-ELEVATION'  1  1-5 

part   of   the    practical'  code  of    training- 
prescribed  in  the  religion  of  the  Saints. 

03 — CHARACTERISTICS  OF  SPIRIT-FORCE 

Before  describing  the  true  holy  name 
given  out  by  the  gracious  Radhasoami, 
we  propose  to  ascertain  the  main  features 
of  the  true  Supreme  Creator  and  the 
characteristics  of  the  spirit-force  by  which 
the  creation  was  brought  about.  It  is  a 
matter  of  every-day  experience  that  no 
force  can  act  without  a  focus  and 
currents.  So  long  as  the  currents  are 
non-existent,  the  force  is  in  the  condition 
of  potentiality.  With  the  rise  of  currents, 
which  takes  place  by  a  previous  commotion 
in  the  reservoir  or  focus,  the  potentiality 
is  converted  into  kinetic  action  and  work 
commences.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to 
remark  that  if  there  were  no  reservoir  or 
focus,  there  would  be  no  currents.  The 
above  principles  apply  to,  the  spiritual 
force  also.  It  would  perhaps  be  more 
accurate  to  say  that  the  characteristics, 


146  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

referred  to,  of  the  forces  of  nature  owe 
their  origin  to  the  characteristics  of  the 
prime  energy,  viz.,  the  spiritual  force. 
The  origin  of  creation  must,  in  accordance 
with  this  view,  have  commenced  with  an 
upheaval  and  subsequent  flow  of  spiri 
tual  currents  from  the  infinite  reservoir 
of  spirituality,  '  the  true  Supreme  Being. 
So  long  as  these  conditions  had  not  taken 
place,  there  was  no  creation,  and  the 
Supreme  Being  had  not  manifested 
Himself  till  then  as  the  Creator.  In  the 
portion  of  this  work  dealing  with  the 
course,  the  economy,  and  the  object  of 
creation,  we  shall  explain  and  discuss 
fully  the  manner  in  which  the  spiritual 
currents  acted  in  constituting  the  cosmos. 
Meanwhile,  it  will  be  sufficient  for  our 
present  purpose  to  state  that  the  spirit- 
force  acts  and  forms  a  field  of  action  in 
a  way  similar  to  some  extent  to  the  action 
of  the  magnetic  force.  In  a  field  of 
magnetic  force,  the  action  at  all  points  is 
towards  the  magnetic  centre  of  force,  and 


ART.  01  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  117 

i  f  we  look  merely  at  the  converging  ten 
dency,  the  idea  of  the  prevalence  of  that 
force  in  a  field  or  sphere  of  action,  away 
from  the  pole,  involves  a  contradiction.  If, 
however,  we  take  into  consideration  the 
magnetising  effect  of  the  pole  on  the  ions 
of  the  surrounding  ether,  which  consists 
in  the  sorting  of  the  positive  and  the 
negative  ions  round  the  positive  and 
negative  poles  respectively,  the  con 
tradiction  disappears  ^  and  the  process 
«of  the  manifestation  of  the  currents  of 
an  attractive  force  becomes  comprehen 
sible.  This  is  the  way  in  which  the 
•spiritual  current  manifested  itself  from 
its  spiritual  source. 

61 — DISTINCTIVE    CHARACTER    OF    SOUNDS 

EMANATING    FROM    SPIRITUAL    SOURCE 

AND    FROM    SPIRITUAL    CURRENTS 

Commotion  in  the  spiritual  source  pre 
ceding  the  manifestation  of  the  spiritual 
currents  and  the  currents  themselves 
Avere  both  the  manifestation  of  the  prime 


148  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PAUT  II 

energy  in  two  different  kinetic  forms  ;  and 
both  of  them  must  have,  in  accordance 
with  the  theory  we  have  already  stated, 
been  accompanied  by  sound.     It  is  almost 
self-evident  that  the  sound  which  accom 
panied  the  commotion  was  distinct  from 
the  sound  which  accompanied  the  currents. 
This  distinction  between  the  source-sound 
and  the  current-sound  applies  to  the  inner 
most  or  the  spirit  action  of  all  presiding 
deities    of   the   various   spheres   of   crea 
tion.     This  has,  however,  been  overlooked, 
and  the  sound  of  the  manifest   functions 
of   the   various    deities  have   alone   been 
reduced  to  mantras.     The    greatest  holy 
name  or  the   mantra,  as  revealed  in  the 
Vedas,  viz.,  ^W  (om),  does  not  represent 
distinctly  the  spiritual  current-sound  and 
the     source-sound    underlying   it.     It   is 
merely  an  imitation  in  articulate  speech 
of  the  sounds  accompanying  the  functions 
of     Brahm     (the     Universal     Mind)     in 
%  Erahmaiid.     The  distinction  between  the 
sound  accompanying  the  functional  work 


ART.  61  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  149 

of  a  deity  other  than  the  true  Sup  rone 
Bring,  the  source  and  origin  of  all  spiigin 
ality,  and  that  acconi pan  \ 'ing  the  focus  aha 
current  actions  of  spirit,  maybe  elucidated 
by  the  following  illustration.  Our  think 
ing  ego,  viz.,  the  mind  is  an  instrument 
dependent,  as  we  have  already  stated,  for 
the  performance  of  its  functions  upon  the 
spirituality  derived  from  the  centre  of 
the  spirit.  These  functions  are  set  at 
work  after  the  spirituality  emerges  at 
the  mental  plane.  Their  character  is 
quite  distinct  from  that  of  the  spiritual 
current  and  the  spiritual  centre  which 
have  supplied  the  vitality.  The  sound 
and  vibrations  at  the  mental  plane  of 
the  various  functions  of  mind  are  the 
result  of  the  passage  of  the  spirii  through 
the  mental  plane,  and  are  as  distinct 
from  the  spirit-sounds,  referred  to,  as 
blue  light  produced  by  the  passage  of 
white  light  through  a  blue  lens  is  distinct 
from  white  light.  If  our  had  the  power 
of  penetrating  the  lens  and  perceiving  the 


150  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT       PART  II 

J/i 

lights  concern itantly ,  the  great  differ- 
ener 

between   their  character  would  be 
both 

apparent  to  him  in  a  very  marked  man 
ner.  A  similar  distinction  exists  between 
the  mental  and  spiritual  sounds,  we  have 
been  speaking  of ;  but  this  distinction  is 
not  apparent  to  those  who  do  not  possess 
access  to  the  innermost  quarter  of  spirit. 
The  functional  sounds  or  the  manifest 
holy  names  of  the  various  deities  are 
similarly  distinct  from  the  sounds  of 
internal  spirit- currents  supplying  the 
spiritual  energy  to  the  deities.  In  the* 
case  of  the  prime  origin  and  source 
of  spirit  alone,  viz.,  the  true  Supreme 
Being,  this  distinction  disappears,  as  the 
manifestation  of  the  spirit-current  itself 
constitutes  the  function.  Barring  the 
incarnation  of  the  true  Supreme  Being, 
Radhasoami,  other  incarnations  and  pro 
phets,  &c.,  accordingly  revealed  the  holy 
names  or  mantras  of  the  functional 
powers  of  their  respective  deities.  As 
the  true  supreme  spiritual  name  or 


ART.  G5  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  151 

mantra  could  be  revealed  by  Him  alone 
who  had  access  to  the  source  and  origin 
of  spirit,  Kabir  Saheb,  as  already 
mentioned,  who  had  come  as  a  harbin 
ger  from  that  region,  has  alluded  in 
one  place  to  that  supreme  name.  Of  this 
we  shall  speak  more  definitely  shortly. 
Meanwhile,  we  proceed  to  announce  and 
explain  that  name. 

65 — EXPLANATION    OF   THE   SUPREME 
NAME    RADHASOAMI 

The  imitation  in  articulate  sound  of 
the  first  spiritual  current,  which  is  the 
beginning  in  the  course  of  all  creation, 
is '  Radha,'  and  the  imitation  of  the  wave 
or  commotion  that  gave  rise  to  this 
prime  current  is  *  Soami.'  The  true  holy 
name  or  the  supreme  mantra  of  the 
origin  and  source  of  all  spirituality  in 
creation  is  'lladhasoami,'  and  when  the  true 
Supreme  Being  thus  manifested  Himself 
as  Creator  and  evolved  the  creation,  the 
wave  and  currents  announced  Him  as. 


SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 


Rarlhasoami  in  the  vast  region  of  spiri 
tuality  first  evolvel.  This  true  name  is 
present  everywhere  in  creation  and  can  be 
heard  at  the  innermost  plane  where  the 
spirit-current  is  acting.  As  each  ray 
emanating  from  the  sun  carries  with  it 
the  constitutional  components  of  the  sun, 
similarly  the  prime  action  by  focus  and 
current,  which  are  the  constitutional 
components  of  creation  in  the  beginning, 
is  carried  in  the  tinies^  ray  of  spirit,  and 
the  sound,  lladhasoami,  could  be  heard  in 
miniature  ^  if  we  could  penetrate  the 
surrounding  layers^ and  reach  the  inner 
most  quarter  occupied  by  the  spirit-ray: 
The  holy  name,  lladhasoami,  has  been 
announced  above  as  revealed  by  the  incar 
nation  of  gracious  lladhasoami  like  other 


revealed  mantras  or  holy  names.  It 
will,  however,  perhaps  be  more  satis 
factory  to  demonstrate^  to  some  extent, 
that  the  imitation  in  articulate  speech 

of  the  sound  of  the  spirit-current  and  of 

/      /     /  X 
the  spirit-focus  is  E/adhasoami. 


ART.  G6  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  153 

GO — SEQUENCE    OF    SOUNDS    RADHA    AND 
80AMI    EXPLAINED 

Before  proceeding  with  the  explana 
tion,  it  is  desirable  to  remove  a  mis 
conception  that  might  present  itself  in 
connection  with  the  explanation  we  have 
given  above.  As  the  commotion  in  the 
source  of  spirit  must  have  preceded  the 
first  spiritual  manifestation  or  current, 
the  question  naturally  arises  why  it 
should  not  be  more  correct  to  call  the 
holy  name  Soami  Radha,  that  is  to  say, 
in  the  sequence  in  which  the  action  took 
place.  The  answer  to  this  apparent  ano 
maly  is  that  the  manifestation  took  place 
by  a  process  of  attraction  similar  to  that 
exercised  by  magnetism  (vide  Article  63). 
As  the  current  is  always  towards  the 
source,  its  action  so  far  as  creation  is 
concerned  takes  place  in  the  first  instance 
and  subsequently  the  influence  of  the 
source  affects  it,  that  is  to  say,  the  source 
acts  by  means  of  currents.  Prom  the  point 


154  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT       PART  II 

of  view  of  creation,  therefore,  the  proper 
sequence  is  current  first  and  focus  subse 
quently,  and  the  name^Radhasoami^is  not, 
therefore,,  in  an  inverted  sequence. 

67 — COMPONENT    PARTS    OF    THE    NAME 

/       /         /      / 

RADHASOAMI    EXPLAINED 

It  is  a  matter  which  can  he  easily 
observed  that  in  imitating  a  sound  such 
as  that  of  a  whistle,  bell,  &c.,  the 
instrument  of  articulation  is  required 
to  be  put  in  a  condition  which  corres 
ponds ,  more  or  less  j  with  the  condition 
which  gave  rise  to  the  sound.  It  is  well 
known  that  in  wind-instruments,  the 
vibrating  column  of  air  has  to  be  set  in 
motion  in*  a  tube,  and  the  emanation  of 
this  vibration  from  the  open  end  of  the 
tube  produces  the  sound  peculiar  to  the 
flute,  clarionet,  &c.  Now,  if  we  want  to- 
imitate  the  sound  of  a  flute,  we  shall  so 
adapt  our  instrument  of  articulation  as  to> 
produce  a  tube  within  it,  with  the  open 
end  at  the  lips,  and  then  set  the  aerial 


ART.  67  SPIRIT-ELEVATION 

column  in  vibration,  which  will  issue 
from  the  hole  of  the  lips  in  some  r 
blance  to  the  sound  of  a  flute.  The 
sound  of  the  sibilant  '  S,'  which  is  uttered 
by  adaptation  of  the  instrument  of  speech 
in  a  manner  similar  to  that  mentioned 
above,  will  accordingly  necessarily  take 
part  in  the  imitation  of  a  flute-sound,  and 
the  flute-sound  could  never  be  imitated  if 
the  sound  of  the  letter  '  S  '  were  not  to  he 
used.  Similarly,  in  imitating  a  bell-sound, 
which  is  produced  by  a  concentrated 
shock  on  a  part  of  a  metallic  disc  or  on 
the  side  of  a  metallic  vessel,  the  use  of 
the  sound  of  a  dental  letter  is  indispens 
able,  as  the  striking  can  only  be  imitated 
in  the  instrument  of  articulation^when  the 
tongue  strikes  the  shut-teeth  in  uttering 
dental  letters.  The  bell-sound  is  accord 
ingly  imitated  by  the  sound  £  ding-dong ' 
in  English,  or  by  the  sound  'tan-tan' 
in  Hindustani.  It  will  be  observed  that 
the  initial  letters  are  both  dental,  while 
the  closing  letters  are  nasal.  From  what 


156  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  H 

we  have  stated  above,  the  principle  is  estab 
lished   that   the   use   of   certain  peculiar 
letters     is    indispensable      in      imitating 
sounds  in  articulate  speech.     Let  us  now 
apply  this  principle  to  find  out  the  letters 
and  their   forms  which  would  represent 
in    articulate  speech    the    sound  accom 
panying  the  actions  of  a  spirit-current  and 
its  focus.     We  have  already  stated  that 
the  action  of  the  spirit-force  is  somewhat 
similar  to  that  of  magnetism.     The  exam 
ination  of  the  conditions  prevailing  in  a 
field   of   magnetic    force  will,    therefore, 
serve  our  purpose.     Ether  in  its  normal 
condition,    as    evolved   in    the   course    of 
creation,  consists  of  a  homogeneous  mass 
capable  of  differentiation  into  two  com 
ponents  already  referred  to  as  the  positive 
and    negative   ions.     By    the    action   of 
energy  from  an  extraneous  plane,  differ 
entiation  takes  place,  but  the  creational 
tendency  tends  to  restore  the  components 
to  the   original   natural  condition.     This 
is    the    reason    why    the    negative    and 


ART.   07  Sl'IKH     KI.KVATIOX  157 

positive  poles  atliact  each  other,  and  a 
neutral  zone  is  formed  between  the  two. 
In  plain  laim'uajjje,  the  formation  of  the 
two  poles  of  a  field  of  magnetic  force  cor 
responds  to  the  storage  of  energy  at  one 
place  and  its  corresponding  depletion  at 
another.  If  we  look  at  individual  ions  in 
a  Held  of  magnetic  force,  we  find  that 
they  are  subject  to  stress  of  two  opposite 
characters.  All  the  ions  are  accordingly 
in  a  state  of  subtle  tremor.  This  is  the 
first  ell'ect  in  a  sphere  of  attractive  force. 
The  prevailing  attraction  then  resolves 
into  attraction-currents  which  are  made 
up  of  a  series  of  such  tremors  in  the  same 
direction.  This  is  the  state,  to  some 
extent,  of  the  action  of  a  spirit-current. 
Now,  let  us  ascertain  what  letter-sounds 
and  their  combinations  will  set  up  a 
similar  condition  in  the  instrument  for 
articulation.  The  sound  of  '11'  is  one 
which  is  produced  by  a  most  pronounced 
vibration  of  the  tongue,  and  this  letter- 
sound  must,  therefore,  be  used  in  the  first 


158  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

place  for  the  purposes  of  imitation  in 
articulate  speech  of  the  sound  accompany 
ing  the  action  of  a  spirit-current  at  any 
point,  which  is  one  of  tremor.  The 
attractive  flow  towards  the  centre  has 
next  to  be  imitated,  which  is  accomplished 
by  the  use  of  a  dental-aspirant  letter- 
-sound  necessitating  the  initial  drawal  of 
breath  inwards.  The  letter-sounds  'Radha' 
.are  accordingly  the  nearest  approach  in 
articulate  speech  of  the  subtle  sound 
-accompanying  the  action  of  a  spiritual 
.current. 

08— THE  ORIGIN  OF    FORMS 

We  have  already  stated  that  the  source 
of  spirit  is  the  true  Supreme  Being.  That 
source  is  infinite  and  all-surrounding; 
•and  the  entire  creation  is  but  a  speck  in 
it  like  a  cloudlet  in  the  sky.  Whatever 
forms  we  find  in  creation  have  received 
their  impress  from  the  infinite  form  first 
manifested  by  the  Supreme  Being,  as  form 
is  nothing  but  the  arrangement  into  which 


ART.  70  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  159 

•energy  resolves  anything,  and  the  prime 
•energy  emanated  from  the  Supreme  Being. 

69 — THE  PRIMEVAL  FORM 

The  idea  of  infinitude  precludes  the 
•conception  of  form,  but  we  may,  without 
inconsistency,  ascribe  a  form  to  the 
infinite  with  reference  to  the  first  demar 
cation  introduced  in  it  by  the  mani 
festation  of  the  prime  spiritual  current. 
We  have  already  said  that  the  manifesta 
tion  of  the  current  was  preceded  by  a 
•commotion  in  the  source.  The  portion  in 
which  this  commotion  took  place  was  the 
prime  focus  or  kinetic  centre  of  action.  Its 
form  like  the  forms  of  other  force-centres 
was  elliptical  or  egg-shaped.  The  natural 
ellipsoids  of  force-action  in  nature  unmis 
takably  reveal  the  impress  of  the  first  form. 

70 — SOUND   ACCOMPANYING    FIRST  COMMO 
TION  IN  SPIRIT-SOURCE 

Our  object  in  ascertaining  the  form  of 
the  first  commotion  is  to  find  out  what 


160  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

the  nearest  approach  in  articulate  speech 
will  be  to  the  sound  accompanying  the 
prime  spiritual  focus.  In  accordance  with 
the  principle  already  enunciated,  we* 
should  put  our  instrument  of  articulation 
in  a  condition,  which  would,  to  some 
extent,  he  like  that  of  an  ellipse,  and  then 
utter  a  sound  which  would  produce  a 
convergent  action  inwardly.  If  AVC 
examine  the  conditions  accompanying  the 
articulation  of  the  sound  '  Soami '  we  find 
the  first  part  of  it,  viz.,  £  Soa  '  produces 
a  hollo w  within  the  mouth  resembling  an 

r^^^4i_ 

ellipsoid  and  the  next  part  sliuts  it  up 
inwardly  with  convergent  action.  "VTc 
are  sensible  that  many  details  have  been 

left  out  in  demonstrating  that  the  sound 
/       /     j     / 

f  lladhasoami '  is  the  nearest  approach  in 
articulate  speech  to  the  sounds  accom 
panying  the  first  spiritual*outflow  ;  but 
from  what  we  have  said,  it  may  be 
assumed,  with  a  fair  degree  of  probability, 
that  the,,  demonstration,  although  incom 
plete  to  some  extent,  is  not  illogical,,  and 


ART.  71  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  161 

that  it  is  a  step  in  advance  of  the  state 
ments  made  about  the  efficacy  and  form& 
of  holy  names  made  on  the  basis  of  revela 
tion  alone.  The  demonstration  we  have 
attempted  to  present  is  not  of  prime  im 
portance,  as  anything  in  the  shape  of  theory 
alone  is  ineffectual.  It  is  experimentation 
alone  which  leads  to  practical  results  every 
where,  and  we  would,  therefore,  lay  special 
stress  that  in  considering  the  arguments, 
we  have  set  forth  above,  the  investigation 
should  not  end  without  a  practical  test. 
What  the  marvellous  effect  of  the  supreme 
holy  name,  Iladhasoami  is,  in  respect  of 
the  concentration  it  produces  at  the  spiri 
tual  centre  and  in  overcoming  the  outward 
and  material  influences,  can  be  experi 
enced  after  a  short  trial,  if  the  august  name 
be  spiritually  repeated  in  the  correct  way. 

71 — KABIR  SAHEB'S  REFERENCE  TO  THE 

'       •//••' 

SUPREME  NAME  RADHASOAMI 

Wo  have  already  said  that  Kabir  Saheb 
lias  made  a  reference  to  the  august  holy 

K 


162  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

name   mentioned   above    in   one   of   His 
holy  pieces. 

The  verse  which  contains  this  reference 
is  :  — 


The  English  version  of  the  couplet  we 

have  quoted  will  be  as  follows  :  — 

7  -^     * 

Kabir  saith,  —  The  true  spiritual  guide 

has  shown  the  current  of  the  inaccessible  : 

/     / 

transpose  it,  affix  it  to  Soami,  and  then 
perform  the  repetition. 

The  term  6  transpose  '  means  that  the  two 
letters  '  dha  '  and  '  ra  '  which  constitute 
the  word  '  dhara  '  (current)  should  be 
transposed,  that  is  to  say,  the  expres 
sion  '  dhara  '  should  be  converted  into 
4  Kadha  '  and  then  affixed  to  the  expres 

sion  '  Soami/    and   the    two    expressions 

/      /     /  • 
combined,     viz.,     '  Radhasoami  '    should 

be  repeated. 


ART.  72  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  163 

72 — DISTINCTIVE  FEATURES  OF    THE 

EFFICACY    OF   THE    THREE 

METHODS  OF  PRACTICE 

We  have  now  completed  the  explana 
tion    of     the     three     different     spiritual 
methods,  by  which    the  development  of 
the  spiritual  force  and  the  ascent  of  the 
spiritual    entity    to    higher    spheres    are 
accomplished.     The   method   of   spiritual 
-or  internal /  repetition  of  the   holy  name, 
Iladhasoami   at   the  focus  of  the  spirit- 
entity,    and    the    contemplation    of    the 
image  of  a  living  true  spiritual  guide  or 
-adept  at  the  same  spot  are  usually  per 
formed  during  the  earlier  portion   of   a 
devotee's  spiritual  training  with  the  object 
of    spiritual   concentration   and   develop 
ment  of  the  latent  spiritual  powers.     This 
preliminary   training    endows   the    spirit 
with  sufficient  energy  to  attend   to   the 
Bound-practice  later  on.     The  two  preli 
minary  modes,  referred  to,  are,  however, 
not  discarded  with  the  commencement  of 


164  S  PHUT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  IT 

the  sound-practice.  They  are  all  along- 
continued  as  part  of  the  daily  spiritual 
training.  The  methods  of  repetition  and 
contemplation  are  at  a  later  stage  per 
formed  at  centres  higher  than  that  of  the 
spirit- entity,  and  they  are  as  efficacious  in 
awakening  the  potentialities  of  the  higher- 
spheres  as  they  are  in  respect  of  the 
potentiality  of  the  spirit-centre.  If  the 
adept,  however,  belongs  to  the  second 
grand  division  of  creation,  the  contem 
plation  of  his  form  has  no  effect  when  it 
is  performed  at  centres  situated  beyond 
the  centres  appertaining  to  the  regions  of 
the  Universal  Mind  or  Brahm.  On  the 
contrary,  it  would  constitute  a  positive 
obstacle,  if  this  course  was  persisted  in. 
The  contemplation  of  the  form  of  an 
adept  of  the  spiritual  region,  viz.,  of  a 
Sant  Sat  guru  alone  is  prescribed.  Of 
course  the  contemplation  of  the  image  of 
such  a  guide  at  lower  centres  is  also  very 
beneficial,  and  the  efficacy  of  this  process- 
is  not  confined  to  the  centres  of  the  purely 


ART.  73  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  165 

spiritual  regions.  This  is  the  ground  for 
prescribing  the  contemplation  of  a  Saint's 
image  from  the  commencement  of  the 
spiritual  training.  The  above  remarks, 
mutatis  mutandis,  apply  to  the  repetition 
of  the  holy  name  of  Brahm,  viz.,  '  Om  ' 
and  to  the  repetition  of  the  supreme 

11  Ty  'J ii  *        '    < 

holy  name,  liadhasoami. 

73 — CONTEMPLATION    OF    FORM   DURING 
PERIODS   OF   INTERREGNUM 

We  have  already  said  that  the  contem 
plation  of  the  form  of  a  living  true  guide 

/     /     /    ^ 
is    the    one    prescribed    in    Radhasoami 

religion.  From  this  it  may  be  naturally 
inferred  that  the  practice  of  this  method 
is  suspended  during  such  periods  as  a  true 
spiritual  guide  is  not  present.  Such  is, 
however,  not  exactly  the  case.  During 
the  interregnum,  so  to  say,'  the  image  of 
the  last  spiritual  guide  is  contemplated, 
and  the  process  is  attended  with  spiritual 
concentration ;  but  there  is  a  difference 
in  degree  of  concentration  produced  by 


166  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

such  contemplation  and  that  produced  by 
the  contemplation  of  the  form  of  a  living- 
spiritual  guide.  The  difference  may  not 
be  inaptly  described  as  being  somewhat 
similar  to  the  difference  between  the 
feelings  aroused  by  looking  at  the 
likeness  of  a  friend  or  relative  who  has 
departed  and  those  generated  by  their 
thoughts  when  they  are  alive.  In  the 
former  case,  sorrow  at  the  separation  is 
the  prevailing  characteristic*  in  the  latter 
case,  living  interest  and  mutual  affection, 
felicity,  and  help  are  the  predominant 
features. 

74 — EXACT  PROCESSES    OF    DEVOTIONAL 
METHODS    CONFIDENTIAL 

Our  explanations  of  the  three  methods 
of  devotion,  referred  to,  indicate  the  prin 
ciples  of  the  practice  and  the  results  which 
take  place  by  their  performance.  The 
exact  processes  for  the  performance  of 
those  practices  constitute  the  confidential 
portion  of  the  religion  revealed  by  the 


ART.  75  SPIRIT-ELEVATION  167 

/       /  '    /     ' 

gracious  Radhasoami.  They  are  explained 
at  the  time  of  initiation^,  which,  however, 
consists  of  the  explanation  of  the  methods 
alone,  and  is  not  accompanied  hy  any 
rituals  or  other  secondary  adjuncts.  The 
person  initiated  is,  however,  given  clearly 
to  understand  that  he,  as  a  gentleman,  is 
under  a  solemn  obligation,  not  to  reveal 
the  methods  of  the  practices  referred  to. 
No  oaths  are,  however,  taken,  as  a  person 
who  cannot % stick  to  a  solemn  promise 
made  by  him  is  wanting  in  honour,  and 
oaths  are  equally  ineffectual  in  his  case. 

75 — INFLUENCE  OF  TEMPORAL  CONDITIONS,. 
INCLINATIONS,  AND  DESIRES  ON  PRACTICE 

The  practice  of  the  spiritual  training 
explained  by  us  is  very  largely  influenced 
by  the  temporal  conditions  which  are 
peculiar  to  a  devotee's  private  and  public 
life,  by  his  habits  and  food,  by  his 
behaviour  towards  others,  by  the  intensity 
of  his  desire  for  name  and  fame,  by  the 
strength  of  his  attachment  to  his  effects- 


168  SPIRIT-DEVELOPMENT        PART  II 

and  relatives,  and  generally  by  the  ties  of 
this  world  of  whatever  description  they 
may  be.  The  rules  of  conduct  prescribed 
in  respect  of  all  these  classes  of  influences 
will  be  described  later  on  in  the  conclud 
ing  portion  of  the  part  of  this  volume 
assigned  to  karmas,  i.  e.,  the  actions 
performed  by  spirit-entities.  Meanwhile, 
we  proceed  to  describe  and  explain  the 
order,  economy,  and  object  of  the  creation, 
a,s  the  actions  of  the  denizens  of  creation 
.^are  largely  affected  by  creational  laws,  and 
their  comprehension  will  not  be  complete 
^without  a  previous  acquaintance  with  the 
1  aws  of  creation. 


PART    III 

Evolution  of  Creation,  /.  e.,  True  Order, 
Economy,  and  Object  of  Creation 

76 — CONDITION  BEFORE  CREATION 

§N  describing  the  order  of  creation,  it 
is     essential     that     the     condition 

preceding  rachand,  i.  e.,  the  evolution 
of  creation,  should  be  clearly  compre 
hended  in  the  first  place.  We  accordingly 
proceed  to  present  an  outline  of  that 
condition.  As  theories  and  deductions 
bas?d  upon  our  experience  are  alone 
entitled  to  scientific  recognition,  we  must 
seek  in  the  nature  within  our  ken  for  the 
necessary  materials  to  delineate  the  condi 
tion  referred  to.  We  find  that  if  we 
commence  a  process  of  destruction  of 
everything  in  creation,  the  result  will  be 
a  transformation  into  subtler  conditions, 
which  eventually  would  lead  to  a  state 
instinct  with  energy,  but  capable  of 


170  CREATION  PART  III 

differentiation   into   the   various    degrees, 
already  existent  in  creation.     This  state 

Gray,  in  the  absence  of  a  better  expression, 
e  called  the  lower  stratum  of  energy, 
f  such  had  not  been  the  case,  the  crea 
tion,  as  it  is,  would  not  have  been  possible. 
It  need  hardly  be  remarked  that  the 
premiss  we  have  formulated  is  based  upon 
an  unquestioned  fact,  viz.,  that  the  exist 
ing  creation  is  capable  of  inversion  in  the 
manner  mentioned  above.  The  distinctive 
feature  of  matter,  as  compared  with  force, 
is  the  restrictive  influence  exercised  by  it 
over  the  latter.  The  force  imbibed  by 
the  individual  constituents  of  matter, 
which  may  be  atoms,  ions,  or  something 
subtler  still,  is  always  constrained  ;  and  if 
we  push  our  research  to  the  extreme,  we 
naturally  fall  back  upon  a  condition 
which  is  one  of  a  field  made  up  of  innu 
merable  points,  at  which  innumerable 
currents  of  forces  are  acting  in  a  self- 
convergent  direction,  and  producing  a 
vacuum  of  energy,  so  to  say.  This  is  the 


ART.  77  ITS   ECONOMY  171 

reason  why  the  ultimate  characteristic  of 
the  points,  referred  to,  was  distinguishable 
from  that  of  energy  itself,  that  is  to  sa}V 
the  energy  was  latent  in  the  points  them- 
wires,  although  they  were  the  means  by 
which  energy  had  acted  in  a  convergent 
direction  within  itself. 

77 — POLARISATION  OF  THE  PRIME  ENERGY 

It  appears  to  be  desirable  to  indicate 
more  clearly  what  we  mean  by  the  use 
of  the  expression  6  latent  energy '  men 
tioned  above.  When  energy  is  withdrawn 
from  a  plane  which  is  not  its  original 
plane  of  existence  to  the  original  plane 
itself,  but  is  capable  of  manifesting  itself 
at  the  other  plane,^it  is  said  to  be  '  latent  *• 
at  that  plane.  This  withdrawal  of  energy 
gave  rise  to  a  field  of  inanition  of  the 
kind,  referred  to,  and  constituted  the 
lower  pole  of  the  eternal  polarisation  of 
the  prime  energy.  If  such  an  eternal 
polarisation  did  not  exist,  no  subsequent 
polarisation  would  have  been  possible,  and 


172  CREATION  PART  III 

polarisation  of  the  kind  met  with  every 
where  in  all  forces  of  nature  would  have 
been  non-existent. 

78 — ETERNAL  POLARISATION  IN  THE 
SUPREME  BEING 

We  have  already  stated  in  Article  11 
that  the  spirit-force  is  the  one  which 
possesses  prime  energy,  and  that  the 
forces  of  nature  have  heen  evolved  hy  the 
association  of  this  energy  with  media  of 
different  degrees.  We  have  also  said  that 
the  source  of  this  prime  spiritual  energy, 
which  is  all-powerful,  all-wise,  and  all- 
blissful,  is  the  true  Supreme  Being 
Himself.  The  inference,  from  what  we 
have  stated  above,  would  accordingly  be 
that  there  was  an  eternal  polarisation  in 
the  Supreme  Being  Himself. 

79 — THE  TWO  POLES 

The  region  from  which  the  spiritual 
force  had  been  withdrawn  to  some  extent, 
was,  in  the  technical  language  of  the 


ART.  71)  ITS  ECONOMY  178 

religion  of  the  Saints,  His  Feet,  the  other 
portion,  viz.,  where  the  spiritual  force  was 
at  its  full,  heing  His  Head.  In  scientific 
language,  the  two  poles  may  be  spoken 
of  as  the  positive  and  negative  spiritual 
poles. 

It  is  desirable  to  observe  here  that 
there  was  not  a  complete  absence  of 
spirituality  from  the  negative  pole. 
There  was  considerable  residual  spiritual 
energy  in  that  pole  also,  but  there  was, 
of  course,  less  intensity.  The  impress 
of  this  eternal  condition  is  to  be  found 
in  the  fact  that  the  coarsest  and  densest 
matter  is  not  completely  devoid  of  energy. 

The  idea  of  the  existence  of  eternal 
polarisation,  of  the  kind  we  have  been 
speaking  of,  may  naturally  introduce  an 
association  of  finitude  in  the  infinite, 
as  our  ideas  of  polarisation  are  always 
associated  with  finiteness  of  both  poles. 
In  comprehending  the  condition  of  the 
infinite,  such  associations  should  not, 
however,  be  pressed  forward  in  all  their 


174  CREATION  PART  III 

-details,  and  the  difference  in  degree  in 
the  intensity  of  the  spiritual  force  at  the 
two  poles  should  alone  be  kept  in  view. 
If  we  liken  the  negative  and  the  positive 
poles^  respectively,  to  a  cloud  floating  in 
the  sky  and  the  sky  itself,  this  would  be 
the  nearest  approach  in  visual  presenta 
tion  to  the  polarisation  we  have  been 
speaking  of.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  say 
that  this  illustration  at  once  dispels  the 
idea  of  finitude,  which  may  have  arisen  in 
-consequence  of  our  association,  inasmuch 
as  the  cloud  does  not  in  any  sense  impose 
-a  limitation  in  the  surrounding  sky. 

80 — THE    INEFFABLE    REFULGENCE    OF 
THE    INFINITE    POLE 

The  Supreme  Being,  besides  being  all- 
powerful,  all-wise,  all-blissful,  is  also  all- 
luminous.  All  forces  of  nature,  when  they 
are  reduced  to  the  subtlety  of  electricity, 
can  manifest  themselves  in  a  highly 
refulgent  condition,  where  the  resistance 
of  the  enveloping  medium  is  overcome. 


ART.  81  ITS  ECONOMY  175 

What  must  then  be  the  refulgence  of  the 
spirit-force,  which  is  by  far  subtler  than 
-electricity,  and  which   imparts  its  energy 
to  the  electric  force  itself.     Our  ordinary 
faculties  of  experience    and    imagination 
are  so  insignificant  that  it  is  impossible  to 
conceive  the  immensity  of  the  refulgence 
and  grandeur  which  adorn   the  beatitude 
of   the   august  Supreme  Being.     If   our 
vision  were  so  empowered  that  the  light 
and  joy  could  be  perceived  and  enjoyed  by 
us  in  the  case  in  which  the  refulgence  of 
billions   and   billions    of   solar  orbs  were 
concentrated  at   one   point  at   the   same 
moment,  the  light  and  ecstasy  produced 
by  such  a  condition  would  still   represent 
the    refulgence    and    the    glory   of    the 
Supreme  Being  on  the  same  tiny  scale  as 
the  waves  and  the  grandeur  of  the  ocean 
are  represented  by  a  drop  of  its  water. 

81 — THE  NETHER  POLE,  SOURCE  OF  CREATION 

Prom  what   we   have   stated   above,  a 
very  rough  conception  can  be  formed  of 


176  CREATION  PART  III 

the   ineffable   refulgence  of   the    infinite 

pole   of  supreme  spirituality.     We  shall 

now  present  a  similar  outline  of  the  lower 

pole,  viz.,  that  situated  at  the  feet  of  the 

Supreme  Being.     It  is  self-evident,  from 

the    hypothetical    process    of    creational 

inversion  explained  above,  that  the  entire 

creation  is  sprung  from  the  lower  pole. 

Now,  if  we  take  a  rough  bird's-eye  view 

of  the  creation,  we  find  that  it  is  studded 

with  innumerable    refulgent  orbs  known 

as  suns,  stars,  etc.,  in  that  portion  which  is 

within   the   scope    of    our   vision.      This 

region,  as  stated  in  Article  89,  is  comprised 

in  the  third  division  of  creation,  technically 

known  as  'Pind'.     Beyond  this  division, 

and  possessing  a  lustre  and  energy  which 

are  immensely  greater,  is  Brahmand,  the 

second  grand  division  of  creation.     It  is 

clear,   from   what   we   have  stated,   that 

these  two    divisions    themselves    contain 

such  an  amount  of  light  and  refulgence 

as  cannot  be  conceived  by  the  ordinary 

faculties  of  sight  and  imagination.     If  we 


ART.  82  ITS  ECONOMV  177 

add  to  the  light  and  refulgence  of  Find 
and  Brahmand,  the  light  and  refulgence 
of  the  purely  spiritual  regions  below  the 
infinite  eternal  source  of  spirit,  we  shall 
then  arrive  at  the  sum  total  of  the  reful 
gence  of  the  nether  pole.  For  ordinary 
purposes,  this  pole  itself  presented  an 
unbearable  source  of  light,  but  viewed 
side  by  side  with  the  supreme  light  of 
the  infinite,  it,  of  course,  presented  an 
appearance  of  paleness  somewhat  similar 
to  the  almost  lustreless  appearance  of  the 
full  moon  in  the  presence  of  the  over 
powering  refulgence  of  the  sun. 

82— SUBJECTIVE    KNOWLEDGE — 
NO   ILLUSION 

The  description  we  have  presented  of 
the  two  eternal  poles,  of  course,  represents 
a  delineation  at  the  contemptibly  low 
plane  of  human  intelligence.  But  if  it 
be  contended  that  such  a  representation 
does  not  portray  the  correct  condition,  the 
rough  sketch,  we  have  attempted  to 
L 


178  CREATION  PART  III 

present   becomes   a    matter   of   problem 
atical  accuracy.    It,  therefore,  behoves  us, 
before  proceeding  further  with  the  subject, 
to  remove  the  doubt   introduced   by   the 
possible  objection  indicated  above.     The 
theory  which  gives  rise  to  the  objection 
may  be  briefly   stated  as   follows  : — The 
knowledge    of    the   creation,   we   see,   is 
always     generated     by     the     subjective 
impressions   it   produces   within    us.     In 
the  absence  of  subjective  impressions,  we 
know    nothing    of    the     creation.      The 
impressions,    in    question,   constitute  the 
effect,  and  the   creation  which   produces 
those  impressions  is  the  cause.  Now,  if  we 
are  aware  of  the  effect,  it  does  not  follow 
that  we  know  the  cause  also.     If,  accord 
ingly,  all  sentient  entities  who  receive  the 
impressions  were  to  disappear,  the  cause 
would   remain,   but  the  effect  would  be 
gone,  and  there  would  be  a  state  which 

O  ' 

would  not  be  the  state  of  the  effect.  The 
knowledge  of  creation,  as  we  possess,  is, 
therefore,  a  knowledge  of  the  sentient 


ART.  82  ITS   ECONOMY  179 

entities,  and  not  an  absolute  knowledge. 
This  theory  is  irrefutable,  it'  the  assump 
tion  involved  in  it,  viz.,  that  sentient 
entities  alone  possess  the  functions  of 
subjective  knowledge,  and  that  there  is 
nothing  else  in  creation  which  possesses 
such  functions,  holds  good.  It  will, 
however,  be  seen  from  what  we  have 
-tated  previously  (vide  Articles  16  to  22), 
that  all  sentient  entities  are  emanations  of 
various  degrees  from  the  infinite  spiritual 
source,  the  Supreme  Being,  that  their 
distinctive  features,  viz.,  intelligence,  bliss, 
and  energy  are  derived  from  His  essence, 
and  that  the  frame  a  spirit- entity  has 
created  for  itself  has  been  built  up  on 
lines  similar  to  those  employed  for  the 
evolution  of  creation  :  in  other  words,  the 
spirit-frame  is  a  microcosm  or  an  image  of 
macrocosm.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to 
remark  that  the  subjective  functions,  too, 
of  a  spirit  are  an  infinitesimal  image  of  the 
subjective  or  intelligent  attribute  of  the 
Supreme  Being.  The  inference,  therefore, 


180  CREATION  PART  III 

is  irresistible  tliat  the  creation  appears  to 
us  substantially  in  the  same  form  in  which 
it  appears  to  the  Supreme  Being,  and  that 
that  alone  is  its  correct  form.  Our  sub 
jective  knowledge,  if  based  on  facts  and 
correct  application  of  induction,  should 
not,  therefore,  even  in  the  abstract,  be 
relegated  to  the  category  of  illusions. 

83 THE  POSITIVE  DISTINGUISHED  FROM 

THE  NEGATIVE  POLE 

Before  creation,  the  Supreme  Being 
alone  existed,  of  course,  in  a  state  of 
spiritual  polarisation,  as  already  stated. 
His  condition  was  one  of  intense  rapture 
within  Himself,  the  entire  mass  of  the 
infinite  supreme  spirituality  constituting, 
as  it  were,  a  single  being.  In  this 
Supreme  Being  there  was  110  form,  there 
was  no  colour,  there  was  no  demarcation. 
The  intensest  form  of  the  bliss  of  love, 
the  most  refulgent  lustre,  the  all-knowing 
intelligence,  the  all-powerful  energy — all 
these  existing  as  one  constituted  the 


ART.  ^  1  ITS   ECONOAI V  181 

essence  of  this  august  Supreme  Being. 
The  condition  of  the  nether  pole  which 
Avas  somewhat  different,  in  consequence 
of  a  lesser  degree  of  spirituality  from  the 
all- hill  spirituality,  viz.,  the  Supreme 
Hring  referred  to,  was,  of  course,  all  known 
(o  the  Supreme  Being;  hut  the  lower  pole 
itself  did  not  actively  participate  in  the 
all-conscious  attribute  peculiar  to  the 
complete  spirituality  surrounding  it.  It 
vvas  in  a  trance-like  condition  of  existence. 
There  was  a  gradation  in  this  pole,  the 
portions  adjoining  the  spirit-source  heing 
comparatively  more  spiritual  than  the 
portions  close  toy  and  at/the  pole-centre. 
The  spiritual  deficiency,  as  already  stated, 
had  heen  produced  in  the  region  occupied 
by  this  pole,  by  a  withdraAval  of  spirituality 
in  the  direction  of  the  Supreme  Being. 

81 — ORIGINAL  SPIRIT-ENTITIES  AS 
CONSTITUTED 

Before  creation  the  withdrawal,  referred 
to  above,  maintained  the  existence  of  the 


182  CREATION  PART  III 

nether  pole  in  its  eternal  form  of  haziness 
by  means  of  subtle  attraction.  The 
attractive  lines,  which  produced  this 
condition,  were  composed  of  innumerable 
points  acting  in  the  same  direction.  The 

mxea  action  ^constituted  the  spirituality 
which  was  ever  in  conjunction  with  the 
Supreme  Being  Himself,  and  by  means  of 
which  the  entire  condition  of  the  nether 
pole  was  within  the  cognisance  of  the 
Supreme  Being.  Similarly,  the  coarsest 
and  densest  part  of  the  creation  is  within 
His  cognisance  by  the  spirituality, 
howsoever  feeble  it  may  be,  existing  in  its 
innermost  quarter.  The  innermost  spiri 
tuality  is  thus  e^er  awake,  and  the  outer 
cover,  so  to  say,  only  becomes  uncon 
scious.  The  individual  points  in  the  pole^ 
considered  separately  from  the  united 
current  were  unconscious,  and  these 
constituted  the  original  spirit-entities. 

It  may  be  desirable  to  observe  here, 
again,  that  our  association  of  a  point  should 
not  give  us  an  idea  of  insignificance  in 


ART.  SI-  ITS    ECONOMY  183 

respect  of  the  potentialities  of  the  points 
or  spirits  referred  to.  The  individual  ray 
of  the  sun  as  compared  with  the  individual 
ray  of  an  ordinary  lamp  is  very  much 
stronger  in  lisrht  and  divers  other  func- 

o  o 

tions.  There  is,  of  course,  no  fear  of  this 
difference  being  overlooked  as  we  have 
experience  of  the  effects  of  both.  In 
those  cases,  however*  in  which  the  ex 
perience  is  confined  to  one  side  of  the 
parallel  alone,  our  knowledge  is  often  very 
misleading,  and  the  ordinary  words,  too, 
convey  different  impressions.  Whenever 
we  spea*k  of  the  '  sun,'  the  word  conveys 
the  idea  of  a  bright  dazzling  disc  as  we 
see  it.  Now,  if  one  had  such  a  strong  and 
extended  vision  that  he  could  see  the  sun 
in  its  actual  great  dimensions  and  reful 
gence,  as  we  see  an  orange,  the  word  'sun* 
when  used  by  such  a  one  would  convey  an 
entirely  different  i4e»  to  that  conveyed  by 
the  use  of  the  same  word  'sun'  by  us. 
Those  remarks  entirely  apply  to  the  ideas 
we  have  been  attempting  to  present.  The 


184  CREATION  PART  III 

spirits  or  points  should  not  be  viewed  as 
trifles,  but  as  centres  of  great  potentiality 
and  attraction  surrounded  by  covers  pro 
duced  by  their  individual  actions  as  dis 
tinguished  from  their  united  action. 
Their  subsidiary  covers  or  conditions  may 
well  be  likened  to  sub-tones  produced 
along  with  the  main  tone.  Under  these 
covers,  the  spirits  fay  in  a  comatose  con 
dition  before  creation,  owing  to  the  main 
portion  of  their  spirituality  being  united 
in  co -eternal  conjunction  with  the 
supreme  source.  The  united  action  pro 
duced  the  lower  pole  as  a  whole,  while  the 
individual  actions  produced  the  covers 
referred  to. 

85 — THE  PRIME  CURRENT  PRECEDED  BY 
COMMOTION  IN  THE  SUPREME  SOURCE 

We  have  stated  that  the  united  action 
of  the  points  represented  the  eternal 
subtle  attraction,  which  for  periods  incon 
ceivable  had  no  appreciable  effect  in  pro 
ducing  a  further  differentiation.  In  the 


ART.  85  ITS   ECONOMY  185 

fulness  of  time,  however,  an  accentuation 
bewail  to  make  itself  manifest.  The  spi 
ritual  depletion  in  the  lower  pole  which 
had  already  existed  began  to  be  further 
polarised,  in  other  words,  spirituality  in. 
excess  of  that  already  withdrawn  was 
further  attracted  towards  the  infinite  ocean 
of  the  positive  pole,  viz.,  the  Supreme 
Bring,  and  the  depletad^portion,  sh,orn 
further  of  its  essence,  ivcrdcd  further 
from  Him.  This  process  which  imme 
diately  preceded  the  creation  continued 
to  act  for  some  time,  and  when  the 
proper  time  arrived,  the  first  great  cur 
rent  of  spirituality  issued  from  that  region 
of  the  supreme  source  which  was  nearest 
to  the  lower  pole.  The  issue  of  this 
-current  was,  of  course,  preceded  by  a 
commotion  in  that  region,  and  it  was  a 
manifestation  of  the  eternal  energy  by 
means  of  a  process  of  spiritualisation 
similar  to  the  process  of  magnetisation 
(vide  Article  63),  the  object  being  that 
whatever  was  capable  of  constituting  a 


186  CREATION  PART  III 

region  fit  to  form  an  extension,  so  to  say, 
of  the  original  spirit-source,  should  he  lo 
cated  within  the  purview  of  the  Supreme 
Being,  and  he  so  highly  spiritualised  that 
any  deficiency  in  its  spirituality,  as  com 
pared  to  that  of  the  supreme  source 
itself,  should  not  he  suhject  to  the  con 
ditions  peculiar  to  the  more  accentuated 
form  of  the  lower  pole  of  which  we  shall 
speak  shortly. 

86 THE    SOUND    AND    SPIRIT    CURRENTS 

The  uniting  faculty  of  the  spirit-energy 
is  the  spiritual  sound-current ;  and  the 
centre-forming  faculty  of  the  same  force 
constitutes  the  spirit-current.  The  two 
are  dependent  upon  each  other.  The 
sound  is  the  active  form  and  the  spirit  is 
the  focus  form  of  the  same  force.  The 
sound  attracts  and  the  spirit  forms  the 
reservoir.  These  distinguishing  features 
of  the  two  currents  gave  rise  subse 
quently  to  the  differentiation  of  sexes  in 
animate  existence. 


ART.  87  ITS    ECONOMY  187 

87 — THE  PURELY  SPIRITUAL  REGION  AND 
ITS  SIX  SUBDIVISIONS 

As  the  Supreme  Being  Himself  was  in 
a  state  of  eternal  polarisation,  consisting 
of  three  distinct  regions,  viz.,  the  infinite 
region  of  full  spirituality,  the  region  of 
the  neutral  zone,  and  the  region  of  the 
lower  pole,  the  sound  and  spirit  currents, 
which  emanated  from  Him  at  the  time  of 
creation  and  were^to  some  extent^like  the 
two  currents  accompanying  the  process 
of  animate  respiration,  also  resolved  them 
selves  in  the  region  which  was  directly 
within  the  purview  of  the  Supreme  Being^ 
into  three  divisions  each.  In  the  case  of 
animate  respiration,  the  oxygen  which 
is  taken  in  conies  out  with  an  admixture 
of  the  main  constituent  of  the  human 
frame,  viz.,  as  carhonic  acid  gas.  In 
the  Supreme  Being  Himself,  there  i& 
nothing  else  but  pure  spirituality  of  the 
highest  degree,  and  therefore  the  out- 
coming  (respiration)  breath  is  steeped  in 


188  CREATION  PART  III 

this  spirituality.  The  outward  spirit- 
current  is,  therefore,  as  spiritual  as  the 
inward  current  of  sound  which  is  absorbed 
in  Him.  The  three  subdivisions  of  the 
first  set,  i.  e.,  the  polarisation  of  the 
sound-current,  are  known  as  Radhasoami* 
Agam  (inaccessible),  and  Alakh  (invisible), 
and  the  three  subdivisions  of  the  other 
set,  viz.,  the  polarisation  of  the  spirit- 
current  are  known  as  Anami,  Satyalok, 
and  Vramargupha.  As  the  spirit-current, 
Avhich  is  one  of  attraction,  extends  out 
wards  by  a  process  of  spiritualisation,  it 
has  a  somewhat  lower  location  than  the 
sound-current  itself,  which  is  one  of  pure, 
inward  action.  The  second  set  of  the 
three  subdivisions  mentioned  above 
accordingly  occupies  a  lower  position  than 
that  of  the  first  set,  and  in  spirituality, 
too,  it  is  of  a  somewhat  lesser  degree.  In 
.the  six  subdivisions  we  have  mentioned, 
the  two  currents  are  not  distinguishable, 
and  both  act  together,  their  joint  action 
-being  similar  to  the  conjoint,  attractive, 


ART.  88  ITS    ECONOMY 


and  magnetising  functions  of  the  mag 
netic  force.  The  existence  of  these  two 
currents,  however,  has  given  rise  to  the 
six  subdivisions  referred  to.  Hitherto  we 
have  spoken  only  of  the  main  sub 
divisions  of  the  spiritual  regions  evolved 
at  the  time  of  creation.  We  would  now 
describe  in  some  further  detail  the  pre 
siding  deities  and  the  denizens  of  these 

o 

spheres. 

88—  THE    DENI/KXS    OF     THE    PURELY 
SPIRITUAL    REGIONS 

Since  the  time  the  subtle  attraction 
began  to  assert  itself  in  an  appreciable 
form,  the  covers  or  coatings  produced  by 
the  individual  spirit-action  receded  fur 
ther  and  took  their  location  at  the  strata 
suitable  for  them.  The  spirits  so  shorn 
of  their  original  comatose  covers  woke 
up,  as  it  were,  from  their  eternal  sleep, 
inasmuch  as  the  individual  currents  were 
largely  relieved  of  the  strain  involved  in 
maintaining  the  individual  covers,  and 


190  CREATION  PART  III 

inasmuch  as  they  received  additional 
spirituality  by  being  drawn  to  higher  spiri 
tual  planes.  This  wakening  up  is  entirely 
similar  to  that  which  takes  place  when  the 
ego  passes  from  the  plane  of  deep  slumber 
to  that  of  the  astral  creation  appertaining 
to  trance.  In  this  condition  of  trance,  the 
respiration  and  the  circulation  of  the 
entire  physical  frame  are  at  a  standstill, 
inasmuch  as  the  main  spiritual  currents, 
which  sustain  the  wakeful,  dream,  and 
deep  slumber  conditions,  have  been 
attracted  to  the  astral  plane,  f  The  same 
remarks  apply  to  the  condition  of  spirit  at 
the  time  of  death.  It  is,  however,  in  that 
state  drawn  up  to  a  higher  plane  still^) 
On  the  arrival  of  the  spirit  at  the  astral 
plane,  it  assumes  a  subtle  body,  somewhat 
similar  to  its  physical  body,  the  materials 
of  the  subtle  body  being  supplied  out  of 
the  subtle  surroundings  of  the  astral 
plane.  Similarly,  on  the  spirits  being 
liberated  from  their  original  comatose 
covers,  they  assumed  spiritual  bodies 


AllT.  88  ITS    ECONOMY  191 

of  the   higher   spiritual  planes   to  which 
they  had  been   attracted.      These   higher 
spiritual  planes,  however,  represented  the 
comatose   strata   which   had    fallen  down 
from    their    original   planes    of   location, 
by     the     attractive     action      mentioned 
above.     This  shifting  of    strata  imparted 
•even  to  those    strata    which   had   fallen 
below   a  kinetic  energy  of  the  conscious 
united     spirit- current,     and    they     were 
thus    endowed     with     intelligence    as    a 
whole.      The   bodies    constructed   out   of 
such  covers  could  not,  therefore,  obstruct 
the  kinetic  spirituality   developed  in  indi 
vidual  spirits.     These    spirits  are  known 
as  hansas  and  pa  ram  hausas,   with  refer 
ence   to   the   lower    or    higher    spiritual 
spheres  they  belong  to.     The    spirits  of 
the   higher  three   subdivisions  would   be 
jnf/'<'m.  h (t nsas,  while  those  of  the  lower 
three    spheres    would    be    hansas    only. 
Although     the     sex-distinction     is     not 
marked  in  the  purely  spiritual  regions, 
jet  those  may  be  grouped  in  a  male  class 


192  CREATION  PART  III 

in  whom  the  sound-action  predominates- 
to  some  extent  ;  the  remaining  spirits 
might  come  under  the  category  of  a 
feminine  group  in  whom  the  spirit-action 
is  prominent.  It  is,  however,  necessary 
to  observe  that  the  two  classes  should  in 
no  circumstances  be  held  to  be  associated 
with  any  sex-functions  of  the  kind  met 
with  in  this  world. 

89 — AGAM  PURUSH,  THE  FIRST  FOCUS  OF 

THE  PRIME  CURRENT,  AND  THE  ORIGIN 

OF  LUNAR  AND  SOLAR  ORBS 

The  first  focus,  formed  by  the  issue  of 
the  original  supreme  spirit -current  from 
the  supreme  source,  became  the  first 
presiding  deity  of  the  sphere  below  the 
infinite  sphere  of  the  Supreme  Being, 
Hadhasoami.  This  presiding  deity  is 
known  as  the  Agam  Purush  and  repre 
sents  that  vast  spirituality  which  had  been 
assimilated  in  the  supreme  source  during 
the  creational  process,  enhanced  consider 
ably  by  the  union  it  had  with  the 


ART.  S<)  ITS    ECONOMY 

Supreme  Hring,  and  ever  maintained  at 
that  enhanced  kinetic  spiritual  level,  in 
consequence  of  the  connection  established 
with  the  prime  current  since.  The  great 
reason  of  the  issue  of  the  prime  current, 
besides  that  of  its  spiritualising  effect,  was 
that  the  Supreme  Being  could  not,  from 
the  essence  of  His  own  eternal  condition, 
assimilate  permanently  within  Himself, 
any  portion  of  that  spirituality  to  which 
He  had  assigned  a  stratum  lower  than  His 
own  supreme  source  during  the  eternal 
polarisation  preceding  the  creation.  On 
the  contrary,  He  returned  that  spiritu 
ality  highly  charged  with  His  own  essence 
when  the  proper  time  arrived  for  such  a 
course,  the  immensely  gracious  object 
being  that  the  nether  pole  itself,  with  the 
innumerable  spirit-entities  in  it,  should  be 
brought  to  a  state  of  conscious,  blissful 
existence,  the  potentiality  being  replaced 
by  kinetic  life. 

The  supreme  refulgence,  which  accom 
panied    the    issue  of  the  prime   current, 

M 


194  CREATION  PART  III 

studded  in  sheets,  as  it  were,  the  surround 
ing  regions  with  orbs,  technically  known 
as  suns  and  moons,  the  prevailing  energy 
in  the  former  being  that  of  sound-force, 
and  that  of  the  latter  being  that  of  the 
spirit-force.  By  means  of  these  orbs  the 
spirituality  of  the  supreme  source  was 
supplied  to  the  region  referred  to.  The 
suns  and  stars  and  other  orbs,  found  in 
that  part  of  the  creation  in  which  we  live, 
diffuse  energy  in  a  similar  manner.  The 
spiritual  orbs  mentioned  above  also  sup 
plied  places  of  abode  to  the  spirits  or  deni 
zens  of  that  region.  It  is  hardly  neces 
sary  to  mention  that  these  orbs  were  in 
telligent  and  conscious  like  the  other  parts 
of  the  purely  spiritual  creation.  The  region 
we  have  been  speaking  of  is  the  one 
surrounding  that  portion  of  the  supreme 
source  from  which  the  prime  current 
emanated.  The  sphere  evolved  by  Agam 
Purush  is  situated  below  this  region,  which 
might  accordingly  be  called  the  august 
portal  of  the  Supreme  Being,  Radhasoami. 


ART.  90  ITS  ECONOM  V  195 

90 — CREATION    OF     THE     REMAINING 

FOUR   SPHERES    OF   THE    PURELY 

SPIRITUAL    REGION 

The  formation  of  the  first  focus  natur 
ally  took  some  time,  and  when  it  was  com 
pleted,  the  Agam  Purush,  or  the  presiding 
deity  of  the  second  highest  spiritual  sphere, 
manifested  Himself  as  a  most  resplendent 
sea  of  spirit.  Into  this  vast  sea,  the 
prime  current  poured  its  spirituality, 
as  it  were,  and  became  invisible  beneath 
it.  The  process  of  creation  thereafter  was 
carried  on  by  Agam  Purush  on  the  same 
lines  as  the  original  process  started  by  the 
supreme  source.  The  sphere  of  Agam 
Purush,  and  the  lunar  and  the  solar  orbs, 
and  the  spirits  or  denizens  thereof,  were 
evolved  by  Him.  The  above  remarks 
apply  also  to  the  evolution  of  the  remain 
ing  four  spheres  of  the  purely  spiritual 
region.  It  may  be  observed  here  that  in 
each  set  of  the  three  upper  and  the  three 
lower  spheres  of  the  purely  spiritual  region, 


196  CREATION  PART  III 

the  sphere  at  the  top  merely  furnishes 
spiritual  energy  to  the  two  lower  spheres, 
but  does  not  take  an  active  part  in  the 
regulation  of  the  creation  of  those  spheres. 
The  economy  mentioned  above  is  to  some 
extent  observable  in  our  frames.  The 
spirit-entity  supplies  the  necessary  vital 
energy,  but  the  frame  and  its  functions, 
whether  they  be  subtle  or  coarse,  are 
maintained  and  kept  working  by  mind 
and  the  material  forces. 

91 — MAHASUNNA — ITS    SIX    SUBTLE 
SUBDIVISIONS 

We  have  already  mentioned  that  the 
spiritual  regions  constituted,  as  it  were, 
an  extension  of  the  infinite  region  of  the 
Supreme  Being  Himself.  The  six  spheres, 
referred  to,  thus  became  a  part  and  parcel 
of  the  supreme  spiritual  pole,  and  are, 
therefore,  immune  from  all  changes  and 
dissolution.  The  creational  process, 
explained  above,  which  resulted  in  that 
part  of  the  precreational  eternal  zone,. 

• 


ART.  91  ITS  ECONOMY  197 

.which  adjoined  the  supreme  source,  being 
converted  into  purely  spiritual  regions, 
caused  a  gap,  as  it  were,  below  these 
regions.  This  vast  i^-ip  is  known  in  the 


religion  of  the  Saints  as  the  region  of 
Muhusunna.  This  constitutes  the  barrier 
between  the  spiritual  regions  and  the 
regions  of  the  Universal  Mind  or  Brahm, 
which  latter,  as  we  shall  presently  explain, 
were  evolved  out  of  the  lower  part  of  the 
pivcreational  neutral  /one.  As  the  gap, 
ivl'erred  to,  or  Mahasunna,  was  constantly 
under  the  strain  of  the  creational  process 
employed  in  the  evolution  of  the  spiritual 
regions,  it  received  a  subtle  impress  of  the 
purely  spiritual  regions,  and  subtle  sub 
divisions  corresponding  to  the  spiritual 
subdivisions  were  formed  in  it.  These 
subtle  regions  may  be  called  sub-tones 
of  the  purely  spiritual  regions.  The 
creational  process  of  the  subtle  regions, 
just  referred  to,  was  started  by  Sohang 
Punish,  the  presiding  deity  of  the  lowest 
spiritual  region,  viz.,  Vramarguplui. 


198  CREATION  PART  III 

92 — THE    EMANATION    OF    KAL    PURTJSH 
AND    ADYA 

The  first  creational  impulse  seems  to 
have  spent  itself  by  the  creation  of  the 
spiritual  regions,  and  there  was  accord 
ingly  a  cessation  for  some  time  in  the  work 
of  creation.  During  this  period  of  cessa 
tion,  the  precreational  eternal  energy 
(action),  however,  continued  to  work  with 
augmented  speed  in  consequence  of  the 
influence  exercised  over  it  by  the  lower 
parts  of  the  already  created  spiritual 
regions.  These  lower  spiritual  parts,  al 
though  they  had  been  spiritualised  to  such 
an  extent  as  to  be  fit  for  association  with 
the  region  of  the  supreme  source,  w 
to  some  extent,  still  associated  with  the 
spirituality  of  a  lower  degree,  the  crea 
tional  action  involved  in  the  formation  of 
the  subregions  of  Mahasunna  being  not 
sufficient  to  eliminate  it  entirely.  This 
residual  shortcoming  'was  subsequently 
removed,,  when  the  creational  process 


ART.  92  ITS  ECONOMY  199 


commenced  again.  *  It  may  IDG  mentioned 
here,  by  the  way,  that  the  fifth   subdivi 
sion  of  a  set  of  six  subdivisions  is  the  one, 
which  is  endowed  with  generative  func 
tions.     For   instance,    the   fifth   nervous 

centre  _,  reckoned    downwards    from    the 

ft+~  ?*+£  W  .         .  , 

centre  of  ^the  spirit-  entity,  viz.,  that  situ 

ated  within  the  organ  of  reproduction,  is 
endowed  with  generative  or  sexual  func 
tions.  The  fifth  sphere  of  Brahmancl 
viz.,  that  of  Brahma  is  similarly  endowed. 
In  these  regions,  viz.,  in  the  third 
grand  division  and  in  the  second  grand 
division  of  creation,  the  distinction  be 
tween  the  male  and  female  generative 
functions  is  manifest.  In  the  first  grand 
division,  however,  as  we  have  already 
stated,  these  two  functional  features  are 
merged  in  each  other,  and  sexual  func 
tion  of  the  kind  met  with  here  does  not 
exist.  The  fifth  sphere  of  the  purely 
spiritual  regions,  viz.,  Satyalote-was,  how 
ever,  the  place  in  which  the  commingling 
of  the  spirit  and  sound  currents  occurred 


200  CREATION  PART  III 

in  a  pronounced  form.  At  the  next  stage 
of  creation,  these  functional  qualities,  to 
gether  with  the  lower  spirituality  imbibed 
during  the  interval  of  creational  rest, 
referred  to,  were  cast  out  as  separate 
currents.  The  first  current  which  ema 
nated  from  the  presiding  deity  of  Satyal 
that  is,  Satya  Purushf- being  the  offshoot 
cast  off  by  the  sound-current,  had  great 
kinetic  power  in  overcoming  resistance 
of  every  description,  and  is  known  as  the 
Kal  Purush$*)r  Brahm.  He  was  void  of 
the  centre- forming  capacity^  and ,  accord 
ingly  7  could  not  alone  perform  the  work 
of  creation  in  the  lower  strata  of  the 
neutral  eternal  zone.  The  second  current, 
Avhich  emanated  from  Satya  PuruslPoeing 
an  offshoot  of  the  spirit- current  of  the 
purely  spiritual  region,  had  within  it  the 
capacity  of  forming  centres,  and  was 
associated  with  countless  spirit-entities 
or  points  which  had  not  sufficient  spiri 
tuality  in  them,  or  which  were  not  suffi 
ciently  pure  to  remain  in  the  spiritual 


ART.  iK>  ITS  ECONOMY  201 

region^.  The  colour  of  the  current  of  Kal 
Purush^was  a  du//ling  bluish  tint,  as  com 
pared  with  the  refulgence  of  the  spiritual 
regions,  while  that  of  the  other  current, 
which  is  technically  known  as  Adya,  was 
-a  greenish  yellow  hue. 

(.):> — EVOLUTION    OF    THE    CONSTITUENTS 
AND  SIX  SUBDIVISIONS  OF  BRAHMAND 

The  issue  of  the  currents  of  Kal  Purusha, 
/      / 

and  Adya  from  Satyalokoentirely  removed 
from  the  sphere  that  condition  of  lower 
spirituality  which  was  not  fit  for  associa 
tion  with  the  purely  spiritual  regions, 
and  at  the  same  time  supplied  the  neces 
sary  factors  for  the  creation  of  Brahmand. 
It  may  be  observed  here  that  the  action 
of  these  two  currents  was  outward,  or 
-contrary  to  the  purely  spiritual  action,  as 
their  functions  appertain  to  the  region 
adjoining  the  region  proper  of  the  original 
net  her  pole.  This  region  of  Kal  Purushd 
and  Adya  is  known  as  Brahmand,  and  its 
upper  boundary  is  contiguous  with  the 


202  CREATION  PART  III 

lowest  part  of  the  creation  of  Mahasunna, 
which  lowest  part  is  the  sphere  of  Akshar 
Purush  (Imperishable  Deity) .  This  deity, 
being  one  of  the  subordinate  deities  of  the 
sub-spiritual  creation  of  Mahasunna,  is 
like  them  almost  immune  from  dissolu 
tion,  and  is  accordingly  called  the  Akshar 
Purush.  The  currents  of  the  Kal  Purush 
and  Adya  formed  the  first  focus  in  a 
somewhat  commingled  condition  in  con 
junction  with  the  seat  occupied  by  Akshar 
Purush.  Here  the  two  currents  in  ques 
tion  are  respectively  known  as  Purush 
and  Prakriti.  As  Akshar  Purush  was  an 
emanation  of  the  purely  spiritual  region, 
he  occupied  with  reference  to  Brahmand 
the  same  position  as  that  occupied  by 
the  individual  human  spirit  with  refer 
ence  to  the  physical  frame  and  the  mind. 
His  sphere  is,  therefore,  known  as  the 
true  Xtma  Pad  (spirit-pole)  of  Brahmand ; 
and  the  Akshar  Purush,  being  the  great 
spirit  of  the  nether  pole,  an  adept  who 
succeeds  in  effecting  a  union  with  him  is 


ART.  93  ITS  ECONOMY  203 

most  appropriately  called  a  Mahdtmd 
(great  spirit).  The  conjunction  of  Ival 
and  Adyawith  the  Akshar  Purush  Result 
ed  in  the  supply  of  considerable  vital 
energy  to  them,  and  the  work  of  creation 
of  Brahman d  commenced  forthwith.  In 
accordance  with  the  methods  em  ployed  for 
the  evolution  of  creation  of  the  spiritual 
regions,  currents  issued  forth  from  the 
tPurush,  Prakrit i,  and  the  Akshar  Purush, 
and  completed  the  work  of  creation  of  the 
spheres  appertaining  to  them.  These 
three  currents  are  manifest  in  this  sphere 
and  are  known  as  Tribeni.  The  focus  or 
reservoir,  which  is  directly  below  the  seat 
of  Akshar  Purush  himself,  is  known  as 
Mansarovar,  and  immersion  in  this  reser 
voir  of  spirituality  purifies  the  adept,, 
who  reaches  that  stage,  of  all  subtle  im 
purities  of  Brahmand,  that  he  may  have 
imbibed  during  his  upward  journey 
through  the  region  of  the  Kal  Purush,  viz., 
Brahm  or  the  Universal  Mind.  The 
point  at  which  these  three  currents  first 


CREATION  PART  III 

converged  is  known  as  Trikuti,  L  e.,  the 
place  of  three  elevations  or  prominences. 
These  three  prominences  are  known  as 
Meru,  Sum^rw,  and  K%ilash.  Here  the 

JL  GJL  Qd-  J^-*** 


two  currents,  which  had  ceme  from  Satya- 
lok  manifested  themselves  as  Brahm  and 
Maya.    As  the  original  strata  at  this  place 
Avere  comparatively  heavy  or  less  spiritual, 
the  creational  shifting  cast  out    a  large 
volume     of     cover-clouds     composed    of 
extremely    fine    constituents    known    as 
paramdnu  (molecules).    These  paramanus 
are    infinitely    finer   than    the    ordinary 
molecules  and  ions  we  are  familiar  with, 
and  should  not  be  confounded  Avith  them. 
The  deficiency  of  spirituality  in  the  region 
of  Trikuti,  as  compared  with  the  spiritu 
ality  of  the  sphere  above  it,  viz.,  Sunna  or 
Dasamadwar,    appeared   in   a   more   pro 
nounced  form,  and  the  visual  effect  pro 
duced  by  it  was  a  highly  refulgent,  red 
hue,  like  that  of  the  rising  sun.  The  three 
•currents  united  in  their  course  downwards 
from  Trikuti,  and  tAVO  fresh  main  currents 


ART. 


ITS    ECONOMY  205 


from  Maya  and  Hrahm  also  started  down 
wards.  Tlio  centre  where  these  two 
currents  took  their  third  location  is 
known  as  Saliasdal  Kamal  (tlie  thousand- 
petalled  lotus),  and  Maya  and  Erahm 
here  assumed  the  form  of  Jyoti  Xarayan 
(or  Niranjan). 

As  the  three  currents,  referred  to,  had 
started  from  a  region  of  three  pro 
minences,  the  impress  of  the  form  of 
their  location  was  imparted  to  the  course 
carved  out  by  them  in  their  descent  to 
Saliasdal  Kamal.  This  path  is  known  as 
Bankanal  (crooked  tunnel).  From  the 
point  from  which  the  united  three  currents 
commenced  their  course  downwards,  the 
path  goes  up  first  and  is  then  followed  by 
a  descent.  These  three  currents  are  the 
subtlest  latent  forms  of  the  three 
y  unas  (qualities)  we  shall  speak  of 
presently,  one  being  highly  charged  with 
spirituality,  the  second  with  generative 
functions,  and  the  third  with  the  quality 
of  destruction.  At  Trikuti  these  three 


206  CREATION  PART  III 

currents  and  the  currents  of  Maya  and 
Brahm  acting  upon  the  molecules, 
referred  to,  produced  five  distinct,  al 
though  very  subtle  and  almost  impercep 
tible,  strata  or  layers  in  them.  These 
are  the  subtlest  forms  of  the  five  condi 
tions  of  matter,  referred  to,  in  Article  12. 
The  condition  of  matter  separated  by  the 
Brahm-current  was  the  dJcdsh  tattwa 
(ether),  that  separated  by  Maya  was  the 
agni  tattwa  (fire),  and  those  evolved  by 
the  preservative,  the  generative,  and  the 
destructive  qualities  respectively  were  the 
vdyu  (gas),  the  jal  (liquid),  and  the 
pritthwi  (solid)  tattwas  (elements  or 
conditions)  respectively.  The  matter 
(or  molecules),  which  had  fallen  down 
wards  at  the  creational  shifting  applied 
at  Trikuti,  carried  the  impress  of  these 
five  conditions  downwards,  and  manifested 
itself  at  Sahasdal  Kamal  as  the  five  distinct 
elements  mentioned  above.  As  these 
elements  were  much  subtler  than  ions, 
-and  as  they  were  highly  charged  with 


ART.  (.K>  ITS  ECONCnn  207 

•energy,  they  issued  forth  from  Sahasdal 
Kamal  as  five  distinct  currents  of  radiance 
x)f  different  hues.  The  hue  of  ether 
or  sky  was  of  a  dark  bluish  colour,  that 
of  fire  of  red  colour,  and  those  of  vdt/u, 
jd,  and  prilUiici,  greenish,  white,  and 
yellow  colours, respectively. 

/•y^x  x3L 

No  soonerHthe  five  tattwas  emanateH 
from  Sahasdal  Kamal  than  they  were 
subjected  to  further  action.  The  three 
qualities  and  Jyoti  and  Niranjan,  each 
acting  on  the  five  tattwas  separately, 
produced  twenty-five  sub -constituents  of 
the  five  tattwas,  each  possessing  a 
distinctive  property  peculiar  to  it.  These 
twenty-five  constituents  are  known  as  the 
twenty-five  prakritis  or  properties. 

Concomitantly  with  the  grouping  of 
tattwas  and  prakritis  in  the  manner 
indicated  above,  the  creational  process  of 
constituting  the  sphere  of  Sahasdal  Kamal 
was  at  work.  Eight  main  currents  were 
-engaged  in  this  creational  work.  These 
currents  consisted  respectively  of  the 


208  CREATION  PART  III 

/ 

currents  of  Jyoti  and  Niranjan  and  of 
those  of  the  three  qualities  split  up  into 
male  and  female  currents  each.  With 
reference  to  these  currents  alone,  the 
Sahasdal  Kamal  is  also  technically  called 
the  Ashtadal  Kamal  (eight-petalled  lotus). 
Each  of  these  eight  currents  first  attracted 
and  assimilated  fire  distinct  leaves,  so  to 
say,  of  the  five  tattwas.  Thereafter,  the 
individual  leaves,  so  constituted,  each 
attracted  and  evolved  twenty-five  sub- 
leaves  of  tiiepratritis.  These  final  leaves, 
thus  arranged  round  the  eight  main 
currents,  produced  a  ramification  of  one 
thousand  petals,  and  the  sphere  is  accord 
ingly  spoken  of,  with  reference  to  them, 
as  the  lotus  of  one  thousand  petals. 

After  the  formation  of  this  lotus,  the 
two  currents  of  Jyoti  and  Niranjan  took 
their  final  abode.  They  could  not  go  down 
further,  in  consequence  of  the  negative 
strata  below  Sahasdal  Kamal  being  not 
suitable  for  their  energy.  The  three 
qualities,  which  had  hitherto  remained 


ART.  94  ITS    ECONOMV 


concealed,  as  it  were,  within  the  sphere 
of  Saliasdal  Kamal,  now  issued  forth  as  the 
three  sons  of  Narayan,  and  became  the 
deities  of  their  respective  spheres  which 
are  located  one  below  the  other.  These 
deities  are  known  as  Vishnu,  Brahma,  and 
Shiva.  Their  spheres  are  in  the  order  in 
which  their  names  are  mentioned.  The 
evolution  of  these  three  spheres  completed 
the  set  of  the  six  subdivisions  of  Brali- 
mand,  which,  as  already  stated  (vide 
Article  91),  occupy  the  lower  part  of  the 
precreational  neutral  zone.  Hitherto,  we 
have  been  speaking  of  the  evolution  of 
the  constituents  and  of  the  six  subdivi 
sions  of  Brahmand.  We  now  proceed  to 
say  something  about  the  spirituality  and 
the  denizens  of  these  regions. 

(.)  1       THK  SI'IKITUALITY  OF  BRAHMAND 
AM)  ITS  DENIZENS 

The  spirituality  from    Siinna,  the   top 
sphere  of  Brahmand,   down   to  the  next 
sphere,   viz.,  Trikuti,   is    of  a    very  high 
H 


210  CREATION  PART  III 

order,  so  much  so  that  it  does  not  compare 
very  unfavourably  with  the  spirituality  of 
the  higher  planes.  Erom  Trikuti  down 
wards,  however,  the  spirituality  has  lost 
its  pure  distinctive  feature  in  consequence 
of  admixture  with  subtle  matter,  viz., 
molecules,  and  is  technically  known,  down 
from  that  sphere,  as  prdti,  which  should 
not  he  confounded  with  taiju  tattwa 
(gaseous  condition  of  matter).  On  the 
issue  of  the  three  currents,  which  origin- 
.ally  started  from  Sunna  (vide  Article  93), 
from  the  lower  end  of  Bankanal  (the 
crooked  tunnel),  they  separated  into  three 
subtle  currents  known  as  irrd^plngald,  and 
sitshamnd.  The  last  occupies  the  middle 
position,  while  irra  dtfApingala  are  respec 
tively  on  the  left  and  right  sides.  These 
three  main  currents  are  the  channels  or 
.arteries  through  which  spirituality  is 
•supplied  to  the  lower  portion  of  Brahmand. 
Orbs,  somewhat  similar  to  those  of  the 
purely  spiritual  regions,  were  evolved 
by  the  three  spiritual  currents  which 


ART.  1).")  ITS    ECONOMY 

rnmnnted  from  Smina.  A  third  class  was, 
however,  formed  of  them,  in  consequence 
<>!'  their  having  taken  origin  from  three 
distinet  sources.  The  two  classes  have  the 
distinctive  features  of  suns  and  moons 
stated  .previously  (vide  Article  89),  while 
the  third  elass  consists  of  tdrds,  which 
should  not  he  confounded  with  the  stars 
we  see,  which  are  themselves  suns  and 
moons.  The  third  class  possesses  the 
distinctive  features  of  planets. 

!).")    -THE  DENIZENS  OF  THE  SPIRITUAL 
CREATION 

As  the  purely  spiritual  creation,  apart 
from  the  presiding  deities  and  the  deni- 
/ens  thereof,  wras  itself  intelligent,  the 
covers  or  bodies  constructed  out  of  the 
materials  of  such  creation  did  not  require 
any  special  arrangement  for  the  establish 
ment  of  communication  with  the  spiritual 
macrocosm.  The  covers  themselves,  as 
they  were,  served  this  purpose,  and 
enabled  the  spirits  seated  within  them  to 


212  CREATION  PART  III 

acquire  a  complete  experience  and  know 
ledge  of  the  creation  around  them.  A 
somewhat  similar  condition  obtains  in 
the  case  of  the  denizens  of  the  top  sphere 
of  Brahmand,  viz.,  Sunna,  They  are 
also  accordingly  known  as  hansas.  The 
sex-distinction  is,  however,  to  some 
extent,  manifest  in  them,  although  the 
sex-functions  do  not  exist.  The  members 
of  the  class  in  which  the  female  element 
predominates  are  known  as  hansinis^ 
while  the  remaining  denizens  form  the 
class  of  hansas. 

96 — THE  TANMATRAS — THE  SUBTLEST 
PARTICLES  OF  MATTER 

The  matter  or  molecules  which  issued 
forth  from  Trikuti  (vide  Article  93)  is  void 
of  intelligence,  although  it  is  very  subtle 
and  pure  and  highly  charged  with  energy. 
Simple  covers  out  of  such  a  material  were, 
therefore,  not  sufficient  for  the  percep 
tion  of  the  outer  world.  At  Trikuti,  the 
five  senses  were  created  in  their  subtlest 


ART.  i)7  ITS    ECONOMY  213 

form,  with   the  object   of   endowing    the 
-denizens  of  that  place   and  those  of  the 
lower  emit  ion,  with  the  necessary  means 
•of     holding     communication     with,    and 
acquiring  a  knowledge  of,  the  surround 
ing     creation.      The     subtlest     and     the 
minutest   particles,  technically  known  as 
I  n  HIH  tit  nix,    were    associated    with     each 
spirit,  and  they  formed  suitable  media  for 
receiving  impressions  from  the  five  differ 
ent  kinds  of  matter  already  evolved  there. 

97 — THE  TANMATRAS  OF  ELEMENTS — THE 

CONSTITUTION     OF     FORMS     AND 

FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  SENSES 

The  taumatra  of  akash  tattwa  was 
located  within  the  sense  of  hearing,  while 
those  of  the  remaining  four  latlicas,  viz., 
".'/"',  >""//",  jal,  and  prltthwl  were  located 
in  the  senses  of  sight,  smell,  taste,  and 
touch  respectively.  As  ether  is  the  most 
^ubtle  condition  of  matter  and  is  highly 
diur-vd  witli  energy,  the  faculty  of 
sound-perception  may  be  stated  to  be 


214  CREATION  PART  III 

synonymous  with  the  faculty  of  force- 
perception,  and  as  soon  as  a  force  is 
resolved  to  the  ethereal  plane,  it  is  felt  as- 
sound.  Here  we  are  looking  at  force  with 
reference  to  its  action  as  a  kinetic  current, 
without  taking  into  consideration  the 
eventual  effect  produced  hy  it.  When  the 
stage  arrives  at  which  the  current  forms  a 
focus,  the  effect  manifests  itself  in  the 
grouping  of  the  ungrouped  molecules  into 
a  condition  which  is  known  as  form.  The 
constituents  of  akash  cannot  group  them 
selves  in  the  manner  indicated  ahove,  and 
akash  is,  therefore,  considered  to  he  form 
less  and  incapable  of  producing  forms. 
This  conception,  however,  requires  quali 
fication.  We  have  already  stated  in 
Article  93,  that  akash  was  evolved  as  sepa 
rate  strata  of  the  molecules  evolved  at 
Trikuti  during  the  creation  of  that  sphere- 
Accordingly,  akash  occupies  a  separate 
sphere  of  its  own  helow  Trikuti,  and  with 
reference  to  this  sphere,  it  is  not  formless 
as  a  whole.  Akash,  accordingly,  serves  a 


AKT.   1)7  ITS    ECONOMY  215 

purpose  of  vehicle  of  higher  forces  in  the 
economy  of  creation.  Next  to  akasli,  ctyni 
is  the  most  subtle  condition  of  matter  out 
of  the  four  remaining  tattivas.  Out  of 
the  molecules  of  agni  (heat),  form  has 
been,  evolved  by  the  action  of  the  neces 
sary  force  which  is  applied  on  them 
through  fl/w.s7/,  and  which  is  ever  asso 
ciated  with  akasht  although  producing 
no  effect  on  the  latter,  and  which  can  be 
carried  by  means  of  the  light-currents 
propagated  through  akctsh  to  the  sense  of 
sight  and  perceived  there  as  form.  The 
carriage  of  forms  to  the  eye,  in  the 
manner  indicated  above,  is  somewhat 
similar  to  the  carriage  of  the  aqueous 
vapour  by  means  of  air.  Light  devoid  of 
all  admixture  with  conditions  of  matter, 
other  than  the  ethereal,  is  pure  electricity 
of  the  third  grand  division  of  creation, 
and  cannot  be  perceived  by  the  sense  of 
sight.  Its  refulgence  is  perceived  when 
the  spirit-force  is  developed.  All  the 
lights  that  we  see  in  this  creation,  be 


216  CREATION  PART  III 

they  stellar,  solar,  electric,  etc.,  are  ever 
highly  charged  with  atoms  other  than  the 
constituents  of  ether,  viz.,  ions.  The 
admixture  of  these  atoms,  which  in  the 
case  of  heat  are  ordinary  atoms  in  a 
condition  of  disintegration  (vide  Article 
11),  imparts  the  distinctive  characteristics 
of  the  various  forms  of  light.  The  sense 
of  sound  is,  therefore,  subtler  than  the 
sense  of  sight,  and  all  sounds  are  ever  asso 
ciated  with  forms  in  a  hidden  or  latent 
condition.  Whenever  matter  is  reduced 
to  the  condition  of  vayu  tattiva,  it  is 
perceived  by  the  sense  of  smell. 

98 — THE  CAUSE  OF  SOME  GASES  AND  SUB 
STANCES    BEING    ODOURLESS  AND  TASTELESS 

We  would  make  a  small  digression  here 
Avith  the  object  of  explaining  the  cause  of 
some  gases  and  substances  being  odourless 
and  tasteless  respectively.  We  have 
stated  above  that  the  minutest  particle 
of  each  of  the  five  conditions  of  matter  is 
at  the  centre  of  each  of  the  five  senses. 


ART.  98  ITS    ECONOMY  21? 

These  minutest  particles  are  in  the  same 
planes  as  the  tat  lira*  they  appertain  to. 
Accordingly,  a  laltira  itself,  so  long  as  it 
is  not  subjected  to  some  extraneous  action 
<>r  admixture,  does  not  produce  any  action 
upon  the  sense  which  contains  its  tanmatra. 
Vayn  alone  would  not,  therefore,  affect  the 
sense  of  smell,  or  such  of  the  permanent 
gases  as  approach  it  in  subtlety  of  their 
•constitution.  We  have  already  said  in 
Article!)?,  that  the  idea  of  five  tattwas 
is  the  one  appertaining  to  the  peculiar 
grouping  of  the  molecules  of  each  of  them, 
and  in  considering  the  subject,  this  con 
ception  should  not  be  confounded  with 
the  gross  forms  of  gases,  liquids,  solids, 
<>tc.,  met  with  here.  The  above  remarks 
apply  mutatis  mutandis  to  all  the  remain 
ing  senses. 

To  elucidate  the  matter  further  we/ 
would,  however,  add  another  illustration. 
So  long  as  the  condition  of  heat  does  not 
reach  that  stage  of  subtlety  in  which 
atoms  are  fit  to  be  associated  with  the 


218  CREATION  PART  III 

kinetic  energy  which  agitates  the  ethereal 
plane,  it  merely  affects  the  sense  of  touch 
by  the  action  it  produces  upon  the  physi 
cal  hody,  hut  it  is  not  seen  as  light.  As- 
soon  as,  hoAvever,  the  subtle  condition, 
referred  to  above,  is  reached,  this  condi 
tion  affects  the  tanmatra  of  heat  in  the  eye, 
and  light  is  perceived.  In  short,  when 
the  five  conditions  of  matter  are  so  agi 
tated  as  to  affect  their  subtle  planes,  the 
sentient  entities,  who  happen  to  be  present 
within  the  field  of  such  agitation,  receive 
the  impression  at  the  sense  concerned  and 
feel  it  as  sound,  light,  smell,  taste,  or 
touch,  as  the  case  may  be.  It  frequently 
happens  that  a  single  agitation,  which  is, 
of  course,  produced  by  energy,  may  affect 
more  than  one  sense.  In  that  case,  there 
might  be  a  concomitant  experience  to  the 
different  senses  that  are  affected.  A 
report  produced  by  a  combustible  sub 
stance,  for  example,  affects  the  senses  of 
hearing  and  sight  and  in  some  cases  of 
smell  too.  The  sense  of  hearing  on  the 


ART.   90  ITS    ECONO^M 

face  of  it  produces  an  impression  that  it 
is  much  grosser  than  the  sense  of  sight, 
and  it  will  therefore  be  advantageous  to 
explain  clearly  lio\v  the  contrary  of  such  a 
notion  holds  good. 

!)!) — Till,  si \SE  OF  HEARING  SUBTLER 
THAN  THE  SENSE  OF  SIGHT 

All  sounds,  as  we  experience  them  here* 
are  produced  by  the  action  of  energy 
when  that  action  is  communicated  to  the 
apparatus  of  hearing.  This  apparatus, 
as  it  exists  in  our  body,  is  made  of  solid, 
liquid,  and  to  some  extent  gaseous  sub 
stances.  The  force  which  affects  a  solid, 
a  liquid,  or  a  gaseous  plane  could,  there 
fore,  alone  act  upon  our  physical 
apparatus  of  hearing.  This  explanation,, 
however,  refers  to  that  stage  in  which 
communication  of  the  force  is  confined  to- 
the  grosser  planes  of  hearing  referred  to. 
All  forces,  however,  have  subtler  forms 
other  than  those  produced  as  effects  upon 
the  grosser  planes,  and  it  is  the  subtle 


220  CREATION  PART  III 

form  which  is  heard  as  sound,  as  we  shall 
explain  presently. 

It  will  be  observed  from  Article  8,  that 
constant  exercise  since  birth  has  developed 
the  various  functions  appertaining  to  the 
physical  frame,  and  that  whatever  our  sub 
jective  knowledge  is,  that,  too,  has  been 
obtained  through  impressions  initially 
conveyed  within  by  means  of  the  physi 
cal  frame.  The  subtle  media  of  receiving 
impressions,  therefore,  depend  entirely 
upon  the  physical  apparatus  for  the  con 
veyance  of  impressions  to  them.  Accord 
ingly,  when  anything  affects  the  physi 
cal  apparatus,  then  alone  the  subtle  media 
within  are  excited,  and  in  that  condition 
alone  the  sense  concerned  becomes  cogni 
sant  of  the  effect.  Now,  in  the  case  of 
hearing,  if  the  force  had  not  reached  a 
stage  where  it  could  affect  the  physical 
constituents  of  the  sense  of  hearing,  it 
would  have  no  effect  upon  that  sense, 
inasmuch  as  the  hearing  faculty  is  kinetic 
in  our  body,  as  stated  above,  only  when  it 


ART.  99  ITS    ECONOMY  221 

is  associated  with  the  physical  apparatus. 
A  converse  condition    of  communication 
takes   place   when  tlie  force  reaches  the- 
physical  apparatus  of  hearing,  /.  e.,  from 
the  physical  plane  of  that  apparatus  the 
force  in   its   subtle  aspect  communicates 
itself  to  the  tanmatra  within.     AVhat  that 
sul)t  le  aspect  is,  we  now  proceed  to  explain. 
We  have   stated  above    that    the    force 
which  all'ecls  the  physical  apparatus    of 
hearing  can  alone  he  felt  as  sound.     As 
the  constituents  of  that  apparatus  are  the 
solid,    liquid,   and    gaseous   conditions   of 
matter,  it  is  clear  that    the   force   which 
acts  upon  them  is  practically  acting  upon 
the  force  of  gravitation,  for  all  these  con 
ditions  of  matter  are  maintained  in  their 
existing  condition  mainly  by  the  effect  of 
the  force  of  gravity.     Whenever  one  of 
these    planes   of    matter    is   acted    upon, 
gravity  reacts,  and  this  reaction  is  always 
propagated  along  with  the  original  action. 
The  reaction  of  the  force  of  gravity  is  the 
subtle  aspect  we  have  referred  to  above. 


222  CREATION  PART  III 

A  further  examination  will  show  that  the 
gravity  of  our  earth  is  derived  from  the 
sun,  being  the  result  of  the  attractive 
action  of  the  sun  on  the  earth.  The  attrac 
tion  we  have  been  speaking  of  is  somewhat 
similar  to  that  of  a  magnet,  and  it  takes 
place  through  the  intervening  ethereal 
medium.  Thus  Ave  find  that  the  force 
which  is  agitating  the  ethereal  plane  in 
the  shape  of  terrestrial  gravitation  is 
.always  taking  part  as  the  subtle  factor  in 
the  perception  of  sound.  We  may  well 
deduce  the  following  general  proposition 
from  the  explanations  given  above : — 
When  force-actions  agitate  the  physical 
planes  peculiar  to  the  various  senses,  then 
they  affect  the  senses  concerned,  other 
wise  they  remain  unperceived. 

If,  however,  by  the  method  of  the  spiri 
tual  practice  prescribed  in  the  lladha- 
soami  Faith,  the  spirit-force  is  developed 
-at  planes  higher  than  those  at  which  it  is 
kinetic  in  ordinary  circumstances,  the 
-tanmatra  of  the  various  senses  will  no 


ART.  100  ITS    ECONOMY 

longer  be  dependent  upon  the  physical 
frame  for  communication  of  impressions, 
and  subtle  actions  of  various  degrees, 
which  are  ever  present  would  all  come 
within  their  cognisance.  This  is  the 
manner  in  which  persons  in  cases  of 
.abnormal  conditions  affecting  the  higher 
planes  become  for  the  time  being  endowed 
with  subtle  functions.  We  have  now 
enough,  we  presume,  to  show  that  the 
of  sound  is  not  of  that  gross  des 
cription  as  we  take  it  ordinarily  to  he. 

100 — GRADUAL  DEVELOPMENT 
OF  THE  SENSES 

In  considering  the  constitutions  and  func 
tions  of  the  various  senses,  we  have  been, 
dealing  with  the  subject  from  the  point  of 
view  of  our  physical  plane,  in  order  to 
•enable  us  to  give  illustrations  which  are 
within  the  scope  of  ordinary  experience. 
The  same  remarks,  however,  apply,  with 
necessary  changes,  to  the  subtler  senses  of 
the  denizens  of  Brahmand.  In  the  sphere 


224  CREATION  PART  III 

of  Trikuti,  the  senses  are  so  subtle  and 
hidden  that  they  are  hardly  distinguish 
able  in  the  radiant  frame  of  the  denizens 
of  that  place.  In  iSahasdal  Kama!  the 
senses  are  more  manifest,  and  in  the  other 
lower  spheres  of  Brahmand,  their  distinc 
tive  features  are  more  pronounced  still. 

101 — THE     FIELD    BELOW     BRAHMAND 

AND   THE    ORBITAL    MOTIONS    OF 

/ 
BRAHMAND   AND    PIND 

Below  the  spheres  of  Vishnu,  Brahma,, 
and  Shiva  there  is  a  vast  field  somewhat 
similar  to  Mahasunna.  Although  Ji  is 
very  much  smaller  than  the  latter.  JJiere 
is  some  minor  creation  in  this  field,  and 
it  serves  as  a  boundary  between  the  second 
and  the  third  grand  divisions  of  creation. 
At  the  lowest  part  of  this  boundary,  the 
topmost  sphere  of  the  third  division  is 
situated  with  an  upward  opening  into  the 
legions  of  Brahmand.  This  opening  is 
known  as  the  third  til  (the  third  or  the 
subtle  eye),  and  by  means  of  it  one  can 


ART.  101  ITS    ECONOMY  225 

catch    glimpses    of     the    lower    portion 

of  Brahmand.     This  opening  is  also  the 

portal    through    which    the    spirit-entity 

passes   from   the    third   into   the   second 

grand   division.     The  sphere,  referred  to 

ahove,    bears  a   resemblance    to   the   top 

sphere  of  Brahmand,    viz.,   Sunna.     This 

is  the  moon- sphere  of  the  third  division 

of  creation,  and  all  spirituality  is  supplied 

to   the  lower   spheres   from  this   source. 

This  sphere  is  above  the  sun,  and  is  moving 

along  with  the  latter  around   the  lowest 

part  of  Brahmand.      Brahmand,   too,    as 

a    whole,    is    also    subject    to    a    similar 

orbital  motion  round  the  purely  spiritual 

region.     This  latter  region  or  any  portion 

of  it,   is   not,   however,    subject   to    the 

motion  of  the  kind  referred  to.  As  we  shall 

explain  later  on,  the  two  grand  divisions 

of  creation  which  are  subject  to  orbital 

motion    are    alone   subject   to   periodical 

dissolution  also.     In  the  purely  spiritual 

region,  there  is  no  change  or  dissolution 

and  that  region  is  accordingly  immortal. 

0 


226  CREATION  PART  III 

The  description  we  have  given  refers  to 
that  individual  system  of  Brahmand  and 
of  the  third  division  of  creation  in  which 
our  solar  system  is  located.  In  the  Brah 
mand  as  a  whole,  however,  there  are  in 
numerable  systems  of  the  same  type.  The 
innumerable  Universal  Minds  or  Brahms, 
Avith  their  consorts,  the  Adyas,  as  well  as 
the  innumerable  spirit-centres  of  Brah 
mand,  were  cast  out  like  drops  from  a  sea 
out  of  the  spiritual  current  and  the  cur 
rents  of  Kal  and  Maya  that  descended  doAvn 
from  the  purely  spiritual  region  into  the 
vast  expanse  known  as  Mahasunna.  Simi 
larly,  the  innumerable  solar  systems  we  find 
in  the  plane  of  the  third  grand  division  of 
creation  have  been  projected  down  by  each 
of  the  individual  systems  of  Brahmand. 

102 — THE  COMBINATION  OF  QUALITIES 

WITH     PRAKRITIS     FORMING 

EIGHTY-FOUR  CURRENTS 

The  three  qualities  in  their  downward 
course     became      associated      with      the 


\i;T.   103  ITS    KCONO.MY  ±17 


twenty-five  iH'tikriliN  mentioned  in  Article 
IK..  and  also  entered  into  combination  with 
cadi  other.  Thus  eighty-four  compound 
currents,  vi/.,  seventy-five  of  matter  and 
nine  of  the  qualities  referred  to,  passed 
into  the  third  division  of  creation.  These 
oiu'ht  v-l'our  suhtle  currents  are  known  as 
the  rli<tiu'<txi  lukxh  (tlie  suhtle  eighty-four)  . 
The  material  constituents  and  the  func 
tions  of  all  animate  and  inanimate  crea 
tion  in  the  third  grand  division  have  heen 
evolved  out  of  these  eighty-four  currents. 
The  seventy-live  material  currents  are  in 
the  nature  of  elements  known  to  us,  each 
endowed  with  separate  properties  in 
accordance  with  the  nature  of  the  various 
forces  they  were  suhjected  to,  and  with 
reference  to  the  tattwas  from  which  their 
material  element  was  derived. 

103  —  THE    FOUR    CLASSES    OF 
EXISTENCE    IN    FIND 

We  have  mentioned  in  Article  97  that 
the  main  function  of  the  akash  tatfica  is 


228  CREATION  PART  III 

to  serve  as  a  vehicle  of  force-action,  and 
that  its  other  functions  are  hardly  appre 
ciable.  The  other  four  tattivas  furnish 
constituents  for  the  bodies  or  frames 
of  spirit,  whether  the  bodies  in  question 
be  subtle  or  coarse  like  ours.  Animate 
and  inanimate  existence  of  that  part  of 
the  creation  which  is  below  the  five  spheres 
of  the  tatticas  in  Brahmand  is  divided 
into  four  great  classes.  These  classes  are 
known  as  jar&ytya,  an  day  a,  swedaja,  and 
ndbhija.  The  first  three  classes  are  exclu 
sively  composed  of  animate  existence. 
The  fourth  class,  however,  includes 
minerals  and  other  objects  which  come  out 
of  the  earth.  Ayni  tattwa  is  the  predo 
minant  constituent  of  the  bodies  of  the 
members  of  the  first  class,  while  the  vayu, 
the  jal,  and  the  pritthici  are  similarly 
the  prevailing  constituents  in  the  case  of 
the  remaining  three  classes.  The  literal 
meaning  of  the  four  technical  words 
quoted  above  is  : —  (1)  that  which  conies 
out  of  film,  (2)  that  which  comes  out  of 


ART.  103  ITS   ECONOMY  229 

•egg,  (3)  that  which  comes  out  of  water 
and  perspiration,  and  (4)  that  which 
comes  out  of  the  earth.  The  stellar  or 
the  solar  creation  in  the  macrocosm  of 
the  third  grand  division  is  specially  en 
dowed  with  that  function  which  is  known 
as  the  creational  function  of  the  body, 
apart  from  the  subjective  functions  asso 
ciated  with  it  in  higher  animate  creation. 
So  far  as  their  material  constituents  are 
concerned,  they  are  like  the  material  con 
stituents  of  nerve-centres.  Like  the  nerve 
they  supply  vitality  to  the  entire  system 
and  are  the  props  or  supports  of  those 
systems.  The  presiding  deities  of  these 
orbs  are  not  to  be  found  in  the  material 
constituents  thereof.  They  are  located  in 
higher  subtle  planes  accompanying  the 
orbs  which,  are  suitable  for  location  of  the 
deities  referred  to.  Their  regulation  of  the 
orbs  subordinate  to  them  is  similar  to  the 
regulation  exercised  upon  nerve-centres  by 
tin1  peculiar  imperceptible  spiritual  plane 
.associated  with  each.  In  the  lowest  part 


230  CREATION  PART  III 

of  the  third  grand  division  of  creation, 
these  orbs  become  devoid  of  spirituality  to 
such  an  extent  that  their  action  becomes 
almost  akin  to  the  creational  action  of 
the  vegetable  existence. 

104 — THE  SIX  SUBDIVISIONS  OF  FIND  AND 
THEIR  PRESIDING  DEITIES 

Besides  the  eighty-four  currents,, 
referred  to,  current- emanations  of  Jyoti 
and  Niranjan  also  descended  into  the  third 
grand  division  of  creation,  viz.,  Pind. 
Their  subtlest  forms  are  associated  with 
the  presiding  deity  of  the  top  sphere  of" 
this  division,  while  the  remaining  two 
forms  of  each,  which  are  comparatively 
speaking  less  subtle,  are  the  presiding 
deities  themselves  at  the  next  two  lower 
spheres.  Similarly,  emanations  from 
Vishnu,  Brahma,  and  Shiva  have  converged 
at  the  three  lowest  spheres  of  Pind  respec 
tively.  The  emanations  from  Jyoti  and 
Narayan  manifest  themselves  in  the 
microcosm  of  a  human  entity  as  individual 


ART.  101  ITS  ECONOU  V  231 

desire  and  mind  respectively.  The 
manifest  forms  of  these  two  emanations 
in  the  human  entity,  where  they  exist  as 
rays  from  the  main  currents,  are  to  he 
found  at  the  nervous  centre  which  is 
located  at  the  heart.  There,  the  desire 
and  the  functions  of  the  mind  are  at  play. 
Their  suhtler  forms  are  to  be  found  in 
the  nervous  centres  at  the  throat  and  at 
the  seat  of  the  spirit  (vide  Article  18). 
Their  functions  are,  however,  not  mani 
fest  and  are  perceived  on  development  of 
the  latent  potentialities  of  the  spirit.  The 
three  lower  centres  in  the  human  entity 
are  similarly  imbued  with  the  powers  of 
Vishnu,  Brahma,  and  Mahadeva  respec 
tively,  and  perform  the  functions  of 
preservation,  assimilation,  and  procrea 
tion,  arid  elimination  of  effete  bodily 
matter  respectively.  The  orbs  of  Pind- 
region,  which  correspond  to  these  six 
nervous  centres,  are  respectively  the 
Spirit  or  Moon-orb,  the  Sun,  the  Earth, 
Jupiter.  Saturn,  and  Neptune.  The  other 


232  CREATION  PART  III 

so-called  planets  are  really  minor  orbs, 
and  they  render  assistance  to  the  main 
orbs  to  which  they  are  nearest.  These 
minor  planets  perform  functions  similar 
to  those  performed  by  certain  sub-ganglia 
adjoining  the  main  ganglia.  Like  the 
three  lower  ganglia  in  the  human  frame, 
which  form  a  group,  as  it  were,  distinct 
from  that  of  the  three  upper  ganglia, 
the  three  lower  orbs  of  Pind  are  to  a 
considerable  extent  independent  of  the 
group  of  the  three  higher  orbs.  In 
accordance  with  the  characteristics  of 
its  presiding  deity,  viz.,  the  emanation 
of  Vishnu,  Jupiter  is  more  or  less  inde 
pendent  of  the  Sun,  the  connecting  link 
being  the  current  of  spirituality  which 
descends  to  the  lowest  sphere  from  the 
moon-orb.  As  the  plane.  ,of  this  orb  and 
the  individual  spirit  -or  moon-orb  are  on 
the  same  level,  this  is  the  chandra  of 
astrology,  by  means  of  which  the  rashi  or 
the  characteristic  of  each  human  indivi 
duality  is  determined.  This  spiritual 


ART.  101  ITS  ECONOMY  233 

Cfl 

current  is  the  source  from  which  origin 
ally  spirituality  is  supplied  to  all  animate 
creation  in  the  third  grand  division. 
This  is  also  the  orh  from  which  another 
current  known  as  j<n-r  rltclan  (vitality 
of  inanimate  ohjects)  is  supplied  to  the 
material  constituents  of  Pind.  The  elec 
tricity  which  we  find  on  our  earth  is  a 
manifest  a  tion  of  the  non-spiritual  life- 
currenf  \ve  have  been  speaking  of.  In 
the  scriptures  of  Saints  it  is  mentioned 
as  bijJ'i  (lightning).  The  subtle  spheres 
of  the  five  subtle  currents  of  tattwas 
are  below  the  moon-orb  of  Pind,  and 
they  are  resplendent  there  in  the  hue 
peculiar  to  each.  We  quote  below  a 
couplet  which  contains  the  ideas  we 
have  stated  above  :— 


fa^T  3ffT  ^ITT  ft  II 


The   English    version    of    the   couplet 
would  be  as  follows:  — 


CREATION  PART  III 

(I)  saw  the  five  elementary  colours  of 
the  tattwas,  beheld  the  flashes  of  the 
lightning  of  the  moon,  and  then  forced 
open  the  third  eye,  viz.,  the  portal  of 
Brahmand  (vide  Article  101). 

105 — THE    DENIZENS    OF    PIND 

The  corporeal  frames  of  the  denizens- 
of  the  third  grand  division  are  constituted 
of  materials  belonging  to  the  spheres 
in  which  they  reside.  For  instance,  the 
bodies  of  the  animate  creation  of  our 
earth  are  made  out  of  materials  supplied 
by  the  earth,  whether  in  a  coarse  or  in 
a  subtle  form.  The  orbs  of  the  sun  and 
the  moon,  which  are  higher  than  that 
of  the  earth,  are  made  up  of  matter  of 
a  very  much  finer  and  subtler  quality. 
They  are  accordingly  highly  resplendent 
and  charged,  in  a  far  greater  degree  than 
the  earth,  with  spirituality  and  energy. 
The  denizens  of  these  orbs  are  in  conse 
quence  furnished  with  frames  which  are 
much  more  subtle  and  resplendent  than 


ART.   lO.")  ITS  ECONOMY 

our  own.  and  their  existence,   too,   is  by 
lai-   more  blissful.     The  five   fti/liras   and 
the   eighty-four  currents,   referred  to  in 
Article  102,    during  their    descent  from 
Biahmand  into  the  third  grand  division 
of  creation,  became  coarser  at  each  step. 
They  are  very  subtle  in   the  moon  and  in 
the  sun,  while  in   the   case   of  the  other 
spheres  their  coarseness  increases  in  pro 
portion  to  the  distance  of  the  sphere  from 
the  top  orb.     From  our  experience  of  the 
earth,   it  may  not  be  unnaturally  inferred 
that  the  ^useous,  the  liquid,  and  the  solid 
parts  of  the  orbs  are  alone  tenanted.  Such 
is,    however,   not  the    case.     The    subtler 
strata    of    each    are  also    inhabited,    the 
denizens  thereof  possessing  the   requisite 
subtle  bodies.  AVe  are  endowed  with  three 
distinct  forms,  vi/.,    the  sthool,  sukslmin. 
and  /v//v//  x/tftrirs,   (the   gross,  the  subtle, 
and  the  instrumental  bodies),  which   are 
reflex    images,    as   it    were,    <>!'    the    three 
forms   of    Braimi.     The    statement   made 
above     that     an     entity     can     have     an 


236  CREATION  PART  III 

independent  subtle  body  is  not,  therefore, 
entirely  in  the  nature  of  a  dictum,  as  it 
already  possesses  such  a  body  in  its  gross 
state  of  life.  In  our  gross  form,  the  subtle 
-conditions  are  more  or  less  latent,  but  they 
do  manifest  themselves  when  we  go  into 
the  state  of  dream,  trance,  etc.  Similarly, 
in  the  converse  case  of  disembodied  spirits, 
whose  existence  is  believed  to  be  beyond 
question  now,  the  subtle  body  is  the  kinetic 
one  and  the  grosser  form  is  manifested  at 
times.  Spirit-entities,  in  some  respects 
similar  to  disembodied  spirits,  inhabit  the 
subtler  strata  of  all  the  orbs  of  the  third 
grand  division. 

It  is  hardly  necessary  to  remark  that 
the  denizens  of  the  spheres  lower  than  the 
-earth  are,  in  every  respect,  inferior  to 
those  that  are  found  here.  The  apparitions 
of  disembodied  spirits  on  this  earth  are 
.always  due  to  worldly  desires  and  worldly 
ties,  and  in  accordance  with  the  nature  of 
these  desires  and  ties,  the  actions  of  the 
apparitions  are  marked  by  benevolence  or 


ART.  106  ITS  ECONOM  Y  237 

malevolence  as  the  case  may  be.  As  the 
three  lower  ganglia  are  mainly  engaged 
in  the  performance  of  actions  which  are 
common  both  to  men  and  brutes,  their 
functions  are  characterised  by  the  lower 
impulses  and  passions,  and  higher  desires 
and  sentiments  are,  as  a  rule,  wanting  in 
them.  The  denizens  of  the  three  lower 
spheres,  corresponding  to  the  ganglia 
referred  to,  are,  therefore,  endowed  mainly 
with  brutish  tendencies.  The  subtle 
denizens  of  those  spheres  are  evil-minded 
and  generally  wanton  in  their  actions. 
Their  pleasures  and  joys  are  of  a  very 
low  character,  and  do  not  approach,  to 
any  degree,  the  joys  and  pleasures  of 
humanity.  These  denizens  are,  more  or 
less,  akin  in  nature  to  the  infernal  spirits 
whom  we  shall  describe  presently. 

106 — THE   REGION   OF    HELL   AND    ITS 
DENIZENS 

Below  the  lowest  sphere  of   the  third 
grand     division    of     creation,     the    pole 


238  CREATION  PART  III 

proper  of  the  nether  precreational  region 
exists.  There  is  no  regular  creation  in 
it  and  it  is  a  vast  expanse  of  spiritual 
depletion,  as  it  were.  Whatever  crea 
tion  is  there  is  of  a  minor  character, 
bearing  some  distant  resemblance  to  the 
snb-creations  of  Mahasimna  and  of  the 
bottom  portion  of  Brahmand.  This  minor 
creation  is  known  as  the  region  of  hell 
and  is  full  of  torments  and  woe.  The 
denizens  of  hell  are  possessed  of  the 
vilest  propensities  and  are  ever  torment 
ing  those  who  have  the  misfortune  of 
being  cast  into  this  place  of  correction 
and  punishment. 

We  have  now  completed  a  description, 
which  is  very  meagre  indeed,  of  the 
order  of  creation  from  its  precreational 
condition  to  the  lowest  form  of  creation 
that  exists  in  hell.  The  economy  that 
regulates  the  entire  creation  has  been 

o 

explained  in  some  detail,  in  connection 
with  the  description  of  the  creation  of 
<3ach  grand  division.  The  general 


AKT.   107  ITS  ECOXOMV  239 

•economy,  which  regulates  interdependence 
of  each  of  the  three  grand  divisions  and 
•of  the  general  condition  in  each  of  these 
divisions,  requires  to  be  noticed  now. 

107 — GENERAL  ECONOMY  OF  THE  THREE 
<;RAND  DIVISIONS 

So  far  as  the  regions  of  the  first 
U'rand  division  are  concerned,  very  little 
is  required  to  be  stated  here.  They 
are  within  the  purview  of  the  infinite 
Supreme  Being  and  constitute  His  own 
region,  as  it  Avere.  At  the  time  of 
•creation,  the  spiritual  regions  were  so 
spiritualised  by  the  currents  of  spirit 
and  sound  that  they  do  not  stand  in 
need  of  any  further  spiritualisation. 
The  residual  precreational  admixture 
left  during  the  first  creational  stage 
was  eliminated  at  the  commencement 
of  the  next  creational  step  downwards, 
and  the  purely  spiritual  regions,  as 
already  stated  before,  are  now  perfect 
in  every  respect,  needing  no  change 


240  CREATION  PART  III 

or    addition    in     consequence    of    lapse 
of    time.      Compared    to    the   other  two- 
grand    divisions,     the    expanse    of     the 
purely  spiritual  regions  is  immense.     The 
case  of  those  two    divisions   is   different. 
Their  spirituality  is  not  so    complete  as 
to  enable   them  to  work   independently, 
that  is,  without  assistance.      Accordingly, 
each  part  of  Brahmand  with  its  innumer 
able  Brahms  and  Adyas  has  to  be  present 
ed   in   turn   before   the    purely    spiritual 
regions   to   receive    the    necessary   help. 
This   is   the   cause  of   the   revolution    of 
Brahmand  round  the  Satyalok,  the  proper 
distance     between    Brahmand     and    the 
purely  spiritual  regions  being  maintained 
during  the  course   of   the   revolution  by 
the   contrary    influence    of    the    regions 
below  it.     The  nature  of  the  relation  of 
Brahmand    to    the    spiritual    region,    as 
described  above,  also  obtains  between  the 
third  grand  division  and  Brahmand.     The 
third  division  is  revolving  round  Brahmand 
and    deriving  help   therefrom  as   in   the 


ART.  107  ITS  ECONOMY  241 

previous  case.  The  tendency  of  Brahmand 
and  the  third  grand  division  is,  however, 
all  towards  the  extreme  nether  pole,  as- 
Brahmand  is  situated  in  that  portion  of 
the  precreational  neutral  zone  (vide 
Article  91)  which  adjoined  the  original 
nether  pole.  The  continued  action  of  the 
tendency,  referred  to,  is  constantly  result 
ing  in  a  down-flow  of  spirituality,  which 
is  eagerly  imbibed  by  the  nether  regions- 
dry  as  dust.  Those  regions  are,  however, 
from  their  precreational  constitution, 
unfit  to  retain  for  any  considerable  length 
of  time  spirituality  of  a  higher  degree 
than  that  originally  allotted  to  them. 
The  spirituality  which  has  been  collecting, 
so  to  say,  from  the  continuous  down- 
flow,  evaporates,  as  it  were,  and  an  up 
ward  current  is  established.  This  upward 
current  serves  an  extremely  ameliorating 
purpose,  specially  in  the  third  division  of 
creation  ;  for  along  with  it,  the  denizens 
of  the  infernal  regions  and  of  the  lower 
spheres  of  the  third  grand  division  ascend 
p 


CREATION  £ART  in 

to  higher  planes,  but  this  current  cannot 
go  beyond  the  topmost  spheres  of  the  third 
division,  and  the  highest  point  which  an 
entity  may  reach  by  this  natural  process  of 
elevation  is  the  moon-sphere.  There  the 
circle  is  completed  by  the  two  currents,, 
and  the  downward  course  commences 

as;am.    This  circle  is  known  as  the  chakra 
/ 

of  chaurasi,  and  no  one  can  get  beyond  it 
unless  he  is  specially  trained  for  access 
into  higher  regions.  We  have  been 
speaking  here  of  the  regions  of  Brahmand 
and  Pind  as  a  whole.  We  would  now 
give  further  details  of  the  condition  of 

o 

individual  solar  and  Brahm  systems  of 
the  third  and  second  grand  divisions 
respectively. 

108 MAHAPRALAYA    AND    PRALAYA 

When  an  individual  Brahm  system  has 
completed  its  vast  cycle  of  ret*olution 
round  the  spiritual  region,  during  which 
period  it  has  been  considerably  ex 
hausted  by  the  assistance  imparted  to 


AKT.   108  ITS    ECONOMY  213 

that     part  of    the    third    grand    division 
which  is  subordinate  to  it,  it  comes  near 
est   to   Satyalok,  that   is   to  say,  it  is  in 
conjunction    with    the    spiritual    region ; 
and    the    influence    exercised   upon   it  by 
that    region    is    so    great  that  the  entire 
system  of  the  Brahmaud  and  of  its  sub 
ordinate     regions,     is     drawn     up     and 
reduced,  more  or  less,  to  its  precreational 
condition.     This   change  is  known  as  the 
in<ili(ii)i'<tl<in<i  (the  great  dissolution).    The 
condition,    produced   by   this   dissolution, 
is    maintained   for   such   a    period    as    is 
sufficient   to    impart   to  it  the  necessary 
spirituality  for  a  reconstruction,  and  then 
the      Brahmand     and     the     subordinate 
regions  are  again  evolved  in  the  manner 
of  their  original  evolution.     The  dissolu 
tion   of   individual    solar    systems    takes 
place    on  exactly  similar  lines,    but    the 
Hrahmand  is  not  affected  by  their  disso 
lution.     The    subsequent     reconstruction 
of   the  solar   systems   is  also    similar   to 
the   reconstruction   of    Brahmands.     The 


244  CREATION  PART  III 

dissolution  of.  solar  systems  is  known  as* 
pralaya  (dissolution). 

]  09— THE  CONSTITUTION  OP  THE  DENIZENS 
OTHER  THAN  MAN 

It  is  a  common  characteristic  of  the 
denizens  (excepting  men)  of  the  entire 
creation,  from  top  to  bottom,  that  three 
spheres  alone  are  kinetic  in  them  with 
reference  to  the  region  they  belong  to. 
The  other  three  planes  of  the  grand  divi 
sion  in  which  they  reside  are  most  dis 
tantly  represented  in  the  corporeal  frames, 
but  they  are  not  susceptible  of  develop 
ment  and  consequently  they  are  not  fit  in 
any  circumstances  for  the  establishment 
of  communication  with  the  corresponding 
planes  of  the  macrocosm.  The  planes  of 
the  other  grand  divisions,  which  may  be 
higher  or  lower  than  the  region  of  their 
own  grand  division,  hardly  find  any 
representation  at  all  in  the  economy  of 
their  corporeal  constitution.  For  instance, 
the  denizens  of  the  three  highest  spiritual 


ART.  109  ITS    ECONOMY  245 

spheres,  viz.,  of  Radhasoami  dhdm,  of 
Agam,  and  of  Alakh,  will  have  three 
-covers  in  all,  which  will  correspond  with 
the  spheres  of  the  three  planes  referred  to. 
The  most  prominent  and  active  of  these 
three  covers  is  the  one  which  corresponds 
with  the  sphere  in  which  the  denizen  is 
located.  The  other  two  are  subsidiary  to 
it,  hut  they  are  not  useless.  The  planes 
of  the  spheres  of  Anami,  Satyalok,  and 
Vramargupha  are  all  represented  in  one 
spot  at  the  lowest  portion  of  the  outer 
most  cover.  They  are  mere  dots  represent 
ing  the  lower  spheres,  referred  to,  hut  are 
never  of  any  use  whatever,  as  a  denizen 
of  the  higher  spheres  of  the  spiritual 
regions  is,  from  its  creational  constitution, 
so  rapt  with  the  bliss  of  his  own  sphere 
that  he  is  precluded  by  its  effect  from  a 
descent  into  the  lower  spheres.  He  can 
not  also  ascend  to  higher  spheres,  as  the 
creational  location  allotted  to  him,  with 
reference  to  the  degree  of  his  spirituality, 
is  immutable.  The  above  economy  also 


246 


CREATION  PART  III 


holds  good  in  the  case  of  the  denizens  of 
Brahmand.  lii  the  third  grand  division, 
however,  the  ascending  current  helps 
upward  progress  of  the  denizens  under  its 
influence  at  each  hirth  till  they  reach  the 
topmost  sphere,  viz.,  the  sphere  of  the 
moon.  The  descending  current  in  Brali- 
mand  does  not  turn  back  till  the  time  of 
mahapralaya  arrives.  Accordingly,  a 
large  number  of  the  denizens  of  Brah- 
mand  descends  into  the  regions  of  the 
third  grand  division. 

110 — INCARNATIONS  OF  BRAHM  AND  THE 

SUPREME  BEING 

/ 

To  reclaim  the  denizens  of  Brahmand, 
referred  to  above,  and  ameliorate  the  con 
dition  of  the  third  grand  division,  Brahm 
has  often  to  manifest  himself  as  an  incar 
nation  in  this  world.  His  sons  and  pro 
phets,  (i.  e.,  the  denizens  specially  quick 
ened  by  Brahm  with  his  own  spirituality) 
are  also  often  sent  with  the  same  object. 
Similarly,  the  true  Supreme  Creator, 


ART.  110  ITS    ECONOMY  217 


tin*  Infinite  Source  of  Spirit/ 
unapproachable  and  august  Supreme 
Deity  of  the  highest  and  the  endless 
region  of  spirit,  also  incarnates  and  makes 
His  gracious  advent  into  this  world,  when 
the  Triloki  is  within  the  limits  of  con- 
j  unction  with  the  spiritual  region.  The 
spirituality  that  descends  at  such  happy 
periods  is  immense,  and  the  entire  cre 
ation  below  the  region  of  the  first  grand 
division  is  highly  blessed.  This  is  the 
time  when  an  opportunity  is  afforded  to 
all  human  beings  for  that  spiritual  train 
ing  which  would  enable  them  to  enter 
the  regions  and  the  mansion  of  the  true 
Supreme  Creator.  His  advent  infuses 
spirituality  of  the  highest  order  into 
Brahmand  and  Pind,  and  establishes  an 
upward  current  which  is  the  path  by 
which  the  devotee  reaches  the  first  grand 
division  and  thus  attains  everlasting  bliss 
and  immortality.  Along  with  the  advent 
of  the  incarnation  of  the  gracious  Radha- 
soami,  the  denizens  of  higher  regions 


ft 

.  f 

248  CREATION  PART  III 

(specially  of  Brahmand)  often  avail  them 
selves  of  the  golden  opportunity  so  pre 
sented  and  come  down  with  Him  into  this 
world.     They  are  the  persons  most  fitted 
for  the  sowing  of  the  spiritual  germs  of 
Satyalok  and  the  higher  regions,  which  is 
indispensable  for  the  impartation  of  that 
spirituality  which  alone  can  enable  them 
to  ride  upon  the  spiritual  current  estab 
lished  with  the  first  grand  division.     The 
devotional  practice  appears  to  them  to  be 
very  congenial  and  it  is  always  attended 
with  success.     The  elevation  to  Satyalok 
is,  however,  not  confined  to  human  beings. 
The  seed   of    the   highest   spirituality   is 
sown  in  the   most   spiritual   denizens   of 
the   various   spheres   of  the   third   grand 
division  also,  whether  they  belong  to  the 
human      or     other      animate     creation. 
Gradually,    these    spiritual    entities    are 
endowed     with    the    necessary    spiritual 
strength  and  energy  for  the  performance 
of   the   spiritual   practice    prescribed   by 
Radhasoami  Dayal,  and  eventually  they, 


ART.  Ill  ITS   ECONOMY  249 

too,  obtain  true  emancipation  and  immor 
tality.  Saints,  as  stated  in  Article  52,  are 
the  special  sons  of  the  gracious  Radha- 
soami'  as  their  spiritual  essence  has  heen 
derived  from  Him.  At  the  blessed  period 
of  conjunction,  referred  to,  they  also  fre 
quently  make  their  advent  into  this  world 
and  perform  almost  the  same  gracious 
work  of  amelioration  and  redemption  as 
is  performed  by  the  august  incarnation  of 
the  Supreme  Being  Himself.  When  the 
period  of  conjunction  approaches  its 
termination,  the  great  dissolution  takes 
place  as  stated  in  Article  108.  By  that 
time  the  work  of  redemption  and  spiri- 
tualisation  is  also  completed. 

Ill — THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  MAN — A 

PERFECT  MICROCOSM  FIT  FOR 

SPIRITUAL  PROGRESS 

The  six  ganglia,  from  the  lowest  at  the 
rectum  to  that  situated  in  the  middle 
of  the  line  joining  the  two  pupils,  are 
all  kinetic  in  a  human  entity.  The 


CREATION  1>ART  III 

six  planes  of  the  third  grand  division 
are  all,  therefore,  represented  in  a  kinetic 
form  in  humanity.  In  accordance  with 
the  general  law,  which  applies  to  all 
entities,  the  three  upper  ganglia  of  a 
human  entity  must  necessarily  he  at 
work,  as  the  location  of  man  is  on  the 
lowest  of  the  three  upper  spheres 
referred  to,  viz.,  on  the  earth.  The 
momentum^  which  the  downward  current 
from  Brahmand^and  that  from  the  moon 
and  sun  orbs  have  acquired  at  the  earth^ 
is  very  considerable.  Its  influence  has, 
therefore,  caused  a  development  of  the 
three  lower  ganglia  (which  correspond 
to  the  three  lowest  spheres  of  the  third 
grand  division)  in  a  manner  contrary 
to  the  general  law  that  holds  good  in 
the  case  of  Brahmand  and  the  purely 
spiritual  regions.  At  the  earth-level, 
therefore,  both  brute  and  human  entities 
are  endowed  with  the  three  lower  ganglia 
in  a  highly  developed  form.  In  man, 
who  is  spiritually  by  far  superior  to  all 


ART.  Ill  ITS    ECONOMY  251 

other  animate  entities  on  this  earth,  tlie 
tli  roc  higher  ganglia  have  not  been 
denuded  to  such  an  extent  of  spirituality 
and  energy  by  their  supply  to  the  three 
lowest  nervous  centres  as  to  render  the 
former  centres  inoperative  to  any  appre 
ciable  degree.  The  case  of  other  entities 
is,  however,  different.  Their  spirituality 
being  small,  the  downward  drain  has 
considerably  affected  the  higher  centres, 
and  the  subjective  functions,  specially 
the  power  of  abstraction,  have  become 
considerably  impaired.  In  many  a  case, 
their  heart -centre  is  the  seat  of  their 
spirit,  and  they  can  go  on  living  even 
when  their  brain  is  removed.  The  down 
ward  rush  of  the  current,  we  have  been 
speaking  of,  is  very  powerful.  Nobody 
can  stem  it  in  the  opposite  direction 
unless  the  passions,  which  are  all  influ 
enced  by  the  current  in  question,  are  more 
or  less  subdued  and  a  constant  watch 
kept  over  our  actions  to  prevent  an 
unnecessary  and  improper  indulgence  in 


252  CREATION  PART  III 

them.  From  what  we  have  stated  above, 
it  is  clear  that  man  is  the  entity  in 
whom  the  six  divisions  of  Brahmand  are 
reflected  in  a  kinetic  form.  The  appara 
tus  for  this  reflex  action  is  to  be  found  in 
the  brain  (vide  Articles  23  and  24),  and  by 
means  of  the  apertures  provided  therein, 
which  contain  Brahmandic  potentialities 
in  consequence  of  the  reflex  action  taking 
place  through  them,  the  spirit  of  man 
can,  under  proper  training,  get  access 
into  Brahmand.  As  Brahmand  itself  is 
a  reflex  image  of  the  purely  spiritual 
region,  the  currents  which  establish  the 
reflex  conditions  of  Brahmand  in  the 
human  microcosm,  are  associated  with 
the  reflex  functions  of  the  purely  spiri 
tual  region.  These  functions  are  also, 
therefore,  represented  in  the  human 
brain,  and  apertures  are  provided  therein 
for  communication  with  and  access  into 
the  purely  spiritual  region.  Man,  from 
his  position  in  the  universe  and  from 
the  amount  of  spirituality  he  possesses, 


ART.  Ill  ITS    ECONOMY  253 

is  thus  endowed  with  a  cosmos  of  his 
own,  which  is  so  constructed  as  to  repre 
sent  all  the  spheres  of  the  entire  creation 
from  the  highest  spiritual  source  down  to 
the  creationless  nether  pole,  and  which 
possesses  such  apertures  and  potentialities, 
as  would  enable  the  human  entity  to  reach 
the  highest  mansion.  In  man,  therefore, 
the  true  microcosm  exists,  and  it  is  in 
consequence  of  this  unique  possession  that 
he  is  considered  to  be  superior  to  angels 
and  to  the  denizens  of  Brahmand.  Thi& 
is  also  the  main  reason  for  the  incarna 
tion  of  the  true  Supreme  Being  Radha- 
soami,  of  His  beloved  sons^  the  Saints, 
of  Brahmj  and  of  his  prophets,  £c,  having 
taken  place  in  human  form.  The 
denizens  of  Brahmand,  too,  when  they 
become  desirous  of  ascent  into  the  spiri 
tual  regions,  have 9  therefore^  to  assume 
human  form -which  is  possible  on  the 
earth-plane  alone,  as  in  this  perfect 
microcosm  the  spiritual  training,  pres 
cribed  by  Saints,  can  alone  be  performed* 


-3  I  CREATION 


PART  III 


The  spirits  of  Saints  often  visit  the 
various  spheres  of  Brahmand  with  the 
object  of  revealing  to  the  denizens  thereof 
the  existence  and  the  bliss  of  the  purely 
spiritual  regions.  As  the  denizens  of 
Erahmand  are  highly  spiritual  and  pure, 
they  find  no  difficulty  in  comprehending 
the  revelations  made  to  them,  and  they 
soon  become  imbued  with  a  strono- 

o 

desire  for  reaching  the  purely  spiritual 
regions.  When  this  desire  has  become 
sufficiently  developed,  then  their  advent 
into  human  form  takes  place.  The  bliss 
of  Brahmand  is  so  great  and  enrapturing 
that  it  is  the  higher  spiritual  revelation 
alone  which  generates  a  desire  of  the 
kind  we  have  spoken  of. 

112— THE    RECRUITMENT    OF    HUMAN    AND 
OTHER   SPECIES    ON    THIS    EARTH 

The  lives  of  the  denizens  of  Brahmand 
are  of  very  long  duration,  and,  in  the 
majority  of  cases,  the  individual  existence 
does  not  undergo  a  dissolution  until  the 


ART.  112  ITS    ECONOMY  255 

second  grand  division  is  dissolved  at  the 
time  of  maKapralaya.  "We  have  already 
stated  that  a  downward  current  flows 
from  Brahmand  into  the  third  grand 
division.  Along  with  this  downward 
current,  a  number  of  denizens  of  the 
three  lower  spheres  of  Brahmand,  and  a 
few  from  the  higher  spheres,  make  their 
advent  into  the  third  division.  As  a  rule, 
they  always  assume  human  form  on  the 
earth,  on  their  arrival  in  our  world,  inas 
much  as  this  form  can  enable  them,  if 
properly  trained,  to  go  back  to  Brahmand 
and  higher  regions,  and  also  because  the 
downward  current  takes  its  first  focus,  as 
it  were,  at  the  earth  before  starting  again 
in  its  further  downward,  course.  The 
number  of  denizens  of  the  above  descrip 
tion  is,  however,  not  considerable,  and  in 
the  vast  majority  of  cases  the  denizens  of 
the  various  spheres  of  the  third  division 
have  been  recruited  or  born  otherwise. 

It  will  be   observed    from  Article  105 
that  all  the  spheres  of  the  third  division 


256  CREATION  PART  III 

are  enveloped  by  subtle  spheres  of  agni 
tattiva  and  akash  appertaining  to  each, 
and  that  these  subtle  spheres,  too,  are 
tenanted,  the  denizens  thereof  possessing 
desires  and  tendencies  allied  to  those  of 
the  denizens  of  the  three  lower  strata  of 
the  same  sphere.  The  thoughts,  language. 

id  the  •  daily   life,    too,    of    the/j 
txtt^-4  LtriA^  &k- 


lemzens   bear  a  similitude   to   those  m- 

^  A 

habiting  the  coarser  strata.  These  subtle 
denizens  at  the  termination  of  the  term 
of  their  subtle  lives  are  often  born  in 
coarser  forms  in  the  sphere  to  which  they 
previously  belonged.  The  subtle  regions, 
besides  being  inhabited  by  subtle  entities 
similar  to  human  beings,  are  also  inhab 
ited  by  entities  endowed  with  animal  pas 
sions  and  animal  forms.  The  various 
species  of  human  and  animal  existence  of 
our  earth  are  recruited  from  the  above  two 
sources.  The  case  of  the  three  spheres 
lower  than  the  earth  and  that  of  the  two 
spheres  above  it,  is  generally  similar  to 
that  mentioned  above.  The  above  sources- 


ART.  113  ITS   ECONOMY  257 

and  the  lower  currents  of  chaurasi  (vide 
Article  102)  also  contribute  their  quota 
in  each  case  including  our  earth. 

It  will  he  further  observed  from  Article 
107  that  the  solar  systems  are  travelling  in 
space  round  Brahmand  and  that  the  Brah- 
mand,  too,  is  making  a  similar  revolution 
round  the  spiritual  region.  During  the 
course  of  these  revolutions,  the  earth  and 
the  other  spheres  often  come  near  such  cre- 
ations  which  possess  fauna  (including  man)  " 
and  flora  differing  to  some  extent  from  our 
own  fauna  and  flora.  The  conjunction  of 
the  above  description  often  leads  to  some 
affinity  between  the  subtler  portions  of  our 
system  and  of  those  of  the  creations  we 
have  approached.  Many  new  forms  of  life 
are, then*  manifested  on  our  earth,  and 
their  remains  are  often  dug  up  as  fossils  of 
the  species  not  to  be  found  on  this  earth. 

113 — PRENATAL  STATE  OF   SPIRIT-ENTITIES 

As  already  stated,  the  denizens  of  the 
purely  spiritual  regions  are  not  subject  to 
Q 


258  CREATION  PART  III 

death,  as  that  region  is  free  from  dissolu 
tion.  In  the  second  grand  division  also, 
death,  in.  the  sense  we  know  of,  does  not 
occur.  In  the  majority  of  cases,  the  deni 
zens  of  Brahmand  live  as  long  as  the  time 
of  the  great  dissolution  does  not  arrive. 
With  the  dissolution  of  Brahmand,  the 
.denizens  are  transformed  into  the  precrea- 
tional  condition^and  at  the  re-evolution  of 
the  second  grand  division,  they  are  reborn. 
The  change,  which  takes  place  on  the  des 
cent  of  some  of  the  denizens  of  Brahmand 
into  the  third  grand  division,  does  not 
hear  a  similarity  to  the  change  produced 
ordinarily  by  death.  The  descent  is  accom 
panied  by  conditions  which  are  similar 
to  those  preceding  the  birth  of  a  human 
entity.  It  may  be  observed  here  that  the 
prenatal  conditions,  referred  to,  do  not  refer 
to  the  uterine  existence  preceding  birth, 
but  to  the  subjective  spiritual  condition  of 
the  entity  which  i^  to  take  birth. 

It  is  a  well  recognised  fact  that  there  is 
no  respiration  while  the  foetus  is  developing 


ART.  113  ITS   ECONOMY  259 

in  the  womb^and  that  at  the  time  of 
birth  the  function  of  respiration  is  set  at 
work.  The  development  of  the  physi 
cal  frame  of  the  foetus  proceeds  at  the 
expense  of  the  blood  supplied  by  the 
mother.  The  sole  worker  in  the  forma 
tion  of  the  physical  frame  of  a  foetus 
is  thus  the  mother,  and  the  .spirit- entity 

which  is  eventually  to  take  seat  in  that 

^ 

frame^  is^in  a  very  distant  manner- 
connected  with  the  frame  during  its 
uterine  formation.  This  condition  of  the 
uterine  existence,  which  is  void  of  respi 
ration,  may  be  likened  to  the  condition  of 
catalepsy  in  which,  by  means  of  a  very 
subtle  spiritual  link,  the  spirit  remains 
associated  with  the  body;  otherwise,  the 
spirit  is,  in  a  large  measure,  as  free  as  that 
of  a  really  dead  person.  The  prenatal 
condition  of  the  spirit,  which  we  have 
described  above,  is  known  as  cliaitanya 
sam^dh  (conscious  absorption).  In  the 
case  of  man,  this  samadh  takes  place  in 
the  region  of  Jyoti  Narayan,  as  the  spirit 


260  CREATION  PART  III 

of  man  being  in  the  sixth  nervous  centre, 
a  dissociation  from  the  bod^opTthe  nature 
of  deathjis  only  possible  when  the  spirit- 
entity  enters  Brahmand.  The  three  lower 
spheres  of  Brahmand,  being  highly  charged 
with  the  tendency  of  descent,  are  not  fit 
for  the  samadh,  referred  to,  and  the  sphere 
of  Jyoti,  which  is  comparatively  much 
more  stable,  is  thus  a  suitable  place  for 
the  prenatal  sojourn  of  the  kind  we 
have  been  speaking  of.  After  death,  too,  a 
human  entity  is  drawn  up  to  the  presence 
of  Jyoti,  but  of  this  we  shall  speak  more 
fully  later  on  (vide  Article  114). 

As  the  third  grand  division  is  subject 
to  more  frequent  dissolution/jthan  the 
second  grand  division,  it  would  follow 
that,  for  the  purpose  of  proper  recoup- 
ment  of  mergy  of  a  higher  order,  more 

^ 

frequent  changes  are  needed  in  that 
portion  of  creation  which  is  less  spiritual 
than  the .  other  higher  regions.  For  a 
similar  object,  the  denizens  of  the  lower 
regions,  viz.,  the  third  grand  division,  have 


ART.  Ill  ITS  ECONOMY  261 

frequently  to  undergo  the  change  known 
as  death.  This  division  is  also,  therefore, 
known  as  the  mrityulolt  (death-sphere). 

114 — DJSATH     OF     MAN — ITS     ORDER 
AND    PROCESS 

As  the  destruction  of  all  the  material 
covers,  whether  they  be  coarse  or  subtle, 
which  an  entity  has  assumed  in  the  third 
grand  division,  is  a  necessary  condition 
for  the  occurrence  of  death,  it  is  clear 
that,  in  the  case  of  an  entity  whose  spirit- 
plane  corresponds  to  that  of  the  top 
sphere  of  the  third  division,  it  must  be 
drawn  up  into  Brahmand  in  order  to 
eliminate  the  various  material  covers  it 
has  become  associated  with  in  this  world. 
This  withdrawal,  or  the  order  of  death,  so 
to  say,  is  issued  from  Sahasdal  Kamal,  the 
presiding  deity  of  which  is  Narayan  or 
Xiranjan.  He  is  accordingly  the  Kal 
1'urush  (God  of  death)  also,  besides  being 
the  lowest  form  of  the  Lord  God  of 
Brahmand.  The  three  lowest  spheres  of 


202  CREATION  PART  III 

Hrahmand,  vi/.,  those  of  Vishnu,  ISm.hma. 
and  Mahadeva,  like  their  reflex  imaires  in 
the  navel,  the  reproductive  origin,  and  the 
rectum,  are  mainly  en  paired  in  the  proper 
maintenance  of  the  material  portion,  so 
to  say,  of  lower  Brahmand.  'It  would, 
therefore,  appear  that  they  are  concerned, 
directly  or  indirectly,  only  with  the  pre 
servation,  regeneration,  and  the  elimina 
tion  of  effete  matter  which  hinder*  the 
first  two  processes.  They  are,  thus,  pre 
cluded  hy  their  constitutional  power* 
from  ordering  and  effecting  the  complete 
dissolution  of  the  microcosm.  Those 
orders  are  issued  hy  Jyoti  and  Narayan. 
as  they  are  the  Universal  ^Mind  and  the 
Desire,  and  they  alone  can  regulate  des 
tinies.  Similarly,  in  the  microcosm  it  is 
the  individual  mind  and  de*ire  which 
order  an  act. 

We  have  stated  in  Article  1)2  that  Un 
original  current  of  Kal  which  emanated 
from  the  spiritual  regions  was  full  of 
very  hi^li  energy  hut  void  of  the  power 


AIM1.    1  1  I'  ITS  ECONOMY 


of  formation,  \\hile  the  olhcr  current  was 
endourd  with  Mir  faculty  ()!'  creational 
nucleus,  beini;1  an  oll'shoot,  of  Mir  spirit- 
OUrrenl  of  MM-  first  -rand  di\  ision.  The 

lii-si  ourreh^aooordingl^directfl  an  imme 

diate  subversion  of  such  condil  ions  as 
I'onn  inalcrial  COVCIN  of  (lie  spirit  -m!  it  Y, 
\\liilc  tlic  other  current  confers  spiri- 
tu;ility  for  the  nia-nilrstalion  and  de\elo|)- 
inent  of  the  hiddrii  i;'erins.  At  the  time 
ol'  death,  accordiu-1  v,  a  (lest  ruct  i  ve  cur 
rent  descends  IVoin  Sahasdal  Kanial  and 
destroys  the  covers  of  the,  human  cut  ity. 
\\'hen  this  has  been  ell'ected,  the  other 
current  attracts  the  entity  upuards  to  its 
presence,  At  the  third  //7,  a  deity  knoun 
as  Dharain  Kai,  the  an-el  of  jud-nient, 
is  stationed,  and  he  carries  out,  the 
mandate  of  the  Kal  I'urush  in  the  manner 
indicated  abo\  e.  More  precisely  speaking, 
he  is  the  locus  throui;h  \\hoin  the  current 
of  Kal  ijert'orms  its  work  of  destruction. 

The    dissolution    of    the    physical     body, 
NNC  ha\e  referred  to,  removes  the    material 


264  CREATION  PART  III 

covers    of     the    spirit- entity ;     but     the 
mind    with    its    desires   is    not   affected 
by  it  at  the   time  of   death,  as  it   is  an 
emanation  from  the  Kal  Purush  of  Brah 
mand.      Accordingly,   all   subtle   desires, 
subtle  senses,  and  the    mind  accompany 
the  spirit  in  its  withdrawal  to  the  Brah 
mand.     If    they     are     full     of     worldly 
thoughts  and  ambitions,  and  the  worldly 
j  ties  and  affections  have  not  been  eradi 
cated  from  the  innermost  quarter,    they 
constitute,    as   it   were,    a   great    burden 
over    the    spirit,    and  during  its  passage 
through    an  immensely  subtle    aperture 
that  exists    at  the  portal  of    Brahmand, 
the  spirit  is  subjected  to  awful  extortions 
for  the    purpose  of    rendering  it     subtle 
enough    to  obtain  an  ingress  into  Brah 
mand. ^  This  ,  is^   the    first    punishment 

accorded  aP/Qie^mneoide^th.     It  does 

^\    / 
lighten  the  spirit  considerably  of  its  evil 

doings,  but  does  not  effect. siich  a  puri 
fication  j  as  is  necessary  forjp.ocation  in 
Brahmand.  The  most  subtle  germs  of  the 


ART.  Hi  ITS    ECONOMY  265 

worldly  affections,  &c.,  pass  eventually 
with  the  spirit  into  Brahmand.  As 
soon  as  the  spirit  reaches  Brahmand,  it 
gets  a  vision  of  Jyoti,  but  it  is  not  allowed 
to  remain  there  for  any  length  of  time,  if 
it  has  carried  with  it  the  germs  of  the 
affections  of  the  third  gjand  division. 
The  spirituality  of  Jyoti  immediately 
infuses  life  into  those  mundane  germ^and 
they  forthwith  manifest  themselves.  In  05 
consequence  of  the  /  creational  •  unsuit-^ 
ability  of  the  germs  for  BramiTand,  their 
appearance  is  immediately  followed  by  a 
powerful  hurl  downwards.  This  down 
ward  push  casts  the  spirit  with  its 
material  tendencies  and  desires  and  the 
mind  into  the  expanse  which  is  at  the 
bottom  of  Brahmand,  where  shorn  of  its 
kinetic  functions,  it  lies  unconscious  for 
some  time,  and  then  is  assigned  an  alloca 
tion  in  accordance  with  the  orders  .mssed 
by  Dharam  Ilai  at  the  time  of^death. 
The  laws  which  regulate  the  allocation, 
referred  to,  will  be  described  and  explained 


266  CREATION  PART  III 

in  the  chapter  devoted  to  individual  acts,. 
i.e.,  karma  and  its  effects. 

115 — THE     DEATH-PROCESS    OF    LOWER 
ENTITIES 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  process  of 
m  death,  we  have  described  above- refers  only 

A  1~  &L.  '  *  * 

I  to  the  human  entity.  In  the  case  of  other 
entities,  there  is  some  difference,  with 
reference  to  the  seat  of  the  spirit  of  each. 
The  brute  creation  of  this  earth  is  in 
some  forms  so  low,  and  the  creation  of  the 
three  spheres  below  the  earth  is  also  so 
low,  that  a  withdrawal  into  Brahmand  is 
not  necessary  for  the  production  of  death. 
The  deity,  who  presides  at  the  fourth 
sphere  of  the  third  division.and  is  known 
as  Shiva  or  Pashupati  (Lord  of  brutes),  is 
a  reflex  entity  from  Xarayan,  and  his 
functions  and  those  of  the  reflex  Jyoti, 
which  accompany  him,  are  similar,  in 
respect  of  the  death  of  brutes  under  his 
sway,  to  those  exercised  by  Jyoti 
Naravan. 


ART.  117  ITS  ECONOMY  2G7 

llG  —  THE  DEATH-PROCESS  OF    ENTITIES 
ENTITLED  TO  ASSUME  HUMAN  FORM 

The  death  of  the  entities  who  are 
ascending  by  the  higher  current  is,  how 
ever,  different^  when  they  approach  the 
stage  after  which  they  will  he  entitled  to 
assume  the  human  form.  In  such  cases 
their  spirit  is  drawn  up  to  Brahmand  after 
death,  and  is  accorded  a  clwitdiu/a 
samadh  of  the  kind  which  precedes  the 
birth  of  a  human  entity.  The  spirits  of 
the  sun  and  moon  orbs  of  the  third  divi 
sion  are  at  the  time  of  their  death  drawn 
up  into  Brahmand,  and  after  undergoing 
the  necessary  samadh  they  are  born  as 


men.  ->*,i^« 

117  —  CONFLICT   BETWEEN    SPIRIT-FORCE 
AND    THE    FORCES    OF    NATURE 

The  vital  force  has  to  contend  against 
great  opposition  during  its  life  in  the 
third  grand  division  of  creation,  as  the 
tendency  of  all  the  forces  of  nature  i^ 


268  CREATION  PART  III 

contrary  in  its  character  to  that  of 
the  spirit-force.  The  natural  forces, 
referred  to,  all  tend  towards  the 
nether  pole,  while  the  inherent  charac 
teristic  of  the  spirit-force,  which  is  to 
he  found  in  the  innermost  quarter 
of  the  spirit,  is  in  the  direction  of  the 
purely  spiritual  regions.  For  a  time, 
the  spirit-force  is  ahle  to  overcome,  so 
to  say,  the  action  of  the  natural  forces, 
but  eventually  they  prevail,  and  the 
physical  frame,  which  the  spirit-energy 
has  constituted,  becomes  damaged  to 
such  an  extent  that  a  further  continuance  frf  ^ 
in  it  is  not  possible.  The  work  of 
dissolution  is  then  completed  by  the 
death-current  mentioned  in  Article  114. 

118 — METEMPSYCHOSIS — ITS    CHARACTER 
AND    SCOPE 

The  worldly  desires  and  tendencies  of 
an  entity  are  not  eradicated  by  the 
change  referred  to  above,  and  the  entity 
is  again  attracted  towards  the  material 


ART.  118  ITS  ECONOH  V 

plane  which  has  affinities  with  the  desires 
in  question,  and  is  reborn  there  in  such 
a  species  as  possesses  a  differentia  similar 
to  that  of  the  predominant  desire  of  the 
entity.  The  change,  we  have  described^ 
which  results  in  the  translation  of  an 
entity  from  one  plane  to  another,  is 
known  as  divdyawcui  (coming  and  going : 
metempsychosis).  As  the  forces  of  the 
third  grand  division  and  of  the  Brah- 
mand,  too,  are  predominant  in  their  action 
towards  the  nether  pole,  the  inherent  effort 
of  the  spirit-entity  to  liberate  itself  is 
ineffectual.  It  may  go  up  to  some  length 
in  the  higher  direction  according  to  the 
natural  process  described  in  Article  107, 
but  its  true  emancipation  is  not  possible, 
unless  it  is  aided  by  an  adept  of  the 
purely  spiritual  region,  and  unless  it 
undergoes  a  regular  course  of  spiritual 
training  which  leads  to  that  region.  We 
shall  describe  more  fully  in  the  chapter 
on  karma  the  laws  which  regulate  the, 
various  circumstances  and  the  forms  of 


270  CREATION  PART  III 

spirit-entity   since  its  birth  at  the  time 
of  creation. 

As  the  purely  spiritual  region  and 
its  denizens  are  not  subject  to  any  change 
or  dissolution,  the  transmigration  of  soul 
does  not  form  part  of  the  economy  that 
obtains  in  that  region.  Saints,  as  already 
previously  stated,  descend  into  Brahmand 
and  the  lower  regions  from  the  first 
division  of  creation  with  the  merciful 
object  of  liberating  spirits  from  the 
thraldom  of  mind  and  matter  and  of 
•otherwise  elevating  the  spiritual  status 
of  the  lower  creations.  Such  advents 
are,  however,  not  in  the  nature  of 
ordinary  metempsychosis,  as  the  kinetic 
communication  of  the  spirit  of  Saints  with 
their  august  Supreme  Father,  Radhasoami, 
is  in  no  way  affected  by  their  incarnation 
as  the  true  spiritual  guide  on  this  earth. 
In  the  case  of  other  entities,  the  know 
ledge  of  previous  births  and  prenatal 
connections  does  not  generally  survive 
in  a  present  birth.  Authenticated 


ART.  118  ITS  ECONOMY  271 

instances  arc,  however,  not  wanting,  which 
unmistakahly  demonstrate  the  survival 
of  some  knowledge  of  previous  lives. 
Such  extraordinary  instances  are  fraught 
with  considerable  scientific  interest,  and 
they  should  be  sought  and  reduced  once 
for  all  to  a  recognised  scientific  principle. 
Besides  throwing  considerable  light  upon 
the  nature  of  the  spirit-force,  a  scientific 
enquiry  into  the  occurrences  would  yield 
a  direct  and  positive  proof  of  the  theory 
of  metempsychosis.  The  argumentative 
justification  of  this  theory  is  clearly 
inferable  from  the  explanations  we  have 
given  of  the  creational  economy  of 
Brahmand  and  of  the  third  grand 
•division  of  creation.  It  will,  however, 
be  more  satisfactory  ^  if  direct  evidence 
-of  the  kind,  referred  to,  is  obtained.  As 
regards  Brahmand,  the  transmigration 
of  soul  'is  not  of  such  frequent  occur* 
rence  as  it  is  in  the  third  grand 
division  of  creation.  The  object  of 
metempsychosis  is,  (1)  to  endow  spirits-, 


272  CREATION  PART  III 

to    some    extent  j  with    fresh     spiritual 
energy  at  each  birth,  (2)  to  give  them  a 
chance^  at  intervals  ,  for  true  reformation, 
(3)    to    afford    them    an    opportunity  of 
acquiring  personal  experience  of  the  conse 
quences  of  evil  actions,  and  (4)  to  lighten^ 
the  burden  of  their  material  associations* 
to   some   extent,   which   is   inevitable  iii 


consequence  of  their  low  allocation  by 
frequent  agitations  of  death  and  misfor 
tune.) 

119—  THE  FOUR  STAGES  OF  LIFE 

It  appears  to  be  a  matter  of  onlinary 
observation    that     the    life    of 


specially  that  of  man,  is  divided  into  four 
distinct  parts.  The.  first  part  or  stage 
extends  from  the  time  of  birth  to  the 
attainment  of  puberty.  This  period  is. 
characterised  by  vivacity,  want  of  cares 
and  anxiety,  and  an  absence  of  the 
feelings  of  the  sex.  In  the  absence  of 
extraordinary  circumstances  to  the  con 
trary,  this  period  is  also  one  of  innocent 


ART.  119  ITS   ECONOMY  273 

pleasure  and  joy,  the  smallest  trifles  con 
tributing  to  them.  During  this  period, 
the  power  of  receding  into  the  conditions 
of  trance  and  hypnotic  sleep  is  ordi 
narily  much  greater  than  it  is  in  any 
other  period  of  life.  With  the  advent  of 
puberty,  the  second  part  of  life  com 
mences  and  runs  up  to  the  time  when  the 
ebb-tide  of  life  makes  its  first  manifesta 
tion.  This  ebb-tide  like  the  flow-tide  of 
life,  which  covers  the  first  two  periods,  is 
divided  into  two  parts  :  (a)  the  period 
during  which  the  effects  of  the  strain  of 
ebb  are  not  very  appreciable  and  during 
which"  the  functions  of  manhood  are 
in  a  fairly  working  condition,  (b)  the 
period  of  old  age  which  is  characterised 
by  a  distinct  shrinkage  of  the  physical 
frame  and  by  retrogression  of  the 
functions.  During  manhood  aspirations 
and  hopes  are  like  passions  of  a  very 
strong  character,  and  the  vital  energy 
which  was  gathered  to  overflowing  makes 
light  of  all  difficulties  and  opposition. 
R 


274  CREATION  PART  III 

The    elasticity    of   youth   almost    imme 
diately   restores    equilibrium   after    each 
reverse,  and  existence  appears  to  be  more 
or  less  a  condition   of  sweet  inebriation. 
In  the  third  period  of  life  the  effervescence 
of  manhood  has  subsided  and  its  place  has 
been   taken   by   experience  and   wisdom. 
Catholicity  and  large-heartedness  manifest 
themselves.     This    is   the   period   during 
which  success  is  ordinarily  achieved  in  the 
largest    measure,     attended    by     wealth, 
name,   and    fame.     The    fourth    or    the 
closing  part  of  life  is  a  second  childhood, 
but^if  the  life  has  been  a  virtuous  one 
and  moderation  has  been  observed,  this 
Sf ourth  stage  is  not  void  of  sweets  peculiar 
to  itself.     The  innocent  joys  of  childhood 
are  supplemented  by  the  mellowed  happi 
ness  of  wisdom  and  experience.     During 
this  last  period,  the  ebb  of  vital,  energies 
is  great,  and  the  physical  frame  is  accord 
ingly   reduced   to    a   condition   of    great 
delicacy.     Small  matters  ordinarily  affect 
old  age  and  the  vicissitudes  of  seasons  are 


ART.  120  ITS    ECONOMY  275 

keenly  felt.  Ailments,  too,  are  not  infre 
quent.  From  a  spiritual  point  of  view, 
however,  this  inward  flow  is  specially 
advantageous  inasmuch  as  it  supplies  a 
natural  impulse  towards  the  aperture 
which  leads  to  death,  thus  strengthening 
the  spiritual  practice  which  trains  the 
devotee  to  effect  an  entrance  into  that 
-aperture  at  his  will.  The  description  of 
the  four  stages  of  life  here  given  refers  to 
a  typical  case  of  a  human  life,  hut  it  can 
he  applied  to  the  life  of  all  entities,  subject 
of  course,  to  the  changes  produced  by 
extraordinary  occurrences  or  the  visita 
tions  of  Providence. 

120— PARALLEL    Q¥    FOUR    STAGES    OF 
LIFE    IN    CREATION 

As  the  entire  creation  has  been  evolved, 
in  the  way  previously  stated,  by  means  of 
spiritual  currents,  which  supply  energy  in 
various  forms  and  degrees  to  everything 
in  nature,  it  will  not  be  illogical  to  find  a 
parallel  in  all  the  divisions  of  creation  to 


276  CREATION  PART  III 

the  four  stages  traceable  in  the  individual 
microcosm.  AVe  have  already,  by  implica 
tion,  stated  that  the  four  stages  are  due 
to  the  flow  and  ebb  of  spiritual  currents. 
They  would,  therefore,  exist  in  that  part 
of  the  macrocosm  which  is  subject  to 
similar  action.  In  the  purely  spiritual 
regions,  the  creation  is  immortal  and 
There  is,  therefore,  no  division 


of  the  kind,  referred  to,  in  the  first  grand 
division.  The  second  and  third  grand 
divisions  are,  however,  subject  to  the 
actions  of  contrary  forces,  and  we  ought 
to  seek  in  them  for  the  parallel  referred 
to.  As  Brahmand  is  subject  to  changes 
only  at  the  time  of  the  great  dissolution 
which  occurs  after  an  inconceivably  long 
interval,  the  four  stages  are  hardly  mani 
fest  there. 

r 

121  —  FOUR  YUGAS  —  CHARMING  CONDITION 
OF  LIFE  AND  NATURE  IN  THREE  OF  THEM 

In  the  third  grand  division,  which  is 
subject  to  much  more  frequent  dissolution^ 


ART.  121  ITS   ECONOMY  277 

the  four  stages,  referred  to  above,  are  quite 
manifest  and  are  known  as  yugas  (cycles). 
These  yngas  are  satya,  \fretd,  dwdpar, 
and  kail.  The  objective  conditions  of 
the  four  yuyas  are  in  a  large  measure  in 
harmony  with  the  four  parts  of  life  des 
cribed  above.  During  satyayuga,  the  crea- 
tional  current,  having  freshly  descended 
into  the  third  division,  was  highly  charged 
with  the  spiritual  energy  which  it  infused 
in  every  form  of  animate  and  inanimate 
existence.  The  aspect  of  nature  was  thus 
highly  ameliorating  and  charming,  every 
thing  contributing  to  the  mitigation  of 
seasonal  effects;  and  health  and  plenty 
flourished  amain.  Physical  pains  and 
ailments,  vicious  deeds  and  impure 
thoughts,  egotism  and  pride,  were  almost 
unknown.  In  perfect  health  and  in  the 
enjoyment  of  their  existence,  tfee  human 
and  other  animate  beings  lived  happily. 
Like  ripe  fruits,  spirits  separated  them 
selves  from  the  tree  of  physical  frame 
causing  almost  no  pain  at  the  time  of 


278  CREATION 


PART 


death,  which  occurred  when  extreme  old'  . 
age  had  heen  attained.  The  span  of  life, 
too,  was  much  larger  than  ours,  and 
human  beings,  in  consequence  of  their 
greater  spirituality  and  of  the  high  purity 
of  their  heart,  had  no  difficulty  in  getting 
access  at  times  into  the  astral  planes  and 
holding  communion  with  the  departed 
spirits.  This  yuga  was  of  the  largest 
duration  and  in  it  the  gracious  object 
of  creation  was  appreciated  by  all  deni 
zens  of  the  third  grand  division.  How 
immensely  greater  is  the  appreciation  of 
existence  in  the  Brahrnand  can  be  better 
conceived  than  stated.  During  the  next 
yuga>  too,  the  treta,  the  condition  of 
satyayuga  almost  prevailed  and  existence 
was  highly  enjoyable.  The  cumulative 
effect  of  the  downward  current,  however, 
manifested  itself  to  some  extent  in  a 
detrimental  form,  to  remove  -which/the  v 
incarnation  of  E/am  Chandra  tookplace.  < 
In  dwapar,  there  was  another  accumula 
tion  of  circumstances  adverse  to  the  great 


ART.  122  ITS    ECONOMY  279 

\j 

^   .felicity   of  existence   of  that  yuga,   and 
^  Sri  Krishna  Maharaj,  the  greatest  of  all 
incarnations  of  the  second  grand  division, 
made  his  advent  to  remove  its  effects.     It 
y  will  be  observed,  from  what  we  have  stated 
<J  *  above,  that  existence  in  the  third  grand 
division   during   the   three    yugas  was   a 
jN^I  great   boon,  and  in  no  sense  a  cause  of 
complaint  to  the  beings  concerned.     These 
three  yugas  cover  more  than  about  seven- 
eighths   of    the   life   of   the  third  grand 
division.  S*^**ffl*^*ty^^m^.   * 
&+JU  ^    -kz      %*   t~^/£- 

122 — KALIYUGA— ITS   TROUBLES — A    V 
TIME    FOR   EMANCIPATION 

In  accordance  with  the  theory  about 
the  time  of  advent  of  Saints,  as  explained 
in  Article  110,  the  fourth  yuga  set  in 
sometime  ago.  The  multiplication  of 
terrestrial  disturbances,  the  frequent 
occurrence  of  accidents  involving  great 
loss  of  life  and  property,  the  prevalence 
of  plague  which  is  a  most  powerful  and 
terrible  agent  of  destruction  of  life,  the 


280  CREATION  PART  III 

visitation  of  famine  in  increasing  fre 
quency  which  dries  up  plenitude  and 
reduces  millions  of  souls  to  the  heart 
rending  and  terror-inspiring  condition 
of  starvation  and  destitution,  the  great 
solar  disturbances  which  are  now  becom 
ing  so  frequent  —  all  these  circumstances 
unmistakably  point  to  the  fact  that  our 
solar  system  is  now  in  the  fourth  stage 
of  life.  As  the  climatic  conditions  of 


i  the  different  parts  of,  our  earth  i, 
the  constitution,  the  Torin,  and  the  habits 
of  the  human  and  other  animate  species 
inhabiting  those  parts  to  a  very  coneidey- 
able  extent,  in  the  same  way  the  peculiar 
conditions  of  k&liyuga  affect  the  entire 
animate  existence  of  the  third  grand 
division.  The  ailments  and  the  shrinkage, 
which  the  material  portion  of  that  divi 
sion  is  undergoing,  in  consequence  of 
the  ebb  of  its  main  spiritual  current 
towards  Brahmand,  are  the  cause  of  the 
troubles  and  afflictions  we  have  specified 
above.  From  a  spiritual  point  of  view, 


ART.  122  ITS    ECONOMY  281 

however,  the  kalii/nya  is  the  most  suitable 
yuga  for   the   spiritual    training    of    the 
highest  order,  as  this  is  the  time  of  con 
junction  of  the  third  grand  division  and 
of   Brahmand   with  the   purely  spiritual 
regions.     The  troubles  and  ailments,  we 
have  referred  to,  may  be  more  frequent 
still   for   some  time  to    come,  but   their 
internal  effects  have  already  been  consi 
derably  mitigated  by  the  advent  of  Saints, 
and    they    are    otherwise    advantageous. 
The   deterrent  effect   of  famine,  plague, 
terrestrial  disturbances,  and  accidents  is 
great,    and   those    who   are   affected    by 
their   visitation   naturally    turn   to    their 
Creator,  when   no   worldly   assistance   is 
possible^  or  when  it  proves  of  no  avail. 
Others     who    are    not    directly   affected 
pause  for  a  moment,  so  to  say,  in   their 
mundane  career,  and  the  evanescent  nature 
of  the  joys,  riches,  and  ambitions  of  this 
world,  as  also  the  transitory  and  unreliable 
condition  of  our  lives,  force  themselves 
upon  their  attention.     Such  thoughts,  not 


282  CREATION  PART  III 

acquired  from  others,  although  they,  have 
been  produced  by  an  experience  of  a  very 
bitter    character,    affect    the    innermost 
quarter  of^spirit  to  some  extent,  which 
is   already  now  under   higher   influences 
in    consequence   of   the    creational    ebb. 
The  religious  craving,  which  is  manifest 
ing    itself     in     an     unmistakable     form 
among  all  nations  of  our  earth,  is  due  to 
the   attractive   upward   impulse    referred 
to.     The   manifestation  of   extraordinary 
spiritual   powers    and    conditions,   which 
are  becoming  more  frequent   now,   may 
also  be  ascribed  to  the  same  cause.     In 
accordance  with  our  theory,  the  spiritual 
current  from  the  purely  spiritual  region 
will,    at   no   distant    date,    become   pre 
dominant  in  this  world,  when  the  central 
phase  of  the  conjunction  with  the  first 
grand  division  of  creation  takes  place.    All 
the  troubles  that  we  are  now  undergoing 
will    disappear^  and    a    condition     more 
ameliorating,    joyous,   and   blissful    than 
that  of  satyayuga  will  arrive.     Spiritual 


ART.  122  ITS   ECONOMY  28£ 

powers  which  arc  now  so  hidden  will  be 
more  manifest  then,  and  without  much 
trouble  or  difficulty  success  will  be  attained 
in  spiritual  training,  and  the  spiritual  and 
internal  experiences  of  the  devotee  will 
be  so  many  and  so  frequent^that  he  will 
have  positive  proof^  during  his  life  on  this 
earth,  of  his  true  emancipation  and  of  his 
location  in  the  purely  spiritual  regions. 
"\Vhen  the  spiritual  regeneration  and4 
elevation  have  been  effected  thus  in  the 
third  and  second  grand  divisions  of 
creation,  the  time  for  the  great  dissolution 
will  come.  By  the  time  of  its  occurrence 
a  very  large  number  of  entities  will  reach 
the  region  of  pure  spirituality  and  would 
become  immortal.  The  remaining  entities 
and  the  creation  of  Brahmand  and  of  the 
third  grand  division  will  also  be  greatly 
benefited  by  the  dissolution.  A  new1 
cycle  of  creation  will  commence  and  the 
spiritual  interest  and  the  benefit  of  the 
two  grand  divisions  of  creation  will  again 
be  guarded  as  in  the  previous  cycle. 


284  CREATION  PART  III 

123 — THE  ORIGIN  OF  VARIETIES 
IN    CREATION 

The  object  of  creation  has  been  dealt 
with  piecemeal,  sometimes  directly  and 
sometimes  by  implication,  in  the  preced 
ing  pages  devoted  to  an  explanation  of 
the  origin  and  economy  of  creation.  Be 
fore  recapitulating  the  fragmentary  parts 
of  the  object  in  question  and  depicting  the 
most  gracious  object  of  creation  in  a  self- 
contained  whole,  it  appears  to  be  desirable 
to  explain  the  causes  which  have  given 
rise  to  such  innumerable  varieties  in 
creation — a  creation  which  in  accordance 
with  our  theory  was  evolved  by  an  accen 
tuation  of  the  already  existing  eternal 
polarisation  of  spirit-force.  We  have 
already  explained  that  the  polarisation 
consisted  of  the  accumulation  of  the 
spirit-force  in  one  direction  in  an  infinite 
expanse,  and  of  its  depletion  to  a  con 
siderable  extent  from  the  opposite  direc 
tion  (vide  Article  77).  The  inference  from 


ART.  123  ITS    ECONOMY  285- 

this  theory,  viz.,  that  whatever  exists 
ftierely  represents  a  variation  in  the 
degree  of  spirituality,  and  that  the  evolu 
tion  of  the  creation  has  not  introduced 
anything  beyond  a  series  of  innumerable 
grades  of  spirituality  which  did  not  pre 
viously  exist,  is  manifest.  This  is  our 
theory  of  creation,  and  as  promised  w& 
now  proceed  to  explain  the  innumerable 
varieties  found  in  it  in  a  general  way. 

We  have  explained  in  Article  81 
that  in  the  presence  of  the  full .  and 
complete  refulgence,  energy,  bliss,  and 
intelligence  of  the  infinite  and  supreme 
spiritual  -pole  which  constituted,  as  it 
were,  the  infinite  entity  of  the  eternal 
Supreme  Being,  the  portions  of  lesser 
spirituality  appeared  to  Him  to  be  want 
ing  in  the  fulness  of  the  attributes  speci 
fied  above.  The  features  which  the 
deficiency  presented,  as  compared  with 
the  features  of  fulness,  constituted  the 
origin  of  differentiae  peculiar  to  each 
degree  of  spirituality.  To  illustrate  the 


286  CREATION  PART  III 

proposition  we  have  enunciated,  we  would 
•examine  the  condition  of  the  nether  pole* 
where  the  spirituality  is  found  to  be  of  the 
diffusest  character.     Against  all-energy  of 
the  north  pole,  the  condition  of  the  nether 
pole  is  one  of  almost  complete   inertness. 
Prom  the  point  of  view  of  energy,    there 
fore,    the  supreme    source   is   the   Actor 
^nd  the  Creator,  and  the  nether  pole  fur 
nishes  the  materials  to  be  acted  on.     In 
this  latter  category,  we  may  well  include 
every    plane  of  spirituality   of   a   degree 
lesser  than  that  of  the  supreme   spiritual 
source.     Looking  at  the  two  poles,  from 
the    point    of    view   of  intelligence,   the 
nether    one    is  in    its    extreme  rarity  of 
spirituality,  entirely  void   of   intelligence 
and  self-consciousness.     The  only  trace  of 
intelligence  found  in  that  pole  is  the   law 
which  regulates  its  constitution.     The  case 
of  the  supreme  pole  is  just  the  contrary, 
•even     the     diffusest    ray   of    spirituality 
of  the  nether  pole  being  sufficient  for  the 
Omniscient  Creator  to  obtain  a  knowledge 


ART.  123  ITS   ECONOMY  287 

of  the  gross  state  of  non-intelligence  that 
prevails  at  the  lower  pole.  Between 
these  two  poles  there  are  innumerable 
degrees  of  spirituality,  and  the  intelligence 
of  each  degree  varies  in  accordance  with 
the  quantity  of  spirituality  possessed  by 
each.  With  the  diminution  of  spiritu 
ality,  bliss  and  refulgence,  too,  undergo  a 
proportionate  abatement.  At  the  nether 
pole  there  is  thus  a  condition  contrary 
to  bliss  and  refulgence,  viz.,  pain  and 
darkness.  The  attributes  of  the  lower 
pole  are  accordingly  inertness,  non-intelli 
gence,  pain,  and  darkness.  As  that  pole  is 
not  itself  conscious,  it  is  unaware  of  all 
these  conditions.  A  sentient  entity  who, 
however,  happens  to  be  present  there  can 
perceive  the  attributes  referred  to.  The 
Supreme  Being,  as  already  stated  above, 
finds  the  attributes  referred  to,  to  be  there 
in  the  condition  described  above.  His  view 
a  condition  is  all  accurate  and  the 
spirit-entities,  who  are  tiny  emanations 
from  Him,  view  the  condition  accordingly, 


288  CREATION  PART  III 

although  011  a  much  smaller  scale  and 
within  a  limited  compass.  The  proposi 
tion  that  a  negative^  does  not  constitute 
a  source  of  positive  knowledge  of  an  ohject 
which  is  being  divested  of  its  false  con 
ceptions  by  the  process  of  negation,  does 
not  apply  to  the  matter  under  our 
consideration.  When  we  speak  of  haziness, 
dimness,  darkness,  etc.,  we  do  not  aver 
that  these  conditions  are  due  to  different 
degrees  of  negation  of  light.  What  we 
have  been  explaining  is  the  variation  in 
experience  caused  by  the  diminution 
of  a  force.  Such  experience  is  positive 
knowledge,  as  impressions  upon  a  sentient 
entity  under  normal  conditions  are  the 
means  of  knowledge,  and  they  are  techni 
cally  known  as  experience.  As  the  grossest 
plane  of  the  nether  pole  is  not  entirely 
void  of  spirituality,  the  experience  of 
the  condition  of  that  pole  is  not  the 
experience  of  negation,  but  is  the  experi 
ence  of  the  diffusest  form  of  spirituality 
met  with  in  nature.  When  that  experience 


ART.  123  ITS    ECONOMY  281) 

represents  the  view  presented  to  the 
Supreme  Being,  its  accuracy  and  positive- 
ness  admit  of  no  question.  In  accordance 
\vith  our  theory^  then,  the  innumerable 
varieties  in  shape,  colour,  refulgence, 
energy,  intelligence,  bliss,  etc.,  etc.,  are  all 
due  to  the  different  experiences  produced 
by  the  different  degrees  of  spirituality. 
Furthermore,  these  experiences  are  not 
different  from  the  actualities  of  the  objects 
concerned,  as  these  actualities  constituted 
the  Supreme  Being's  experience.  If  our 
theory  of  the  perception  derived  by  means 
of  the  senses  (vide  Articles  96  and  97)  be 
correct,  it  is  clear  that  in  experiences  of 
all  descriptions,  the  object  communicates 
itself  in  a  subtle  form  to  the  correspond 
ing  tanmatra  within  ourselves,  and  the 
nature  of  the  experiences  is,  therefore, 
similar  to  the  subtle  constitution  of  the 
objects.  If  this  be  true,  experiences  can 
not  be  dissociated  from  objects  and  are  not 
distinct  from  them.  They  are  the  effects 
produced  in  various  ways  by  spirituality 


290  CREATION  PART  III 

of  different  degrees  projected  to  the  sen 
tient  entity.  The  cause  thus  ever  gives 
its  impression  to  the  effect,  and  the  two 
represent  different  conditions  of  one  and 
the  same  thing.  The  circumstances  which 
accompany  the  cause  are  connected  with 
those  which  accompany  the  effect,  and  the 
two  represent  different  conditions  of  one 
and  the  same  thing.  The  circumstances 
which  accompany  the  cause  and  the  effect 
are,  however,  ordinarily  dissimilar  in 
character,  and  it  is  not  therefore  possible 
to  trace  the  inherent  connection  between 
them.  In  illustration  of  the  principle 
explained,  we  may  consider  the  case  of  a 
ray  of  the  sun.  It  is  a  projection,  so  to 
say,  from  the  sun,  and  it  is  also  an  effect 
produced  by  the  radiating  energy  of  the 
sun.  An  examination  of  the  ray  shows 
that  it  carries,  on  a  small  and  subtle  scale, 
the  form,  the  constituents,  etc.,  of  the 
source  or  the  cause.  Here  the  element  of 
the  cause  in  the  effect  is  manifest,  and 
this  is  the  modus  operand*  of  the  evolution 


p 

ART.  12  I  ITS    ECONOMY  291 

of  the  entire  creation  from  the  top  to  the 
lowest  depths  of  the  nether  pole. 

12-1 — THE  GRACIOUS  OBJECT  OF  CREATION 

The  Supreme  Being  is  an  infinite 
ocean  of  all  absorbing  rapture  and  love, 
of  supreme  intelligence  from  which 
nothing  remains  concealed,  of  supreme 
energy  or  spirit  which  supplies  force  and 
vitality  to  eveiytMru|£jtt^  °^  suPrem® 
light  whose  lustre^  is  indescribable.  In 
this  all- glorious  condition,  eternal  and 
infinite,  unaffected  by  anything,  He  exists. 
Association  with  such  a  source  must 
necessarily  impart  the  beneficial  attributes 
of  His  essence.  The  pre-creational 
association  and  subordination  of  the  planes 
other  than  that  of  the  infinite  source 
were,  therefore,  pregnant  with  a  supreme 
gracious  object.  When  in  the  fulness  of 
time  the  association  was  intensified,  the 
lower  strata  burst  forth  into  a  glorious 
creation  by  the  advent  of  a  mighty  current 
-of  the  essence  of  the  Supreme  Beino-. 


292  CREATION  PART  III 

The  region  which  was  nearest  to  Him, 
and  which  in  point  of  expanse  was 
immensely  greater  than  the  rest  of  the 
creation,  was  made  immortaL  at  oncer 
*  >»***- ct\  endowed  with  such  spirituality  that  the 
creation  itself  hecame  intelligent  as  a 
whole,  and  attached  for  ever  to  the 
supreme  source.  The  denizens  of  this 
region,  too,  whose  numher  is  inconceiv 
ably  larger  than  that  of  the  denizens  of 
other  parts  of  creation,  woke  up  from 
a  state  of  stupor  into  an  immortal  and 
immutable  life  of  extreme  rapture  and 
bliss,  susceptible  in  no  way  to  the 
feeblest  shadow  of  a  condition  of  an 
opposite  character.  By  far  the  largest 
portion  of  the  pre-creational  region  below 
that  of  the  supreme  source  became 
the  recipient  of  a  favour  which  is  beyond 
description.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to 
remark  that  the  gracious  object  involved 
in  organising  a  creation  of  the  region, 
referred  to,  is  almost  inconceivable,  and 
the  Supreme  Being  alone,  Who  is  all-bliss, 


ART.  12  1  ITS    ECONOMY  293 

•could  conceive  of  such  an  object.     In  the 
evolution  of  other  parts  of  creation,  the 
ohject  was  not  less  generous.     The  pre- 
creational  deficiency  of  spirituality  pre 
vented   the   other    parts   from    receiving 
in  a  full  measure  the  benefit  that    had 
been   showered   by   the   Supreme  Bei 
but   the  gracious  object  did  not  fail 
-effect    its    ends    to    the   highest   degree* 
possible.    The  evils  of  the  deficiency  were 
mitigated  and  minimised,  and  such  a  place 
assigned    to    those    other    parts    in    the 
economy  of  creation,  that  eventually  they 
always  contributed  to  an  enhancement  of 
the  bliss  of  existence.     The  evil,  we  have 
referred  to,  is  almost  nominal  in  the  second 
o-rand  division  of  creation,  and  when  the 
time    arrives   for   its   manifestation,   the 
great  dissolution  takes  place,  and  the  evil 
is   not   allowed    to    assert  itself.     In  the 
.second   grand   division   of    creation   also, 
which   constitutes  the   major  portion  of 
the  fractional  creation  left  behind  after 
.appropriation  of  the  spiritual  region  by 


294  CREATION  PART  III 

the  Supreme  Being,  the  object ,of  creation 

was   practically^*)    cc^ercaKnost    ever- 

J  ^ 

lasting  bliss  and.  happiness  similar  to  some- 
extent  to  that  of  the  first  grand  di vision . 

The  ^spirituality     of     the     third    ^rand 
<rw  e-Ufv/  . 

division  is  or  the  lowest  order,  and  evil 
?  fa 

tendencies,     pains,     and     torments     are- 
accordingly  associated  in  a  large  measure 

with  existence   in  this  division.  .ttDurinsr 

/5u^t 
the    first  yngas   they,    however,    oo   not 

manifest  themselves,  and  life  witn  its 
joys  is  an  immense  Loon  compared  to- 
the  pre-creational  condition.  In  about 
the  eighth  part  of  the  life  of  the  third 
divisioToTtire  denizens  are  under  the  direct 
influence  of  material  and  evil  desires, 
and  are  afflicted  with  various  sorts  of 
troubles,  anxieties,  fear,  &c.  During 
that  period,  they  have  also  to  pay  the 
penalty  of  their  evil  acts  in  hell.  But 
these  adverse  conditions  produce  a  shift 
ing  which  results  in  the  elimination 
of  material  covers,  and  at  no  distant  date 
they  become  fit  to  receive  the  grace* 


ART.  124  ITS  ECONOMY  295 

which  accompanies  the  advent  of  adepts. 
If  the  time  for  the  great  dissolution  has- 
arrived  this  grace  comes  direct  from  the 
gracious  Supreme  Creator  of  the  purely 
spiritual  regions,  otherwise  it  descends- 
from  Brahmand.  In  the  former  case, 
the  denizens  of  the  third  division  derive 
immense  spiritual  benefit,  and  a  very  large 
number  of  them  is  trained  for  admittance 
into  the  immortal  regions  of  the  first 
grand  division.  If,  therefore,  we  consider 
the  immensely  large  time  allowed  to  all 
denizens  for  the  enjoyment  of  existence, 
and  the  comparatively  short  period  during 
which  they  are  subject  to  pain  merely  as 
a  remedial  measure,  the  gracious  object 
of  creation  in  the  lowest  division  becomes 
manifest  in  a  very  pronounced  form^and 
the  wisdom  of  the  Supreme  Being  appeals 
forcibly  in  all  that  He  has  ordained. 
When  the  inherent  powers  of  the  spirit 
become  developed  to  some  extent,  all 
occurrences  and  conditions,  whether  they 
be  adverse  or  favourable  to  our  well-being, 


296  CREATION  PART  III 

show  by  unmistakable  signs  and  laws  the 
gracious  object  of  the  evolution  of  crea 
tion,  and  the  devotee  enraptured  by  their 
glimpse  is  translated  into  a  condition  which 
is  one  of  ecstasy,  love,  and  admiration  of 
the  Supreme  Creator.  If  the  effect  is  too 
strong,  the  faculties  of  expression  are 
lost,  and  in  that  rapturous  state  he  is  in 
communion,  as  it  were,  with  the  Supreme 
Being.^'To  know  the  object  of  creation 
by  pure  intuition,  and  not  by  the  hazy 
methods  of  argumentation  which  hide 
the  true  view,  is  to  know  the  gracious 
ordain rnent  of  the  Supreme  Creator.  The 
school  of  spiritual  training,  where  such 
knowledge  is  acquired,  is  9  therefore,  a 
blessed  institution,  and  is  specially  under 
the  supervision  of  the  Supreme  Being. 
Intellectual  training  and  development, 
even  of  the  highest  possible  degree,  is  not 
sufficient  by  itself  for  the  purpose  of 
comprehending  in  an  experimental  way 
the  object  of  creation,  and  this  should  be 
kept  in  view  when  the  object  of  creation 


ART:  12  i  ITS   ECONOMY  297 

is  studied.     Our  knowledge  is  confined  to 
the  three   planes   of   dimensions   of   this 
world.     They  are  not,  however,  the  only 
planes  of  action  and  effect  in  this  nature. 
There  are  other  innumerable  planes  which 
perform     important      functions     in     the 
economy  of  creation.     They  are,  however, 
perceptible    by  intuition    or    the    subtle 
senses    of  knowledge,   and  not  by  these 
physical  senses.    We  do  become  cognisant 
at  times  of  their  action  on  the  planes  in 
our  view,  but  such  phenomena  are  so  few 
and  far  between  that  a  posteriori  know 
ledge   cannot  build  up  an  accurate   con 
ception  on  the  basis  of  these  occurrences 
the  other  planes  in  question.1     It  does 
not,  therefore,  appear  to  us  to  be  unreason 
able    to    observe    that    the    subtle    senses 
within  us  should  be  trained  for  the  proper 
•comprehension  of  the  planes  beyond  the 
three    planes    referred    to,    and    that    a 
reduction   of   everything   to    these   three 
planes  should  not  be  insisted  upon   as  a 
necessarv  condition  of  knowledge. 


PART  IV 

Karma^/.  e.,  the  Actions  performed  by 
Human  Entities  and  their  Effects  on  Them 

125 — THE  PENAL  LAW  OF  CREATION- 
ITS  ADVANTAGES 

f-T  is  clear  from  what  we  have  ex* 
plained  of  the  creation  in  the  pre 
ceding  chapter  that  the  entire  body  of  the 
creational  laws  has  been  made  with  a 
beneficent  object.  The  penal  laws,  too, 
contribute  to  some  extent  to  eventual 
good,  and  the  spirit- entities  after  under 
going  punishment  become  fit  for  spiritual 
elevation  to  a  specified  degree  in  the 
grand  division  of  creation  in  which  they 
are  located.  These  remarks  apply  in 
their  entirety  to  the  third  grand  division,, 
although  traces  of  the  economy,  referred 
to,  are  not  entirely  absent  from  the  sub- 
creational  portions  of  the  first  and  second 
grand  divisions.  The  penal  provisions, 


ART.  125  KARMA  299- 

although  they  apply  equally  to  all,  are,. 
BIO-^DV^.  mainly  intended  for  the  reforma 
tion  of  those  who  are  incapable  of  deriving 
benefit  from  the  laws  that  provide  for 
reward.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  observe 
that  desires  and  acts  and  indolence,  which 
seek  reformation  and  eventual  good  in  the 
creational  incarceration,  are  marked  by 
a  want  of  wisdom  and  foresight  which  is- 
very  discreditable.  Such  a  view  is,  how 
ever,  given  effect  to  in  actual  practice  by 
incapable  people,  while  those^  endowed 
with  the  necessary  foresight  and 
intelligence  ^  make  themselves  acquainted 
with  the  laws  in  question^ for  the  purpose 
of  obtaining  the  rewards  and  for  protect 
ing  themselves  from  the  penalties. 
Further,  the  penal  provisions  merely 
eliminate  the  evil  propensities  to  some 
extent,  and  thus  render  the  spirit  fit  for 
elevation,  as  already  stated,  in  that  divi 
sion  alone  in  which  it  is  located.  Its- 
translation  to  a  higher  division  is,  however, 
impossible,  unless  the  spirit-entity  comes 


'300  KARMA  PART  IV 

<lirectly  under  the  influence  of  the  spiri 
tual  current  of  the  higher  division^and  is 
also  aided  in  its  efforts  of  ascension  hy  an 
adept  of  that  division.  The  instrument 
of  such  higher  Influence  is  spiritual  train 
ing,  and  for  its  proper  performance  it 
is  absolutely  necessary  that  the  lower 
tendencies,  which  are  predominant  in  the 
second  and  third  grand  divisions,  should 
l)e  thoroughly  understood  and  overcome. 
As  the  training,  referred  to,  can  he  under 
gone  with  success  in  a  human  form  alone 
(vide  Article  111),  the  explanations  that 
we  proceed  to  record  now  refer  to  the 
•effects  produced  on  a  human  entity  by  his 
surroundings  and  by  his  individual  acts. 

126 — THE    IMPRESSIONS    ON    A    HUMAN 

ENTITY  AND  THE  MODE  OF  THEIR 

PRESERVATION 

Before  describin^the  various  classes  of 
acts  or  karmo8,&n<i  the  laws  which  regu 
late  their  influence  in  the  future,  we 
would  ascertain  how  the  surroundings  act 


ART.  126  ITS    EFFECTS  301 


upon  a  human  entity,  how  theS£j_are 
recorded  and  preserved  within  him,  and 
how  his  desires  and  volition  are  generated 
by  them  and  otherwise.  The  surround- 

^a"* 

ings  act  upon  the  senses.  The  impressions 
produced   in  the  latter  are  perceived  at 
the  time,  but  the  matter  does  not  termi 
nate  at  that  stage.     All  these  impressions 
are  preserved  somewhere  within  us,  the 
most    insignificant   and    the    feeblest    of 
them  even  finding  a  place  in  the  internal 
record.     That  such  is  the  fact  is  demon 
strated  beyond    question  by   the    several 
cases  mentioned  by    Abercrombie  in   his 
treatise  on  "Intellectual  Powers."     They 
refer  to  the    recollection   and    repetition^ 
by  several  ladies  and  gentlemen^of  some 
foreign   verses,    which    had    e- 


come  within  the  range  of  their  hearing. 
As  the  verses  in  question  were  unintelli 
gible  to  them,  and^attegtion  of  the  feeblest 
characterAnust^W^been  drawn  to  the- 
recitatioiyot  the  'Verses,  the  impression^ 
produced  by  them  must  have  been  also  of 


302  KARMA  PART  IV 

the  feeblest  nature.  Yet  ^  when  their 
attention,  in  the  extraordinary  condition 
of  excitedness  caused  by  delirium,  was 
confronted  by  the  impressions  within,  a 
distinct  recollection  of  the  verses  cropped 
up,  and  the  impressions  acted>ascentre^7 
for  the  recital  of  the  verses.  Themedium 
on  which  all  such  impressions,  viz.,  those 
produced  through  the  senses^  and  also 
those  which  are  due  to  subjective  actions, 
are  recorded  and  preserved,  is  the  ether. 

127 — MANAKASH — ITS    FUNCTIONS 

Akasli  tattwa  or  ether,  upon  which  the 

impressions  received  through  the   senses 
^Vvw^C  p/\jL&&*i^e-£L 


are  recorded^  is  known  as  mandkdsh 
(mind-sky).  This  akash  possesses  an 
elasticity  of  an  immensely  high  character, 
identical  with  the  elasticity  of  ^  ether 
found  in  creation.  By  means  of  this 
elasticity  the  impressions  produced  in 
manakashj  or  in  the  ordinary  ether  of 
nature*  are  transmitted  to  their  destina 
tion.  The  destination  in  the  case  « 


ART.  128  ITS    EFFECTS  303 

natural  disturbances  is  radiative,  while  in 
the  case  of  manakash,  although  tiiis  func 
tion  is  not  wanting,  it  isf  JsuBiective./ 

,r-  ,  ...  .,  n  -  ff&^K^t 

Mind    with. /its   four   functions   becomes 

frf fa-  4*~~f&jLsV4^in^         *  . 

cognisant  at  the  time  the*,  impressions  are 
being  recorded,  but^with  the  diversion  of 
attention  to  other  impressions  and  in 
other  directions,  the  consciousness  of  the 
previous  impressions  f ado?  and ^  gradually^ 
they  pass  away  from  the  ordinary  schedule 
of  memory.  The  impressions,  however, 
by  such  disappearance,  are  not  entirely 
effaced.  They  are  scrupulously  preserved 
in  the  old  records  of  manak&sh.  When 
these  are  approached,  whether  voluntarily 
or  involuntarily,  by  complete  convergence 
of  attention  towards  them,  theylorth- 
with  are  reproduced  and  recollected  as 
explained  above. 

128 — LAWS    FOR   THE    REPRODUCTION 
OF   IMPRESSIONS 

From  the   cases   mentioned   by   Aber- 
crombie,     we    have    stated    above,    two 


faWfa 


304  KARMA  PART  IV 

principles  are  clearly  deducible,  viz.,   (1) 

that  by  the  association  of  complete  atten 
tion  with  the  impressions  an  entity  has- 
received,  it  acts  entirely  in  accordance 
with  the  nature  of  those  impressions,  even 
when  they  are  extremely  feeble  and  even 
when  thev  are  not  intelligible  ;  and  (2) 
thatliSese  &eter  react  upon  the  manakdsh 


and  fckot  under  favourable  circumstances, 
viz.,  by  complete  association  of  attention 
with  them,  they  can  again  constitute 
centres  of  future  action. 


RADHASOAMI 
SAHAI 


APPENDIX  A 


A  Brief  View  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith 

tiki 
JjADHASOAMI  is  the  real  name  of  the   Supreme 

Creator.     This  holy  name  may  be  briefly  ex 
plained  as  follows  : — 

If  the  faculty  of  hearing  is  sufficiently  developed, 
all  force-currents  could  be  heard  as  sounds.  The 
Supreme  Creator  evolved  this  creation  by  His 
spiritual  currents.  Spirit-force  is  the  force  of 
attraction,  love,  and  intelligence  or  intuition.  Like 
other  forces,  in  its  creative  action  it  acts  by  focus 
and  currents  emanating  therefrom.  The  sound,  in 
articulate  speech,  of  the  spirit-current  is  '  Radha,* 
«nd  that  of  the  spiritual  focus  or  reservoir  is 
'  Soami.'  Radhasoami  is  accordingly  held  to  be 
the  true  and  real  name  of  the  Supreme  Creator, 
and  its  sound,  which  resounds  in  the  innermost 
quarter  of  all  regions,  can  be  heard  by  a  devotee 
of  the  Radhasoami  sect,  when  the  faculty  of 
hearing  inherent  in  his  spirit  is  developed  by  the 
process  of  devotional  practice  prescribed  by  the 
T 


306  APPENDIX   A 

Radhasoami  Faith.  This  name  was  given  out  by 
Radhasoami,  the  Supreme  Creator  Himself,  when 
He  made  His  advent  in  this  world  as  a  Sant 
Satguru,  i.  e.t  true  supreme  guide  and  preceptor 
in  human  form. 

As  in  the  state  of  somnambulism  all  the  functions 
of  body  and  senses  are  performed  from  a  plane 
higher  than  that  which  the  soul  occupies  in  the 
wakeful  state,  so  all  the  actions  of  the  incarnation 
of  the  true  Creator  are  regulated  by  the  currents 
coming  direct  from  the  Supreme  Creator  Himself. 
The  incarnation  of  Radhasoami  Dayal  manifested 
Himself  at  Agra  and  gave  out  this  religion  in 
1861  A.  D. 

Exaltation  of  the  spirit  by  the  aid  of  the  spiri 
tual  current,  which  is  perceived  as  sound  internally, 
to  the  pure  region  of  spirit,  which  is  the  only  true 
abode  of  perfect  emancipation  and  salvation,  consti 
tutes  the  devotional  practice  of  the  Radhasoami 
Faith.  Service  of  the  incarnation  of  the  Supreme 
Creator,  when  He  manifests  Himself  as  Sant 
Satguru,  and  love  for  Him,  are  indispensable 
.adjuncts  for  the  performance  of  the  devotional 
practice  mentioned  above.  Nay,  they  constitute  a 
factor  of  the  devotional  practice  itself. 

Unaided  by  Sant  Satguru,  Who  has  access  to  the 
astral  and  higher  planes,  the  devotional  practice  of 
sound  and  spirit  cannot  be  properly  performed.  No 
rituals  or  other  outward  ceremonies  are  enjoined  by 


APPENDIX    A  307 

-the  Radhasoami  Faith.  The  practice  is  to  be  per 
formed  in  a  secluded  place  wherever  it  is  available. 

Human  actions  which  tend  to,  or  result  in,  the 
increased  concentration  or  exaltation  of  the 
spirit-force  constitute  true  virtue  according  to  the 
Radhasoami  Faith,  while  those  effecting  the 
opposite  results,  viz.,  diffusion  and  degradation  of 
spirit  into  lower  material  regions  are  vice. 

The  moral  code  of  the  Radhasoarai  Faith  for  the 
regulation  of  worldly  affairs  is  that  you  should  act 
as  you  would  that  others  should  act  towards  you. 

This  religion  has  considerably  expanded  during 
the  last  ten  years,  and  a  large  number  of  educated 
people  have  joined  it. 

This  religion  professes  to  be  based  upon  purely 
scientific  grounds  and  nothing  is  to  be  accepted 
which  cannot  be  comprehended  by  facts,  natural 
laws,  and  phenomena  observable  in  this  world. 
Nothing  is  to  be  believed  as  hearsay  or  blind  faith. 
Mere  theoretical  comprehension  of  the  principles  is 
not  aimed  at,  their  experimental  realisation  is 
specially  laid  stress  upon.  Unless  the  spirit  could, 
at  the  will  of  the  devotee  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith, 
leave  the  body  and  reach  the  highest  spiritual 
spheres,  his  devotion  has  not  resulted  in  the  attain- 
"ment  of  the  object  in  view. 

According  to  the  Radhasoami  Faith  there  are 
three  grand  divisions  in  creation ;  the  highest 
is  purely  spiritual  and  called  the  region  of  mercy 


308  APPENDIX   A 

or  '  Dayal  Desb'.  The  second  is  spiritual-material,, 
i.  e.j  in  this  division  spirit  predominates  and  matter 
in  a  very  fine  and  pure  form  is  mixed  up  with  it.  It 
is  called  '  Brahmand '  or  the  region  of  the  Universal 
Mind.  The  third  or  the  lowest  division  is  known 
as  the  material-spiritual  region  '  Find,'  i.e.,  the 
region  of  individual  mind  and  desire.  Matter  in 
this  division  is  coarse  and  predominates  over  spirit, 
whose  action  is  feeble  and  never  manifests  itself 
unless  through  material  covers.  Each  grand 
division  has  six  subdivisions.  Their  correspon 
dence  is  to  be  found  in  human  frame,  which  repre 
sents  on  a  small  scale  the  whole  creation.  The  six 
subdivisions  of  the  lowest  region  *  Find '  are  to 
be  found  in  the  human  frame  as  the  six  ganglia  or 
nervous  centres  commencing  from  the  lowest  in 
l^^ rectum  to  the  highest  which  is  situated  midway 
between  the  two  eyes  at  the  root  of  the  nose,  where 
the  nerves  from  the  various  centres  converge,  and 
which  is  known  as  the  pineal  gland.  The  other  four 
ganglia  are  in  the  throat,  the  heart,  the  navel,  and 
the  reproductive  organ.  Similar  ganglia,  of  which 
the  above  six  are  reflex  images,  are  to  be  found  in 
Brahmand.  The  grey  matter  of  the  brain  com 
prises  these  six  centres,  and  they  correspond  with 
the  six  spheres  of  Brahmand.  The  purely  spiri 
tual  region  corresponds  with  the  white  matter 
of  the  brain,  and  six  centres  are  to  be  four^d 
therein  which  correspond  writh  the  six  spheres 


APPENDIX    A  309 

of  the  regions  of  mercy.  The  sixth,  or  the  highest 
sphere  of  the  purely  spiritual  regiou,  is  the  abode 
of  the  true  Supreme  Creator,  Radhasoami  Dayal. 

No  caste  prejudices  are  observed  by  the  Radha 
soami  Faith.  The  only  conditions  required  for 
embracing  the  Radhasoami  religion  are  abstinence 
from  meat  and  animal  food,  and  liquor  and  all 
intoxicating  drugs,  and  a  conviction  that  the  goal  of 
the  Radhasoami  Faith  is  the  only  true  goal  of  true 
and  perfect  salvation.  Animal  food  generates  out 
ward  activity  and  energy,  and  as  such,  is  detrimental 
to  the  inward  concentration  and  exaltation  of  the 
spiritual  current,  to  secure  which  perfect  quiescence 
of  thoughts  and  $u*!ward  activity  is  indispensable. 
Intoxicating  drugs  affect  the  nervous  system  and 
disturb  their  calmness  and  serenity  which  are 
necessary  for  the  proper  performance  of,  the  spiritual 
practice  prescribed  by  the  Radhasoami  Faith. 

All  the  extant  religions  have  for  their  goal  the 
spheres  comprised  in  the  second  grand  division  or 
the  spiritual-material  regions  which  are  subject  to 
decay  and  dissolution,  because  matter  is  mutable, 
and  regions  subject  to  its  influence,  however  subtle 
they  may  be,  sooner  or  later  undergo  change. 

These  goals  or  spheres  are  not  clearly  mentioned 
in  the  tenets  of  the  extant  religions,  but  allusions 
and  hints  about  them  are  to  be  found  in  their  holy 
books.  One  initiated  in  esoteric  teachings  can  only 
comprehend  those  hints  and  is  aware  of  the  location 


310  APPENDIX   A 

of  those  spheres.  But  such  adepts,  if  any,  are  very 
rare,  and  only  those  initiated  in  the  Radhasoami 
Faith  can  at  present  understand  the  esoteric  teach 
ings  of  all  other  religions  also,  and  form  a  correct 
idea  of  the  altitude  of  each.  The  followers  of  the 
various  extant  religions  do  not  know  the  goal  of 
their  own  faith  nor  the  comparative  worth  of  the 
various  religions.  In  Radhasoami  Faith,  it  is  also 
a  part  of  the  tenets,  that  the  comparative  value  of 
the  various  religions  should  be  clearly  understood, 
and  with  this  object  the  holy  books  of  the  Radha- 
soami  Faith  contain  a  short  description  and  an 
examination  of  the  tenets  of  other  religions. 

The  doctrine  of  the  transmigration  of  souls  is 
held  by  those  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith.  Its  theory 
is  that  faculties  developed  by  the  exercise  of  the 
various  functions  of  a  spirit-entity  are  engrained 
in  the  astral  or  subtle  environments  which  accom 
pany  the  spirit  at  the  time  of  death  and  they 
regulate  its  future  birth. 


RADHASOAMI 
SAHAI 


APPENDIX  B 


A  Brief  Exposition  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith 

HE  founder  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith  was  an. 
incarnation  of  the  Supreme  Creator,  Radha 
soami  Himself.  He  manifested  Himself  in  a 
respectable  and  old  family  of  Khattries  at  Agra  in 
1818,  and  was  known  by  the  name  of  Shiv  Dayal 
Singh.  From  early  childhood  He  devoted  Himself, 
to  the  practice  expounded  in  the  Radhasoami 
Faith,  and  His  extraordinary  powers  of  sanctity  and 
holiness  had  great  effect  upon  the  mind  and  spirit 
of  all  persons  who' came  in  contact  with  Him.  He 
gave  out  the  principles  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith  in 
1861,  although  previous  to  this  year  some  ladies 
had  been  privately  initiated  in  the  mode  of  devo 
tional  practice  expounded  by  Him.  Regular  con 
gregations  of  the  devotees  of  the  Radhasoami 
Faith  were  held  at  His  house  several  times  every 
day,  and  about  three  to  four  thousand  persons 
joined  the  Faith  during  His  life-time.  He  departed 
from  this  world  in  June  1878.  He  compiled  two- 


312  APPENDIX   B 

;      f     i   / 
works  in  vernacular   upon  Radhasoami  Faith,  one 

in  prose  and  the  other  in  verse.  Sometime  after 
His  demise,  His  place  was  taken  up  by  His  chief 
disciple,  Rai  Saligram  Saheb  Bahadoor,  whose 
undivided  and  extraordinary  devotion  attracted 
wide  attention.  The  religion  made  great  progress 
during  the  life-time  of  Rai  Saligram  Saheb  Baha 
door,  and  persons  of  all  denominations  and  caste, 
specially  those  belonging  to  educated  classes, 
accepted  the  principles  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith, 
and  devotees  of  this  religion  now  number  over  ten 
thousand  and  new  applicants  for  initiation  are 
coming  in  daily.  Rai  Saligram  Saheb  Bahadoor 
has  written  several  books  both  in  verse  and  prose 
upon  the  principles  of  this  religion,  which  have 
been  expounded  on  scientific  lines  in  some  of  them. 
These  works  are  in  vernacular,  but  a  short  expo 
sition  has  also  been  written  in  English. 

The  attainment  of  a  state  of  immortal  and  ecstatic 
bliss  entirely  free  from  pain  of  every  description  is 
salvation,  which  can  be  obtained  only  by  advent  into 
a  region  of  pure  spirit  uucontaminated  with  matter, 
the  abode  of  the  true  Supreme  Creator,  Radhasoami. 
Spirit-force  is  the  supreme  force  that  has  evolved 
the  whole  creation,  its  attributes  being  love,  attrac 
tion  or  creative  action,  immortality,  intelligence, 
and  bliss.  In  animate  beings,  spirit-force  is  also 
manifested  as  current  of  attention.  Matter  is  inert. 
substance,  whose  original  condition  was  atomic  or 


APPENDIX    B  313 

xjhaotic,  all  forms  in  material  regions  having  been 
formed  by  the  action  of  spirit  upon  matter. 
Admixture  of  spirit  with  matter  gives  rise  to  condi 
tion  susceptible  of  pain,  which  is  received  by  a 
spirit-entity  as  the  sensation  accompanying  the 
forcible  separation  of  its  currents  from  the  mental 
or  material  plane  that  it  may  be  occupying. 

A  force  cannot  exist  without  a  focus  or  reservoir, 
and  thus  the  polarisation  of  the  spirit-force  resulted 
in  the  separation  of  spiritual  and  material  regions, 
the  purely  spiritual  regions  being  at  one  end  or  pole 
and  the  material  regions  at  the  other.  The  location, 
however,  of  a  material  region  implies  localising 
action  upon  matter  in  that  region.  The  material 
pole  of  creation,  too,  is  therefore  subject  to  the 
action  of  spirit.  Accordingly  there  are  three 
grand  divisions  of  creation,  (1)  purely  spiritual,  (2) 
spiritual-material,  (3)  material-spiritual.  These 
three  grand  divisions  have  six  subdivisions  in  each. 
All  spiiit-entities,  being  rays  of  the  ocean  or 
infinite  sun  of  spirit,  fovin  similar  divisions  and  sub 
divisions  when  they  incarnate  as  animate  beings. 
In  man,  the  most  highly  developed  spiritual  being, 
these  are  most  manifest.  The  white  substance  of 
the  brain  corresponds  to  purely  spiritual  regions 
and  has  six  subdivisions.  -  The  grey  matter  of  the 
brain  corresponds  to  the  second  division  of  creation 
and  has  similar  subdivisions.  The  six  ganglia  from, 
the  pineal  gland  downwards  to  the  rectum,  viz., — 


314  APPENDIX   B 

1st  in  the  pineal  gland,  2nd  in  the  throat,  3rd  in- 
the  solar  plexus,  4th  in  the  navel,  5th  in  the 
reproductive  organ,  and  the  6th  in  the  rectum,, 
constitute  the  six  subdivisions  of  the  third  region 
which  is  known  as  Find.  The  seat  or  focus  of  the 
spirit  is  in  the  pineal  gland.  If  its  actions  are 
towards  spheres  or  ganglia  lower  than  its  seat,  the 
result  is  descent  of  spirit  into  lower  or  infernal 
regions,  if  higher  than  the  seat  of  its  location,  the 
result  would  be  its  exaltation  into  regions  of  higher 
bliss  and  joy,  and  eventual  entrance  into  the  purely 

spiritual  regions.     The  method  of  devotional  prac- 

/      /     / 
tice  prescribed  by  the  Radhasoami  Faith  consists  in 

raising  the  spirit  from  its  seat  to  higher  regions  by 
the  aid  of  attraction  of  the  spirit-current  in  the- 
higher  regions  of  creation. 

Force-current,  of  whatever  kind  it  may  be,  can 
be  felt  as  sound  if  it  impinges  upon  an  apparatus  of 
sufficient  sensitiveness  similar  to  the  organ  of  hear 
ing.  The  spirit-current  is  therefore  felt  as  sound 
in  the  practice,  referred  to  above  ;  and  the  devo 
tional  practice  is  technically  known  as  the  sound 
and  spirit  practice  of  yoga.  But  its  successful 
performance  requires  the  aid  of  a  spirit  which  has 
already  by  means  of  the  above  practice  reached  the 
purely  spiritual  regions,  or  has  made  its  advent 
direct  into  the  world  and  is  endowed  with  all  the 
powers  of  the  purely  spiritual  regions.  Such 
a  spirit  is  known  as  true  guide  and  preceptor  and 


APPENDIX   B 


is  considered  to  be  an  incarnation  of  the  presiding 
deity  of  the  region  from  which  it  has  come  down 
or  whereto  it  has  access,  inasmuch  as  all  the  ac 
tions  of  such  a  being  are  regulated  by  currents 
from  that  region  direct,  just  as  a  person  in  a  state 
of  clairvoyance  or  somnambulism  acts  through 
the  senses  from  a  plane  which  is  different  from  the 
plane  from  which  persons  under  normal  condi 
tions  perform  the  various  functions  of  spirit. 
Mental  and  spiritual  repetition  of  the  sounds  of  the 
various  higher  spheres,  so  far  as  they  can  be  re 
duced  to  articulate  speech,  is  also  necessary.  The 
articulate  representations  are  known  as  real  or  true 
names  or  mantras  of  the  presiding  deities  of  the 
various  spheres.  The  true  name  or  mantra  of  this 
description  of  the  Supreme  Creator,  the  Presiding 
Deity  of  the  purely  spiritual  regions,  the  Lord  of 
all,  is  Radhasoami.  The  function  of  creation  has 
been  performed  by  the  focus  or  reservoir  and  the 
main  wave  or  current  of  spirit-force  emanating 
therefrom,  and  the  true  Creator  is  therefore  the 
vast  ocean  of  spirit  and  the  main  spirit-current 
mentioned  above.  The  articulate  name  correspond 
ing  to  the  sound  of  wave  or  current  is  '  Radha  * 
and  that  representing  the  sound  of  the  ocean  of 
attraction  is  *  Soami.'  Radhasoami  is  then  the 
real  name  of  the  Supreme  Creator.  Great  stress 
is^  therefore,  laid  upon  generating  a  true  and  sin 
cere  love  for  the  true  guide  and  for  performing 


316  APPENDIX    B 

acts  of  service  to  Him,  and  upon  attending  to  His 
discourses.  Contemplation  of  the  image  of  Sanfc 
Satguru,  as  being  the  representative  in  human  form 
of  the  Supreme  Being  Himself,  is  one  of  the  chief 
practices  of  devotion  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith. 

The  moral  code  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith  con 
sists,  so  far  as  our  actions  towards  others  are  con 
cerned,  in  withholding  ourselves  from  such  acts  as 
we  would  that  others  should  not  do  to  us.  True 
virtue  or  vice,  however,  consists  in  the  exaltation 
of  spirit  into  higher  regions  or  its  descent  into  the 
lower,  as  the  case  maybe;  accordingly  actions  or 
impulses  which  tend  to  exalt  or  lower  the  spirit  are 
virtuous  or  sinful.  Abstinence  from  animal  diet 
and  intoxicants  of  all  descriptions  is  indispensable 
for  the  performance  of  the  devotional  practice  pres 
cribed  by  the  Radhasoami  Faith.  Animal  diet- 
produces  great  outward  activity  which  is  prejudi 
cial  to  quiescence  of  mind — the  necessary  condition 
for  the  concentration  and  exaltation  of  spirit,  while 
intoxicants  acting  upon  the  nerve  affect  the 
vehicle  of  the  spirit-current  and  are  thus  injurious 
to  the  devotional  practice. 

In  the  Radhasoami  Faith  there  are  no  outward 
rites  and  ceremonies,  but  anything  used  by  the; 
true  guide  is  considered  to  be  highly  spiritu 
alised,  and  such  garments  which  have  been  in  use, 
or  meals  partaken  by  Him,  or  water  sanctified  by 
His  touch  or  by  the  ablution  of  His  Feet,  or  of 


APPENDIX   B  317 

garlands  worn  by  Him,  are  highly  valued  and  used 
by  devotees  with  great  eagerness.  A  ceremony  con 
sisting  in  looking  intently  into  the  eyes  of  the  trua 
guide,  while  sacred  hymns  of  love  and  devotion 
to  the  Feet  of  Radhasoami  or  of  exaltation  of 
spirit  into  higher  regions  and  the  experiences  of 
higher  bliss  are  being  recited,  is  known  as  the  Strati 
ceremony,  and  is  held  to  be  highly  efficacious  in 
concentrating  and  elevating  the  spirit. 


RADHASOAMI 
SAHAI 


APPENDIX    C 


Constitution  and  Bye=Laws  of  the  Central 
Council  Radhasoami   Satsang 

PART  I— CONSTITUTIONAL  POWERS 

constitutional  powers  of  the  Central  Council 
Radhasoami  Satsaug  which  was  established 
in  the  year  1902  by  a  majority  of  votes  of  the  mem 
bers  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith  are  as  below  : — 

(a)  To  regulate  the  conduct  of  business  per 
taining  to  the  Radhasoami  Satsang  and 
its  branches  and  of  the  followers  of  the 
Radhasoami  religion. 

(&)  To  collect,  preserve,  and  administer  the 
properties  movable  and  immovable  thafc 
have  been  or  may  hereafter  be  dedicated 
to  Radhasoami  Dayal  or  that  may  be 
acquired  for  or  presented  to  the  Radha 
soami  Satsang  for  the  furtherance  of  the 
objects  of  the  Satsang. 

(c)  To  do  the  above  and  all  such  other  things 
as  are  incidental  or  conducive  to  the 


APPENDIX    C  319 

attainment  of  the  above  objects  in  accord 
ance  with  the  directions  of  the  Sant  Satguru 
for  the  time  being,  if  any,  Who  is  recognised 
as  the  Representative  of  the  Supreme 
Creator,  Radhasoaini  Dayal,  and  Whose 
mandates  shall  be  paramount  and  absolute 
in  all  the  matters  referred  to  above. 
(d)  To  fill  up  vacancies  among  its  members 
consequent  upon  death  or  resignation  or 
any  other  cause,  also  to  add  to  or  to  reduce 
its  number  or  remove  any  member  for 
sufficient  reasons,  provided  that  at  no  time 
the  number  of  members  be  less  than  ten. 

PART  II— BYE-LAWS 

2.  The  Council    shall    from  its    members  elect  a 
President,     Vice-President,    and  a  Secretary.     The 
Vice-President  will  succeed  to  the    vacancy  caused 
by  death,  retirement,  or    resignation   of   the  Presi 
dent,    who  will    be    entitled    to    hold    the  office  of 
President    during  his    life  if    not    incapacitated  by 
circumstances    which     may     be    considered    by    a 
majority    of    the  members  of  the  Council  to  neces 
sitate  replacement. 

3.  There  is  no  term  fixed  for  the  office  of  Vice- 
President  and  that  of  the   Secretary.     They  shall, 
however,  be  liable  to  replacement    at  the  discretion 
of  the  Council  under  circumstances  similar  to  those 
mentioned  in  the  preceding  paragraph. 


320  APPENDIX    C 

4.  For    carrying    on    ordinary    routine    work,    a 
Managing  Committee,  composed  of   at  least  4  mem 
bers  of  the  Council  and  the    President   or  the  Vice- 
President,  shall  be  formed. 

5.  The   quorum   of  the   Council    shall  consist    of 
seven  members  including  the  President  or  the  Vice- 
President,  and  that  of  the   Managing  Committee,  of 
three  members  and  its  presiding  officer. 

6.  The     Managing    Committee     shall    have    the 
power  to   make  provisional  appointments,  to  fill  all 
vacancies    among    its    members    and    those    of    the 
Council,  caused  by  death,  incapacity,  resignation  or 
otherwise,  and  shall  have  discretional  powers  in  all 
matters  not  provided  for  in  these  rules,  subject  to 
the  confirmation  of  the  Council. 

7.  Urgent    matters,    which  the   Managing   Com 
mittee  is  not   empowered  to  deal  with  and  which 
cannot  well  be  held  over  till    the  next  meeting  of 
the  Council,  will  be  referred  to  the  President  and 
all  the  members  for  settlement. 

8.  The  Managing  Committee  shall  meet  at  such 
place  as  may  be  appointed  by  the  Council  for  this 
purpose.     It   will  have   the   power  to  appoint   its 
office-bearers  and  to  arrange  for  the  conduct  of  its 
business. 

Note. —  In  cases  of  urgency  when  it  is  not  possible  to  convene 
a  meeting  of  the  Managing  Committee  and  in  purely  routine 
matters,  the  discretional  powers  conferred  upon  the  Committee- 
will  be  exercised  by  its  presiding  officer. 


APPENDIX    C  321 

9.  All  property  of  Raclhasoami  Satsang  and   its 
brandies    both     movable    and    immovable     which 
exists  at  present  or  may  hereafter  be  presented  to 
Radhasoami  Dayal  or  be  otherwise  acquired,   will 
for     the     maintenance     and    advancement    of    the 
objects  of    the    Satsang,    be    vested    in    a    body  of 
trustees  designated  the  "  Radhasoami  Trust.  " 

10.  The  Council    will    meet  not   less    than    once 
every  year  at  Agra  for   the  consideration   and  con 
firmation  of  the  proceedings  of  the  Managing  Com 
mittee  and  the  Radhasoami  Trust,  which  will   be 
submitted    to    it    for   the  above    purposes    and  the 
passing  of  the  annual  reports,  and  for  such    other 
matters  as  may  be  submitted  for  its  orders. 

11.  The  President  or,  in  his  absence,  the  Vice- 
President,  shall  have  the  power  to  convene  meet 
ings  of  the  Council  or  the  Managing  Committee,  at 
his  discretion. 

12.  It  will  be  the  duty  of  the  Council  to  review 
the    annual    accounts    of      the    Satsang    and    its 
branches  as  also  to  pass  their  budgets. 

13.  All  matters  will  be  decided  in  the  Council, 
or  the  Managing  Committee  by  a  majority  of  votes  : 
in  cases  of  equality  of  votes,  the  presiding  officer 
will  have  the  casting  vote. 

14.  The  following  ate  the  principal  duties  of  the 
Secretary  : — 

1.  To  initiate  correspondence  and  issue  instruc 
tions  in  connection  with  the  due  observance 
TJ 


322  APPENDIX    C 

of  standing  rules. 

2.  To  prepare  the  annual  report  in  such  form 
as  may  be  determined  by  the  Council. 

3.  To  record  minutes  of  the  proceedings  of  the 
meetings    of    the     Central    Council,    which 
when  signed  by  the  President  or  the  Vice- 
President  and  the  Secretary  and  confirmed 
at  a  subsequent  meeting,  shall  be  evidence 
of    all    appointments  made,    orders    issued, 
decisions    arrived   at,    and    amendments    to 
rules  authorised    by    the    Council    and    the 
Managing  Committee  respectively. 

4.  To    represent   the    Council    in    all    business 
transacted  by  it. 

5.  To   formulate    and    put    up    such   proposals 
before  the  Council  as  may    be   ordered    by 
the  President,    the   Vice-President,  or    any 
two  members  of  the  Council. 

6.  To  carry  out  the  orders  of  the  President  and 
the  Vice-Presideut,    and   to    give    effect    to 
the   resolutions     of    the    Council     and    the 
Managing  Committee. 

7.  The  supervision  of  maintenance  and  custody, 
of  registers,  returns,  proceedings   and  other 
records. 

15.  All  persons  who  already  belong  to  the 
Radhasoami  Faith,  or  who  may  hereafter  accept  the 
conditions  of  that  Faith  and  be  initiated  in  the 
modes  of  devotion  thereof,  shall  be  registered  by 


APPENDIX    C 


theManagiDg  Committee  or  by  a  Branch  Satsanorin 
^i  prescribed  form.  A  copy  of  this  register  will  be 
submitted  to  the  Managing  Committee  as  soon  as  ifc 
has  been  completed,  and  all  additions  and  alterations 
therein  will  be  annually  reported  to  the  Managing 
Committee  by  the  1st  of  February.  The  names  of 
persons,  who  for  special  reasons  do  not  desire  to 
publicly  disclose  their  identity,  may  be  separately 
recorded  in  a  register  to  be  confidentially  main 
tained  by  the  Secretary. 

16.  Followers  of  the  Radhasoami  religion,  who 
do  not  agree  to  the  registration  of  their   names  as 
•members  of  the   Radhasoami    Satsang,  or    who  do. 
not  carry  out  such  orders  as  may  be  issued  to  them, 
by  proper  authority,  or  infringe  any  of  the  rules, 
shall,  after  due  warning  in  writing,   forfeit  all  the 
privileges  enjoyed  by  the  members  of  the  Satsang, 
viz.  : — 

(1)  The  privilege  to  vote,  and 

(2)  The  right  of  being  provided  with  board  and 
lodging  at   places   where  arrangements   for 
the  accommodation  of  out-station  satsangis 
exist. 

17.  Persons  desirous  of  joining  the  Radhasoami 
Faith  should,  until  otherwise  directed,  apply  for  the 
necessary    initiation     to    Rai     Partab     Singh    Seth 
Saheb,    Lala   Ajudhia   Parshad    Saheb,  or    Pandifc 
Brahrn  Sankar  Misra  Saheb.     The  applicants  will 
be   initiated    by    a    local    satsangi    authorised   for 


324  APPENDIX    C 

the  purpose  by  any  of  the  aforesaid  gentlemen 
or  by  means  of  a  printed  paper  of  instructions; 
furnished  to  them  for  the  purpose.  It  will 
be  open  to  the  Council  to  accord  general  per 
mission  to  a  member  of  Radhasoami  religion 
to  initiate  applicants.  A  register  of  persons  so 
authorised  will  be  maintained  by  the  Managing 
Committee. 

18.  Initiation  by  persons  not  authorised  in  the 
manner    described    above    will    not    be    recognised, 
and  persons  who  after  due  warning  persist  in  ini 
tiating  people  in  the  modes  of  devotional  practices 
of  the  Radhasoami  Faith  will  be  liable  to  suspension 
for  a  time  or  removal  from  the  Satsang. 

19.  Use  of  intoxicants  and  animal  diet,  bribery, 
adultery,    gambling,     and    other  heinous   offences 
which  transgress  morality  or  result  in  serious  harm 
and  injury  to  the  person,   property,  or  reputation  of 
any  individual  or  community,  will  entail   the  sus 
pension  or  removal  of  a    member  of  the    Satsang. 
Sufficient  time  will,  however,  as  far  as  practicable, 
always  be  allowed  for  reformation  or  redress  before 
the  suspension   or  removal   is   carried  into   effect. 
Whenever  suspension  or  removal  is  decided  upon, 
it  will  be  ordered  in  writing  with  the  grounds  for 
it.     The  above  power  will,  generally,  be  exercised 
by  the  Council.     The  Council  shall,  also,  take  pro 
per  notice  of  the  conduct  of  persons  who  behave  in 
such    a   way    towards   the   members   of   any  local 


APPENDIX   C  325 

Satsang  or  other  religious  sects  or  bodies  as  to 
create  friction  and  ill-feeling.  In  case  of  a  heinous 
offence,  however,  the  Managing  Committee  will 
have  the  power  to  suspend  or  remove,  if  necessary, 
such  a  person  immediately.  Action  under  this 
clause  will  specially  be  reported  at  the  next  meeting 
of  the  Central  Council. 

20.  When  there  are  not  less  than  ten  registered 
resident  male  members  of  the  Radhasoami   Faith  at 
any  place,  they  shall  constitute  a  Branch  Satsang 
and  report  this    fact  to    the    Managing  Committee 
for  record. 

21.  For  carrying  on  the  business  of  the  Branch 
Satsang,  the  members  thereof  will  elect  a  corres 
pondent  from    amongst    them    who    would    be    the 
recognised  medium  of  communication  in  respect  of 
management  and  conduct    of  the  Branch    Satsang 
with  the  Managing  Committee,  to  which  body  his 
name  shall  be  communicated  in  writing,  on  election, 
under   the    signature    of    all   the    members   of  the 
Branch     Satsaug.     The     correspondent    may,     for 
sufficient  reasons,  be  replaced  at  the  discretion  of 
the  Branch    Satsang.     The    cause  of    replacement 
and  the  name  of  person  appointed  to  succeed  will 
be  reported  to  the  Managing  Committee  and    the 
Radhasoami  Trust. 

22.  The  Radhasoami  Trust  shall  prescribe  rules 
for  the  proper  care   and   custody    of  the    movable 
and  immovable  property  belonging  to  the   S  itsang 


326  APPENDIX    C 

and  its  branches  and  for  the  proper  maintenance  of 
accounts. 

23.  Every  Branch  Satsang  shall   submit  annu 
ally  to  the  Radhasoami  Trust,  in  such  form  as  may 
be  directed   by    the    Council,  a    statement   of    the 
accounts  of  the  past  year  in  the  beginning  of  Feb* 
ruary,  and   a   budget  of  the   ensuing  year   by   the 
middle   of    November.     Provided  that     no   budget 
need  be  framed  by  a  Branch  Satsang  whose  expen 
diture  is  less  than  Rs.   1,200  per  annum,  nor  need 
accounts    be    rendered  to  the    Radhasoami   Trustr 
when  the  expenditure   falls  short  of  Rs.   200  per 
annum.       The    Radhasoami     Trust    shall    lay    the 
accounts  and  the  budget  at  the  next  meeting  of  the 
Council. 

For  account  purposes  the  year  of  the  Council 
will  begin  on  1st  January  and  end  on  31sfc  Decem 
ber. 

Note. — Alterations  in  the  forms   of  accounts  and  budgets 
may  be  made  by   the   Managing  Committee. 

24.  Expenditure  in  excess   of  the  total  amount 
of  the  budget   shall  not  be    incurred    without    the 
previous  sanction  of  the  Radhasoami  Trust.      Such 
sanctions  will  be  specially  reported,  with  full  par 
ticulars,  to  the  Council   in  the  proceedings   of  the 
Radhasoami  Trust. 

25.  The  Trust  shall  be  revocable  at  the  discre 
tion  of  the  Council  and  the  trustees  shall  hold  their 
office  at  its  pleasure. 


APPENDIX   C  327 

26.  The    members    of     the    Radhasoami    Trust 
shall  be  elected  by  the  Radbasoami  Council  which 
shall  also  make  addition  to,  or  reduction  in,  their 
number,  as  well  as,  fill  up  vacancies  among  them 
caused  by  death,  resignation,  or  removal. 

27.  All  immovable  property  as  soon  as  acquired 
by   Satsang,  either  as  a  present  or   offering,  shall 
be    conveyed    in     the     name    of    the    Radhasoami 
Trust. 

28.  Surplus  funds  of  the  Radhasoami  Trust  shall 
be  invested  in  such  manner  and  with  such  bankers 
or  persons  as  the  Trust  may  deem  fit,  subject  to  the 
confirmation  of  the  Council  :   provided  that  no  im 
movable  property  shall  be  purchased,  sold  or  mort 
gaged,  nor  loans  in  excess  of  Rs.  500  each  raised  or 
given  out  by   the  trustees  unless   they  are  direct 
ed  to  do  so  by  a  resolution  of  the  aforesaid  Council 
passed  to  that  effect ;  provided  also  that  the  aggre 
gate  amount  of  such  loans  as  are  contracted  or  given 
out  by  the    trustees  within    the  aforesaid  limit  of 
Rs.  500  prescribed  for  such  loan  shall,  at  no  time, 
exceed  Rs.  5,000. 

This  bye-law  shall  not  apply  to  bona  fide  deposits 
made  by  satsangis. 

29.  All    other    business    incidental    to  the   care, 
custody,  and  management  of  the  movable  and  im 
movable   property  of  the  Satsang  shall  be  carried 
out  by  the  Trust  under  such  rules  and  regulations 
as  they  may  frame  in  this  behalf  by  a  majority  of 


328  APPENDIX    C 

their  votes,  the  quorum  of  their  meetings  consisting 
of  not  less  than  half  the  number  of  the  trustees, 
subject  to  the  following  provisos  : — 

(a)  That  an  annual  account  of  income  and 
expenditure  of  the  Trust  shall  be  laid 
before  the  Council  for  confirmation  at  such 
time  or  in  such  form  as  the  Council  may 
determine. 

(fr)  That  out  of  the  trustees,  a  Secretary  shall 
be  appointed  by  them  in  whose  name  all 
legal  proceedings  and  other  business  of  the 
Trust  shall  be  carried  on  and  transacted  on 
behalf  of  the  trustees. 

(c)  That  no    trustee   shall    be   entitled   to  any 
remuneration    for    his     services,    but    the 
Council  may  award  such  stipends  as  it  may 
consider    reasonable    to    such    members  as 
may    devote    themselves    wholly     to    the 
service  of  the  Council  and  be  not  possessed 
of    sufficient    means    to    render    it    gratui 
tously. 

(d)  That  the  correspondents  of  several  Branch 
Satsangs  shall  be  the  agents  of  the  Trust 
in  all  matters  pertaining  to  their  respec 
tive  Satsangs  and   their    services  may   be 
utilised  by  the  latter  in   such  manner  as 
they  (the  latter)  shall  deem  fit. 

30.   These     rules    shall     remain    in    force    until 
amended  by  the  Council. 


APPENDIX  C  329 

RULES  FOR  THE  ENROLMENT  AND  CONDUCT  OF 
SADHUS,  &c.,  OF  THE  RADHASOAMI  FAITH 

1.  (a)   Persons,    who     already    belong    to      the 
sadhu  class,    or   (6)    who  have    already   renounced 
their  family    or   have    no    family    ties,    and    who 

<1)  wish  to  devote  themselves  to  the  service  of 
Radhasoami  Dayal  exclusively,  or  (2)  who  are 
incapable  of  earning  their  livelihood,  may,  if  they 
.so  desire,  be  enrolled  as  sadhus  of  the  Radhasoami 
Faith  after  initiation.  Renunciation  of  family  with 
the  above  object  shall  not  be  permitted,  except 
when  such  a  course  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the 
performance  of  the  devotional  practices  and  when 
it  is  not  attended  with  any  real  hardship  to  any 
member  of  the  family. 

2.  The  enrolment  of  sadhus  will  be  sanctioned 
by   the?   Managing  Committee  of   the    Radhasoami 
Satsang  and  be  recorded  in  a  register  in  a  prescribed 
form.     Candidates   who  cannot    personally   appear 
before  the  Managing  Committee  for  enrolment,  shall 
submit  their  application  in   writing,  supported  by 
the  recommendation  of  a  satsangi  of  some  stand 
ing. 

3.  The  allocation  and  movement  of  sadhus  shall 
be   determined    and    regulated    by    the    Managing 
•Committee. 

Random  wanderings  of  sadhus  should  be  strong 
ly  deprecated,  and  permission  to  proceed  to  another 


330  APPENDIX   C 

place  should  be  given  under  a  pass,  in  a  prescribed 
form,  in  those  cases  only  where  such  a  course 
appears  to  be  necessary  in  the  interest  of  Satsangr 
or  when  the  Committee  is  satisfied  that  it  is  neces 
sary  in  the  private  interests  of  the  sadhu  to  whom 
such  permission  is  granted. 

Sadhus  travelling  without  a  pass  are  precluded 
from  the  benefit  of  board  and  lodging  and  other 
privileges  enjoyed  by  a  sadhu  travelling  under 
authority.  Presents  in  cash  shall  not  be  offered  tor 
or  accepted  by,  sadhus  travelling  under  a  pass.  In 
case  of  need,  however,  presents  of  clothing  or  way- 
expenses  are  not  prohibited. 

4.  (1)  A  registered  sadhu  will  be  supplied  with 
free  board,  lodging,  necessary  clothes,  and 
such  monthly  allowance  as  the  Managing 
Committee  may  determine. 

(2)  A    registered    sadhu  shall  attend   at   all 
meetings  of  the  Satsang  of  the  place  where 
he  is  allocated,  unless  prevented  to  do  so 
by  sickness  or  other  justifiable  reasons, 

(3)  He  shall  practise  devotion  at  least  twice 
every  day  for  not  less  than  half  an  hour 
each  time,  save  under  circumstances  men 
tioned  in  the  preceding  clause. 

(4)  He    shall    perform    such    work    of    the 
Satsang  as  may  be  entrusted  tc  him  by 
the     Managing    Committee     or    by    the 
Satsang  to  which  he  may  be  attached. 


APPENDIX    C 


331 


(5)  He  should  not  leave  his  premises  for  the 
city,     except    on     personal     or     Satsang 
1  >  11  *  {ness,   or    for   the   service   of  the    Sant 
Satguru  of  the  time,  nor  shall  he  indulge 
in  objectless  wanderings. 

(6)  He   shall  have  no  dealings  \vith  non-aged 
satsangins    or    other    females     except    in 
connection    with    indispensable    business. 
The  prohibition  extends  to  religious  help 
too,    which   will   be  permissible  in    those 
cases  only  where  a  male  relative  is  present 
and  where  it  is  specially  solicited. 

(7)  No    sadhu    shall    put    on     ochre- coloured 
clothes. 

5.  Infringement  of  any  of  the  duties  enumerated 
in  the  preceding  paragraph  will,  after  two  warnings, 
entail   suspension   or  removal   at   the   discretion  of 
the  Managing  Committee. 

Orders  for  removal  and  suspension  will  be  in 
writing  and  will  be  subject  to  appeal  to  the  Council. 
Suspension  or  removal  of  sadhus  will  be  notified  to 
Branch  Satsangs  and,  as  far  as  possible,  to  other 
satsangis  as  well. 

6.  Only  aged  females  and  those  already  belong 
ing  to  the  sadhu  class   will  be   enrolled   as  sadhus. 
The   Managing  Committee  may,  however,  generally 
maintain    at    the    expense    of    the    Satsang,    which 
should  not  be  in  excess  of  the   actual  requirements, 
such    females    as    are    sincerely    devoted    to    the 


332  APPENDIX    C 

Radhasoami  Faith  and  have  no  means  of  support. 
Females  of  both  classes,  mentioned  above,  would, 
mutatis  'mutandis,  be  subject  to  the  rules  prescribed 
for  sadhus.  Females,  belonging  to  the  former 
class,  will  be  registered  in  the  register  prescribed 
for  sadhus,  those  of  the  latter  class  in  a  separate 
register  in  a  form  similar  to  that  for  sadhus. 

7.  Under  special  circumstances,  the  Managing 
Committee  may  also  maintain,  at  the  expense  of  the 
Satsang,  such  male  satsangis  as  are  sincerely 
devoted  to  the  Radhasoami  religion  and  have  no 
means  of  support.  All  rules  and  restrictions 
applying  to  sadhus  will  apply,  mutatis  mutandis,  to 
such  satsangis.  The  names  of  all  such  persons  to 
whom  such  concession  is  granted  will  be  reported 
to  the  Central  Council  together  with  a  short  state 
ment  of  the  reasons  necessitating  the  grant.  Their 
names  will  also  be  recorded  in  a  register  similar  to 
that  for  sadhus. 


RADHASOAMI 
SAHAI 


APPENDIX  D 


A  Brief  Report  on  the  Radhasoami  Faith 

?HE  object  of  Radhasoami  religion  is  to  attain- 
immortal  and  supreme  bliss,  subject  to  no- 
change  and  entirely  free  from  pain  of  every  des 
cription,  by  exalting  the  spirit  or  soul  to  the  purely 
spiritual  regions,  through  its  passage  within  the 
physical  frame  which  is  a  miniature  of  the  cosmos. 
The  passage  above  mentioned  is  similar  to  that 
traversed  by  the  conscious  entity  in  receding  from 
the  wakeful  state  into  the  conditions  of  dream,, 
deep  slumber,  trance,  and  death  ;  but  it  commences 
upwards  from  the  focus  of  spirit  in  the  pineal 
gland  (i.  e.,  where  the  spirit-currents  flowing 
through  the  auditory,  optic,  olfactory,  &c.,  nerves 
converge)  through  the  grey  and  white  matter  of 
the  brain  which  have  correspondence  respectively 
with  the  regions  of  Universal  Mind  or  Brahm, 
and  the  purely  spiritual  region,  the  physical 
frame  having  correspondence  with  the  physical 


334, 


APPENDIX    D 


world.  There  are  three  methods  for  developing 
the  spiritual  force  and  exalting  it  as  explained 
Jbelow  : — 

(1)  Inward  repetition  of  the  holy  name  Eadha- 
soami. — This  name  has  no  connection  with 
Krishna  and  represents  in  articulate  speech 
the  sound  accompanying  the  spirit-current 
and  spirit-centre  by  means  of  which  the 
whole  creation  has  been  evolved  by  the 
Supreme  Creator.  The  repetition  of  this 
holy  name  results  in  accordance  with  the 
law  of  harmony  in  the  communion  of  spirit 
with  the  spiritual  force  and  thus  helps 
the  devotee  in  gaining  access  into  the 
higher  regions. 

(2)  Help  internal  and  external  of  an  adept  or 
true  guide. — One  who  has  reached  the 
purely  spiritual  region  is  called  a  true 
guide  or  perfect  adept.  He  has  access  into 
the  various  planes  of  creation  and  accord 
ingly  can  internally  help  a  devotee  who 
has  commenced  the  devotional  practice 
prescribed  by  Radhasoami  Faith.  His 
external  help  and  influence  are  also  very 
efficacious  in  aiding  a  devotee  in  the  above 
practice  inasmuch  as  His  physical  frame 
is  highly  spiritualised. 

•(3)   Communion  of  the  spirit   with    the   internal 
spiritual      sound.— The     spiritual     current 


APPENDIX    D  335 

present  in  the  creation  is  heard  as  sound 
on  the  faculty  of  hearing  becoming  suffi 
ciently  developed  and  sensitive  by  the 
performance  of  the  methods  of  devotion 
mentioned  above.  The  communion  of  the 
spirit  with  the  sound,  referred  to  above, 
consists  in  listening  with  undivided  atten 
tion  to  the  sound  accompanying  the  spirit 
or  sensory  current  flowing  through  the 
brain  whose  direction  is  inwards  and  up 
wards.  There  are  internal  sounds  accom 
panying  the  motor  current  also,  but  they 
are  to  be  avoided  as  their  tendency  is  out 
wards  and  downwards. 

Outward  outburst  of  spiritual  activity  accom 
panying  the  various  passions  results  in  the 
•deterioration  and  descent  of  spirit  into  material 
regions,  and  therefore  it  is  absolutely  necessary 
that  indulgence  in  passions  should  be  carefully 
avoided. 

Humility,  forbearance,  patience,  and  other 
virtuous  qualities,  which  more  or  less  pacify  the 
mind  and  result  in  the  quiescence  of  outward 
activity,  are  helpful  in  the  development  of  the 
spiritual  force  whose  direction  is  inwards.  A 
follower  of  the  Radhasoami  Faith  is  therefore 
strictly  enjoined  to  observe  them  to  the  best  of  his 
ability  under  all  circumstances.  Public  preaching 
is  not  encouraged  by  the  Radhasoami  religion,  and 


330  APPENDIX    D 

the  devotees  are  enjoined  not  to  explain  the  prin 
ciples  of  this  religion  to  any  one  save  those  who  are 
true  seekers  after  truth  and  sufficiently  intelligent 
to  understand  them. 


RADHASOAMl 

SAHAI 


APPENDIX  E 


ll     n    ll 


11(11 
fi^T  f^T^f  ?pT 


fa*4MI    II  8  II 

€t  i 


338  APPENDIX   E 


ii   m  ii 


tr 


APPENDIX   E  339 


ft      r  11811 


II  3?  T  II 


340  APPENDIX   E 


II     ftT  II 


ftr 
II  *TTC3T  II 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


BL 
R3M57 


Misra,  Brahm  Sankar 


°n